Tales of the Legacy - Concluded

Delemental

First Post
Boiling Point

It took the party two and a half weeks to make the trip up from Stacks to the city of M’ioch, which stood at the end of the pass between Medos and the Dwarven Confederates. From there it would only be a short journey to M’ioch’s sister city in the Confederates, Krek, and from there north through Laeshir, along the Lassh River to Aleppi, and then east to Merlion. The party again found themselves having to adjust to life on the trail after a month spent living at the inns of M’dos. Among the adjustments were the campsite arrangements; there were Kyle and Autumn, of course, who now shared a tent, and Osborn also now packed a small tent of his own, having decided after Tolly’s departure that he preferred having space to himself. Razael tended to sleep outside, deigning to seek shelter only in the worst of weather. Lanara, Xu, Arrie, and Maddie debated whether or not they would change their own sleeping arrangements, but decided for the time being to remain in their large four-person tent.

As the party drew closer to M’ioch, they noticed an unusual amount of traffic on the road. Soon things had slowed to a crawl, with several horses, wagons, and people jostling for position.

“What’s the holdup?” Lanara called out to a drover nearby, who shrugged. Others nearby gave the same answer.

“Why don’t I ride ahead to the gate and see what I can find out?” Osborn offered. He turned Rupert out of the pack, and circled around outside the crowd, heading for the city gates.

It was about an hour before he came back. “There’s a major problem,” Osborn said, “the pass into the Confederates is blocked.”

“Blocked?” Arrie said, somewhat surprised. “Blocked how?”

“Landslide, I think, I couldn’t tell for sure. Up at the gate they’re telling folks it’ll be a month before it’s cleared.”

“A month?” Lanara groaned. “We’re stuck in M’ioch for a month?”

“What’s wrong with M’ioch?” Kyle asked.

“It’s an Ardaran strongpoint, that’s what’s wrong,” the cansin replied. “It’s not that different from Laeshir. Fewer dwarves, that’s all.”

The party all shook their heads. They’d spent a month in Laeshir the last time they’d been through the Confederates, as Tolly had needed time to finish working on his armor. The only thing that had kept their stay from becoming unbearably tedious was the Midsummer festival, although even that was marred when Maddie’s bastard son Marrek had framed Lanara for a crime in the city.

“I’m surprised they’re not sending riders out from the city to tell people what’s going on,” Arrie mused.

“They’re working on it, I think,” Osborn said. “Sounds like they’re trying to get things organized inside the city first.”

Osborn began spreading the word among the other travelers and merchants near them, and the news spread quickly. Several of the smaller caravans and groups began to extricate themselves from the line, turning around to head for another city. Later, as messengers from M’ioch began to arrive and relay the news officially, others also chose to depart. Some of the larger merchant caravans were directed off the main road and led in toward the open fields surrounding the city; M’ioch itself wasn’t large enough to accommodate everyone for an entire month, so campsites were being established outside the walls where the merchants could wait for the pass to reopen. Thus by the time the party reached M’ioch, they were still able to find lodging, at rates only moderately higher than normal.

They spent the better part of the next day getting supplies. Details of the landslide that had blocked the pass were beginning to circulate through the city. Apparently, the children of a clan of stone giants that lived near the pass had been out playing, and had accidentally triggered the slide. The giants were helping with clearing the pass, as were crews from both Krek and M’ioch, but the slide was immense. Though most of the essential goods were going to the crews helping with the pass, but fortunately the party was already fairly well supplied with the basics, and were only seeking a few esoteric goods.

That night, they discussed their options. “So, we agree that no one wants to wait out the month here,” Arrie said, “so what can we do?”

“There are old tunnels that extend under the mountains,” Maddie said. “I heard someone else talking about them. Apparently it’s how the dwarves got goods in and out of their lands before the passes were secured. Not much use to a big caravan, but smaller groups would be fine. Problem is, they’re not patrolled any more like they used to be, so no one’s sure what’s down there.”

“I’ve had enough danger and uncertainty for a while, thanks,” Lanara said, wrinkling her nose. “What else?”

“Well, the pass to the Peca Provinces is still open,” Arrie observed. “Northeast to the Plingold River, then sail down into the Provinces to the coast, and take a gnomish galleon to Tlaxan.”

“Yargh, more boats?” Lanara complained.

“Well, missy, could be we just follow the Plingold rather than sail it,” Razael offered, “and instead of going all the way to the coast, we can cut across and go through Tengolt.”

“I like that better,” the bard admitted, “but why not just find another pass through the Confederates? There can’t be only one.”

“No, likely there’s other ways of getting across the mountains,” Razael mused.

“But how is that any better than the tunnels?” Kyle asked. “Just as likely to be dangerous, plus we have to worry about finding the pass and crossing it while dealing with the elements.”

“I’ll give you that. But you got any better ideas, now’s the time, boy,” Razael said.

“Well, I could try to teleport us.”

Autumn looked at Kyle. “Since when do you know that spell?”

“I don’t. But it’s not an uncommon spell, I could probably find it here.”

You’re saying you could teleport us to Krek?” Arrie asked.

“No, actually, I’d aim for Laeshir. I’ve never been to Krek, but we spent a month in Laeshir.” Kyle fell silent for a moment. “Actually, I’m pretty sure I could get us all the way to Noxolt from here.”

“Pretty sure?” Razael asked. “How many times you done this, boy?”

“Well, none. But it’s simple in theory. It’d take a couple of trips, of course. I’m assuming that we aren’t getting Defiance or Ghost into Autumn’s portable hole.”

Razael sniffed. “Ain’t worth going somewhere if you can’t walk. And I’m not sure we can trust your ‘theories’ anyhow.”

Kyle frowned, and shrugged. “Fine. We wanted to get to Tlaxan; I made a suggestion. Sorry that you find it so objectionable.”

Razael leaned over to Arrie. “Is he always getting his feelings hurt like this, Princess?” Arrie only shrugged in response.

“Okay, then,” Kyle said, “how about this? There’s a blocked pass, right? Sounds like they need help clearing it, right? And we’re supposed to be helping people, right? Why not go help with the pass? It might not open the pass any faster, but we stay busy and do something useful.”

“I agree with that,” Autumn said. “We’re not above common labor.”

“Some of us aren’t as good at that common labor,” Lanara pointed out. “And why should we clean up their mess?”
“Yeah, what am I supposed to do?” Razael added.

“Well, I’m sure the workers could use some entertainment, or some rousing songs to help them work. And I’ll bet they’ll need help hunting to feed all those workers.”

“Yeah, well, the problem with working with giants is they tend to forget you’re there,” Razael said.

“Yeah, I agree,” Osborn said. “Getting stepped on? No thanks.”

The others failed to be inspired by the idea of clearing rubble, so the idea was dropped. “What do you think, Arrie?” Autumn asked.

“Well, it doesn’t really matter to me. While I’m not in a huge hurry to be in Tlaxan, since I’m going to have plenty of time to enjoy it later…”

“It’s not like we’re going to Tlaxan to live,” Kyle snapped. “We’re there long enough for Autumn to get this Duchess thing squared away, find ourselves a ship, and we’re gone.”

“I know, I know,” Arrie said, “it’s just a mental thing for me.”

“I’d prefer to take the pass to the Provinces, myself,” Razael said. “I’m not too fond of being underground.”

“Well, if we can avoid any boats, then I’m up for that,” Lanara said. “I’ve never been to the Provinces.”

“Anyone opposed?” Arrie asked. When no one spoke up, she nodded. “Peca it is then. We can head out in the morning.”

As everyone got up and went on with their night, Autumn grabbed onto Kyle’s arm gently. “Are you all right? You seem to be in a bad mood.”

“It’s nothing.”

“I don’t believe you. Earlier today you were up in our room alone for over an hour, and after that you were testy. What’s going on?”

“I said it’s nothing. I don’t want to talk about it.”

Autumn frowned. “Kyle…”

Kyle sighed. “Look, really, it’s just a mood. I was working on something upstairs earlier, and it didn’t… work out like I thought it would. But I really haven’t had time to figure it out yet, and I don’t want to get all worked up over something that’s probably a simple mistake. Once we get to Tlaxan, I can spend a little more time on the problem. I was kind of hoping people would go for the teleporting idea just to speed things up a bit. I think that Razael’s comment about not trusting me just rubbed me the wrong way.”

Autumn looked up at Kyle for a while. “All right, then. You usually tell me when something’s wrong, so I guess I can trust you when you say this is just a mood.” She smiled at him. “Now, why don’t you come to bed? I can help take your mind off the day.”

“Now there’s an offer I don’t need to think twice about.”

But even as he walked back to the rear of the inn, Autumn’s arm in his, Kyle’s mind couldn’t help but pick at his ‘failed’ experiment. I had to have made a mistake somewhere, he thought, or I’m forgetting something simple. It never was my strongest area of study at the Tower. Because it just doesn’t make sense.



* * *



It was a week out of M’ioch before they reached the head of the Plingold River. They had to explain several times to the baffled gnomes that they weren’t going to be taking a ship downriver, but would be riding their horses. After a while the gnomes, who couldn’t understand why anyone wouldn’t take a boat, ended up just shrugging and waving a friendly goodbye.

The trail was thin in places, but navigable. The party saw no other travelers as they rode; presumably those others who had also chosen to head into the Provinces from M’ioch were taking gnomish riverboats. As they rode, Razael frequently doubled back and obscured their trail, still wary after their experiences with Hungai and Aranal. At one point the river split in two, and the party was forced to follow the smaller branch, as the more navigable portion fed into a sheer ravine that allowed no trail for the horses. The gnomish guides they had consulted indicated that the branch would rejoin the main river when they were nearly out of the mountains, and that they’d find a few small fishing towns along the way.

The party rode for another three days before they saw signs of civilization. On the morning of the third day, the river valley opened up into a natural caldera, and the river fed into a decent sized lake, with a town sitting on the southern shore. They could see steam rising off the lake, and occasionally the water would ripple as an air bubble rose and broke the surface.

“Hot springs?” Xu asked Razael. When he nodded, Lanara grinned. “Wonderful!” Beside her, Maddie was also smiling from ear to ear.

Kyle sighed. “Looks like we’re here for another month.”

“Something’s wrong,” Osborn said. “The gates are closed, and no one’s moving inside.”

“And what’s that over there?” Arrie asked, pointing. Further south, well outside the town walls, they saw a tent city set up, just before the caldera began to climb back into mountains.

“I hope it’s not another siege,” groaned Autumn.

“We can go around,” Razael observed.

“Or,” Osborn said quickly, “we could go see what’s wrong.” Razael and Lanara both rolled their eyes.

“I can go talk to them,” Arrie said.

“I’ll go with you,” Autumn said. “Anyone else?”

Lanara and Xu volunteered to go down as well. Razael turned to Maddie. “What are you doing?”

“I’m going down to talk to the gnomes.”

He sighed. “Then I guess I’m going with you.”

“I’ll stay here, just in case,” Osborn said.

“Me too,” Kyle said, “just wave if it’s okay to come down.”

The party, minus Kyle and Osborn, made their way down the trail toward the town, splitting off once they reached the bottom of the road to head for the tent city. They were greeted just outside the tents by a small cluster of friendly, if slightly haggard gnomes.

“Welcome, strangers,” one of the gnomes said. “I’m sorry we don’t have much in the way of hospitality to offer you, but please, if you need a place to rest, feel free to join us. I must warn you to stay away from the lake, however. It’s become quite a bit more dangerous as of late.”

“Yes, we were kind of wondering why you were all out here,” Arrie said.

“If you’d like to come have breakfast with us, we can explain. Your friends can come down too, if they want.” The gnome pointed past the party to where Kyle and Osborn sat watching.

“Breakfast sounds good,” Lanara said. She waved at Kyle and Osborn, who started down the slope toward the tents.

The party was led into the middle of the tent city. Looking around, they could see that the gnomes were barely getting by. They caught glimpses of families boiling roots in iron pots, or trying to stitch up threadbare tents. The party was offered a breakfast of thin, watery soup and dry bread; they ate sparingly, not because they weren’t hungry but because they felt awkward eating what were obviously very thin supplies.

When they finished, the gnome that had greeted them introduced himself as Zander. “It all started about the onset of spring or so,” Zander said. “Or what passes for spring up here. We’re pretty prosperous up here, even in the winter, since the lake is heated from below. It’s a… it’s a… oh, there’s a word for it that the smart folks use. Starts with a G.”

“Geothermal?” Razael offered.

“That’s the one. Anyway, we exist mainly on the fish here; we salt and smoke them and sell them to the Confederates and the rest of the Provinces. The fish are adapted to the water here, and it gives them an unusual flavor, so we have a market for our fish even down by the coast where fish are plentiful. We also sell scrimshaw. It’s enough to get by, even way out here.”

“So what happened in the spring?” Kyle asked.

“Well, we’d started our spring fishing run,” Zander began, “and about a week into it some of our boats were attacked by these big lobster-like creatures. Kind of like a cross between a lobster and a snail, actually, with these dangly tentacles on their mouth.”

The party looked around at each other, seeing if any of them recognized the creature by its description. Arrie and Razael seemed to recognize it; Arrie turned to the others and quietly mouthed the word “Chuul” so as not to interrupt.

“They’d attack the ships, dump the people overboard, and grabbed them. We weren’t able to recover some of the bodies. Some of the survivors report seeing sharks under the water along with the lobster creatures. But this is a fresh-water lake, so it must have been something else. Besides, in certain areas this lake is hot enough to boil. The native fish are fine, but anything not adapted to it would boil alive.”

“That is unusual,” Arrie said. “Is it possible that the lake is…” she struggled to choose words that Zander might understand better, “is it possible that the lake is of purer water than normal?”
“I don’t know,” Zander admitted. “We don’t swim in the lake a lot. It’s cool enough near the shore, but further out and you run the risk of swimming into spots that’ll scald the skin off your bones.”

“I just wonder if it might be more elemental water,” Arrie explained, “something that might have affected these creatures.”

“Oh,” Zander said, but then shrugged his shoulders. “I don’t think so.”

“How long has this been going on?” Maddie asked.

“About three months,” Zander said. “The reason we came out here is that shortly after the lobster creature attacks started, people started disappearing from town. We decided to leave the town to protect ourselves. The disappearances have stopped, but if we can’t get back into our town we may have to abandon it and move away.” Zander’s face fell as he considered the option of leaving his home.

“Did any strangers arrive in town around that time?” Maddie asked.

“No, just us. We don’t get many travelers, so new people would have been noticed.”

“Chuul are somewhat intelligent,” Razael pointed out.

“And amphibious,” Arrie added. “They could have come into town.”

“I don’t see how,” Zander said. “We never found a trace of the people who vanished or who took them, and those lobster… chuul are big and crab-like.”

“It seems pretty horrible for you guys,” Arrie said, “would you mind if we took a look around?”

“That would be wonderful! Is there anything we can do to help?”

Razael sighed heavily. “I thought we were trying to get to Tlaxan.” Next to him, Lanara muttered her agreement.” Kyle, sitting next to them both, leaned over and tapped the Tower graduation tattoo on the back of the Lanara’s hand.

“This means that you should expect frequent delays,” he said to them quietly. Razael held up his own hand, showing that he didn’t have a tattoo.

“But she does,” Kyle said, nodding toward Maddie.

Arrie had continued speaking with Zander, asking for information about the layout of the town, and to speak with survivors of the chuul attacks. She suggested to Razael that as long as they were staying, the tracker could try and hunt down some game so that the town had better than root stew for dinner. Instead, Razael decided to take a few of the younger gnomes out into the wilds and help them identify a few more edible roots and plants to supplement their diet.

“If nothing else, we can help tide them over and make things a little more comfortable,” Arrie said. “Kind of like that first exercise we did at the Tower.”

“I’d like to take a peek at the lake,” Kyle said.

“Why don’t we check out the town?” Osborn suggested. “See if the chuul are still coming into the town now that the people are gone.”

The party spent more time questioning the townsfolk before heading for the town later that afternoon. The gnomes seemed to respond well to Autumn, sensing a kindred spirit in the aasimar, and opened up to her easily. They learned that all the people taken lived close to the lake, and were taken without sounds or signs of struggle. All the disappearances happened at night. The description of the chuul attacks indicated that they didn’t seem to be bothered by the heat of the lake, at times swimming right through patches of boiling water. A few survivors did describe seeing sharks or shark-like creatures swimming well below the water. A couple of the fishermen noted that on the occasions when a local priest of Krûsh or one of the town’s holy warriors was on the lake, their boat would be attacked first.

By the time Razael had returned, the party was ready to investigate the town in person. They talked as they walked to the town gates.

“So, we have chuuls that are immune to fire, and seem to target priests and holy warriors,” Arrie observed.

“Sounds like fiendish creatures to me,” Kyle said.

“It’d make a lot of sense,” Arrie agreed, “and might explain the sharks. If one of them was a sort of unholy warrior or priest, then they could be summoning the sharks.”

“Okay, then,” Kyle said, “so we dangle Autumn from a rope in the middle of the lake, and when the chuul come we blast them.” When everyone looked at Kyle, he threw up his hands. “Oh, come on! You know I’m joking!”

“You know, Kyle, I think it would work,” Razael said. “In that armor she kind of looks like a lobster.”

“I was joking,” Kyle said again.

“We are not boiling my sister,” Arrie said.

Autumn was looking down at herself. “I don’t look like a lobster,” she pouted.

“Of course you don’t. You look just fine in your armor,” Kyle said, putting an arm around her.

“Thank you, sweetie,” she said.

“Yeah, but he thinks you look better out of your armor,” Lanara quipped.

Kyle grinned and shrugged, as if to say ‘I can’t argue with that’. “Well, before we do anything with whatever’s under that lake, I’ll want to take a day to prepare new spells. Sonic spells are really best for underwater use.”

“A thought occurs to me…” Arrie said.

“Is that what that noise was?” Lanara quipped.

“Thank you, Lanara,” Arrie said mockingly.

“Sorry, Arrie.”

“We may have to help teach these gnomes to defend themselves,” Arrie continued. “We don’t know how big the problem is. Kyle, is there any way to whip up some thunderstones or similar items for the gnomes to use?”

“Can’t really say. Depends on what they have in the town.”

“What if we poisoned the lake to get rid of them?” Maddie asked.

“Then that kind of screws the gnomes too, doesn’t it?” Lanara pointed out.

“And anyone downstream,” Razael added.

“We can’t just deal with whatever’s down there now,” Autumn said. “We need to find and eliminate the source of this incursion.”

“Well, the lake is hot…” Arrie said.

“Yes, so?”

“So, whose element is fire?”

Autumn sighed. “Grabâkh. So you think the rift is under the lake.”

“The lake’s been hot for a while, so I don’t think that’s the entire story,” Arrie mused. “Maybe something happened recently to change things. An earthquake exposed some sort of planetary portal or something. Once we get to the town, we can look at the lake and see if we spot any glaring abysses of evil. But for now, dealing with chuul are bad enough. From what I remember from classes at the Tower, because I did occasionally pay attention,” the last part she said particularly loudly in Autumn’s direction, “is that chuul are incredibly strong, and they have some sort of paralyzing substance on their tentacles. They’re also more intelligent than they look. If these chuul are enhanced by fiendish energies as well, then this could be ugly.”

The party arrived in town, and began looking around. Osborn and Razael slipped off to see what they could find, trying to stay hidden in case they were being watched. The rest of the party meandered through the streets, not seeing anything unusual other than the fact that they were the only souls present.

They finally made it to the edge of the lake, and looked around, but saw nothing but empty fishing boats bobbing at their piers. A couple of the boats had chunks missing from the sides. Razael and Osborn came back a few minutes later.

“No sign of chuul tracks,” Razael said. “Just what you’d expect to see. I’d say they haven’t been in the town since the gnomes packed up and left.”

“No sense going to the market if the stalls are empty,” Lanara said.

“Well, something’s been through here,” Osborn said. “I checked out a few of the homes, and it looks like they’ve been tossed by thieves. Jewelry and valuables missing, stuff like that.”

“Thieves passing through?” Maddie asked, but Osborn shook his head. “Zander said they haven’t had any strangers in town for months. Even from where they are now, there’s no way they could miss people coming into this valley from either end.”

“One of their own, then, sneaking in at night to help themselves to their neighbor’s goods?” Razael asked.

“Doesn’t make sense. It’s not in the nature of gnomes to steal from one another like that, and besides, where would a thief stash all that stuff? In his tent?” Osborn looked out across the lake. “No, they’re all too terrified of the chuul for one of them to get the nerve to sneak back in here for that.”

Osborn noticed that Kyle was staring out across the water intently. “Hey, pal! What’s up?”

Kyle continued to look out across the water. “Well, I’ll be.”

“What?” Autumn asked.

“The lake… there’s a Node out there somewhere.”

“Are you sure?”

Kyle nodded. “I can’t tell what kind it is from here. A Water Node is the most obvious, but in this situation I wouldn’t be surprised if it was a Fire Node.”

“A Fire Node would explain the heat, and the evil,” Arrie said.

Razael wandered off a short distance while the others discussed the Node. He’d run across a few Nodes in his lifetime, and he didn’t see what the big deal was. Arcanists seemed to go nuts over them, though. “I’m going to check out the shoreline outside of town a bit,” he called out. “Make sure those chuul haven’t thought to start exploring the rest of the valley looking for food. Y’all stay put.”

It was about an hour before Razael came back, and the sun was already halfway below the edge of the mountains that surrounded them. “I saw something I can’t make heads or tails of,” he said to the others.

“What was it?” Arrie asked.

“Well, down that way, I saw a set of tracks coming out of the water. They were bipedal, like a man, and I’d say about the same size and weight as Kyle there. But they had long, webbed toes – about three times as long as a human’s toes.”

“That is strange,” agreed Kyle.

“It gets better. About ten paces from the edge of the lake, the tracks change into wolf tracks, and go off into the mountains. I tracked them a bit, but lost the trail.”

“What on this earth would come out of the water and turn into a wolf?” Osborn asked.

“Were-duck?” Kyle said quietly.

“Yeah, you may be right there,” Razael said sarcastically.

“You said the tracks were humanoid?” Arrie said.

“Well, other than the webbed feet, yeah, the tracks look like what something shaped like a person would leave. Before they turn into wolf tracks, that is.”

“Sounds like a druid,” Arrie said. “They can turn into wild animals.”

“Yeah, but there ain’t no animals that leave webbed-feet tracks like that.”

“I think the webbed feet might be its natural form, Razael.”

“So,” Kyle said, “we’ve got an aquatic humanoid creature, probably evil, that can turn into other animals. Osborn, didn’t you say that those houses looked like they’d been gone through deliberately?”

“Sure did. Nothing professional by any means, but whoever did it knew what they wanted – jewelry boxes flipped, mattresses cut open, that kind of thing.”

“I’d suspect a water-touched druid,” Arrie said, “but stuff like this would be against their nature. I have trouble picturing an evil water-touched.”

“It’s not impossible, though,” Kyle said. “being Touched doesn’t automatically mean you follow the morals of your outsider ancestors.” Kyle hooked a thumb at Autumn. “I’m sure there are a few evil aasimar out there.”

“There was that fire-touched tavern owner, Grog, from Dagger Rock,” Osborn said. “He seemed a decent fellow.”

“And water-touched still look mainly human,” Kyle said, “not big webbed toes.”

“So, something extraplanetary?” Arrie asked.

“Well, any outsider with feet like that would probably come from Chelesta,” Kyle said. “Krûsh’s planet is the only one that would require that. And if they’re coming from there, then it really is impossible for them to be behind the chuul attacks or the burglaries. Krûsh’s minions are good by nature.”

“What about kuo-toa?” Razael asked. “They seem to fit the bill. Didn’t think about them at first, seeing as the fish-men pretty much stay in the ocean.”

The others thought about Razael’s theory, and nodded. “Kuo-toa do make sense,” Arrie agreed. “Their priests do practice nature magic. But why all the way up here?”

“Well, we could just feed the gnomes for another day, then head on out and send someone else to look at it.”

“No, I think we should investigate further,” Arrie said. “I’m just saying that the theories we’re coming up with are…”

“Out there?” Razael finished for her. “Not worth bothering with?”

Arrie sighed. “Look at it this way, Razael. The bigger name you make for yourself as a philanthropist out here…”

Razael interrupted. “A what now?”

“A goody two-shoes,” Lanara said.

“The bigger reputation you make, the better chance you have of getting to return home to Tlaxan of your own choice and staying.”

“Ain’t likely, Princess,” Razael said. “I get in trouble there without even trying. At least your husband only banishes me. His father liked to have me whipped.”

There was an awkward moment of silence. “So, thoughts?” Autumn asked at last.

“I think the kuo-toa theory is the best one we have,” Kyle said. “The chuul could be acting as their allies, or their slaves.”

“It might explain the sharks, too,” Maddie said. “The sharks could have been the kuo-toa druids watching the chuul to make sure nothing went wrong.”

“And coming into the town to steal,” Osborn said. “Kuo-toa are pretty greedy.”

“Does anyone have any valuables?” Maddie said suddenly.

“Yes, but not that I’m giving to the fish-men,” Osborn said.

“No, I’m thinking that we bait whoever’s behind this. They’re coming into town looking for jewelry and stuff, right? So we set up a ‘shiny shrine’ and then hit them when they come to check it out.”

“An ambush?” Razael said, “sounds good. We could set up a false camp with a few items scattered about, make it look like we’re scavengers or something. Then we could just watch and see what happens.”

The others agreed to the plan. They quickly went about setting up a camp, trying to make it look like it was being used. Razael and Osborn took up positions to observe the camp while the others wandered about the town “exploring”. It was morning by the time everyone came back to the camp, which had obviously been searched.

“Well, we called it right,” Razael said, “it’s the kuo-toa. They came and looted the camp last night. There were two of them, but I didn’t see any chuul. I followed them back to the lake, and when I saw them swimming away I noticed that they were weaving and dodging back and forth. I think they’ve figured out where the hotter parts of the lake are and have learned to avoid them.”

Autumn sighed. “Well, at least we know for sure what’s behind this. Any sign they had fiendish blood?”

Osborn shook his head. “As far as I can tell, they were normal. For fish-people, that is.”

The party spent a few minutes reviewing what they remembered from their classes at the Tower about the kuo-toa, or what Razael remembered from his experiences. Little of it explained why the amphibious creatures would be here, in a mountain lake so far from the ocean.

“So, now what?” Arrie asked.

“Well, for all we know there’s a whole colony of those fish-men down there,” Razael said.

“So the gnomes should move,” Lanara suggested.

“You may have it right, missy,” Razael agreed. “We could send word to the government, let them know there’s an infestation up here. That way we could leave.”

“I like the way he thinks,” Lanara said.

Kyle, however, scowled at the suggestion, and Xu shook her head. “But where is the glory in that? The honor?”

“If you want glory, I can write a song,” Lanara said.

“You know, you humans are just too absorbed in this glory concept. I’ve been around for five hundred years, and it don’t matter what glory you’ve got.”

“That’s because you have any,” Autumn said.

“I don’t agree with that, and I’m not human,” Maddie said.

“Me either,” Osborn chimed in.

“You’re young,” Razael said to Maddie, “you’ll learn.”

“Oh, thanks Daddy,” Maddie said sarcastically.

“The thing is,” Kyle said, “we don’t know how extensive the problem really is. It seems early to be talking about leaving and handing this mess off to someone else.”

“Well, we can assume at least two monitors and a whip,” Razael said, using the kuo-toan titles for their monks and druids, “plus the chuul.”

“I wonder if the chuul are treated as equals, or slaves.” Arrie mused. “Maybe it’s a colony of kuo-toa and a separate colony of chuul.”

“That seems a bit much,” Osborn said.

“Here’s a crazy idea,” Lanara said, “why don’t we take this information to the gnomes, and let whoever’s in charge decide what they want to do?”

“Well, that does make sense,” Autumn said. “We can go back to them now and ask what they want us to do to help.”

“Oh, goody,” Lanara said, “just in time for more root stew.”

The party returned to the tent city and found Zander, who helped them locate the town’s mayor, a bright-eyed old gnomish woman by the name of Magladeena. The party filled her in on the chuul and the kuo-toa, and what had been happening in the town since they had left.

“Hmm,” Magladeena said, “this is disturbing.”

“Well, at least the kuo-toa won’t bother you in the day,” Razael pointed out, “they can’t see.”

“Yes, but the chuul can, have, and do,” the mayor pointed out.

“Well, I’m just telling you, is all.”

“Swell. So, it’s move or die?”

“That’s kind of what it sounds like,” Lanara said.

“You could fight,” Maddie suggested.

Magladeena scoffed. “We can’t fight that,” she said, “none of us are strong enough.”

“Do you have an army?” Xu asked.

“Sort of. The Provinces never needed a large army; were surrounded on all sides by the Dwarven Confederates. What army we have is usually on the northern border, helping fight the goblins in the mountains. Most of our military is in our navy, really, and even that isn’t large. We gnomes are not an aggressive people, and we have few quarrels with anyone.”

“Can you send to your capital for aid?” Maddie suggested.

“Never been to Peca, have you?” Magladeena asked. “We don’t have a capital. We have a wandering monarch whose court travels all around from province to province. But he’s more concerned with things pertaining to the nation as a whole; each province is self-governing.”

“Do you want us to see if there’s anything we can do to clear up the problem?” Autumn asked.

“If you can do what you can, it would be appreciated,” Magladeena said. “This is all we have. If we leave here, we’re nothing but homeless beggars.”

Behind her, Lanara slapped her forehead, and Razael sighed loudly. Kyle, sitting next to Autumn, turned around and glared.

“You know, if the two of you would like to leave, the river goes out that way,” he growled, pointing east.

“Well, I can’t,” Razael said, glancing at Maddie.

“That’s right,” the favored soul said to him.

“Like it or not,” Kyle continued, “this is what we do. If you don’t like it, then you have a choice to leave.”

“The last time I went off by myself, it didn’t turn out too well,” Lanara observed. “So I’ll stay. I just don’t relish fighting fish-men.”

“I’ve been doing things I don’t like since before you were born, Kyle,” Razael said, “so I can put up with it a bit more.”

The party wandered out of the gnome’s tent city to discuss their plans. “I suggest the following,” Arrie said. “We’ve got one shot at surprise. The kuo-toa are clever enough to figure things out once we give away that we’re here. And obviously going down underwater where they have the advantage isn’t the best way to use that surprise.”

“Remember that ambush we did once with the rope trick?” Maddie said.

“Yeah, when I was pretending to be Aralda,” Lanara said.

“When was this?” Razael asked. “From what I heard, that was all before you met these folks, Madrone.”

“Oh, did I say ‘we’?” Maddie blushed a little. “I didn’t mean to include myself in that. Of course I wasn’t there.”

“I do remember,” Xu said. “We used the rope trick to spring an ambush on some thieves. Such a tactic might work again.”

“Sure. We set up the camp again, and then hit them when they come back,” Maddie said.

“They probably will start bringing more people with them,” Arrie said thoughtfully, “since they already know that someone else is in the town too.”

“I suggest we move the camp,” Razael said. “The kuo-toa didn’t try to hide the fact that they’d been through our first camp, so if we set up again like nothing happened they’re bound to get suspicious. So make it look like we moved somewhere safer.”

“Good idea,” Arrie said.

“What can we use against them to lure them out of the water otherwise?” Osborn asked.

“Do they have a strong sense of community?” Maddie wondered aloud.

“Or an overdeveloped pride?” Kyle added.

Razael shook his head. “The fish-men tend to pretty much be out for themselves. No real strong social bond, but sensible enough to stick together when things are rough.”

“So, even if the ambush works and we take out a few,” Kyle said, “there’s no guarantee that having people missing will bring the rest of them up to find out what happened.”

“Maybe not right away,” Madie said, “but in a couple of days, maybe. They might not care about the missing people, but they will care that there aren’t any more valuables coming down to them.”

“I think we should restock our campsite with some ‘shiny stuff’,” Osborn said, “just to make it look like we’re still working on scavenging and found a few more items.”

“Okay, let’s take a look at the town and decide how to set this ambush up,” Arrie said.



* * *



They were ready by afternoon. They moved their ‘camp’ to the courtyard of a small inn, which gave only one access point to the area. Razael took up a position on a distant rooftop overlooking the camp, while Xu and Lanara took up positions on the inn’s roof. Kyle, Autumn, and Maddie chose to use Kyle’s rope trick to hide at the center of camp, while Arrie waited closer to the alley the kuo-toa would come through, hidden in a pile of rags and holding very still. Osborn took up a position flanking the camp, near where Arrie was hiding.

It was only a short time after sunset that Osborn heard the wet flapping of feet on the cobblestones. The party watched as four figures emerged from the alley leading to the inn, looking around carefully as they approached the camp. Two of the kuo-toa held spears and carried small shields on their arms. The other two carried a pair of foot-long iron rods with large crossguards, a weapon that Xu had called ‘sai’. The two with the sai, presumably the monitors, hung back near the alley while the two whips moved forward to explore the camp.

Within seconds, it was over. Arrows slammed into one of the monitors from several blocks away, and daggers perforated one of the whips. Arrie rose up to menace the kuo-toa, as did Xu, leaping down from the roof. The real impact, however, came from Autumn, who came down on top of one of the whips from the rope trick with her greataxe over her head, bringing it down and splitting the fish-man open. Her momentum hardly spent, she continued the swing around in a circle as she stepped over to the second whip. Already reeling from Osborn’s daggers, the whip wasn’t even able to bring an arm up to defend himself, and moments later the two halves of the whip hit the wall of the inn with a wet smack.

The monitors tried to turn tail and run, as they were pelted with Arrie’s chain, Maddie’s quarterstaff, Razael’s arrows and Kyle’s spells. They got about halfway down the alley before a shout spell from Kyle blasted one senseless, and Xu caught and killed the second with little effort. Kyle quickly placed a resilient sphere around the lone remaining kuo-toa, and the party circled around it as they decided what to do.

“Are we going to kill it?” Razael asked, as he walked up.

“Let’s question him first,” Kyle said. “Lanara?”

“On it.” The bard cast tongues on herself, then waited for Kyle to drop his spell.

The kuo-toa did not resist when freed from the sphere, surrounded as he was by eight menacing figures. Lanara tried a couple of times to charm the monitor in order to make interrogation easier, but the fish-man’s mind was as slippery as its body. Finally, Lanara pulled out her fiddle and began to play, singing an entrancing song that wore away the kuo-toa’s resistance and made him amenable to influence.

“I think that you should go back to the ocean after we talk to you, and take your friends with you.” Lanara told the monitor through her song.

“I will do that,” gurgled the kuo-toa, “but the others will not like that.”

“What others?” Kyle asked after Lanara translated, “how many?”

Lanara relayed the question musically. “When I leave, there will be four, plus The Claw, and his pets.”

“Pets?”

“You call them chuul.”

“Define ‘The Claw’,” Lanara asked.

“He is the leader, the Mighty Whip. He says he came to us from the sun, and led us here from the ocean.”

“Why did The Claw bring them here?” Kyle asked.

“Easy prey,” came the answer.

“Well, at least he gets points for being honest,” Autumn said. “Ask what The Claw looks like.”

“He is one of us, of course,” said the kuo-toa, “but his scales have been blackened by living in the sun. He has a crown of horns on his head. He also has… other limbs on his back, like those of the sky-swimmers.”

“Wings,” Lanara interpreted.

“Definitely fiendish,” Kyle said, “I’d go so far as to say a half-blood, or at least a quarter, if he really did ‘come from the sun’.”

Autumn frowned. “The direct spawn of the devils can be as formidable as their fiendish parent.”

“Don’t forget,” Osborn said, “we’ve run into other people who’ve claimed they were ‘from the sun’ who really weren’t. Remember Sun-Harrow and Takar?”

“True,” said Arrie, “but Sun-Harrow and Takar were trying to subvert a clan of Grabâkh- worshipping orcs, so saying that made sense. Since kuo-toa hate sunlight, it seems that claiming to be from the sun wouldn’t be a good selling point to claim leadership if it weren’t true.”

“What else should I ask?” Lanara asked.

The kuo-toa relayed that besides The Claw, there were two more whips and two monitors, and a pair of chuul. It was uncertain if the others would come up to the town once it was obvious that the four that had been sent tonight were not coming back. The monitor said that they were living in a forgotten temple under the lakebed. It told how The Claw was able to swim through the hottest part of the lake unharmed and tell the others what places to avoid, further cementing the idea that The Claw was a half-fiend.

“What do you plan to do when the ‘food’ runs out?” Kyle asked.

“I do not know. The Claw will decide.”

“Why did The Claw bring you here, in particular?” Lanara asked.

“Easy prey,” the kuo-toa repeated. “They have food, they have wealth; it is easy to take.”

“So, basically your leader is lazy and is making you do all his work for him.”

The monitor shrugged, as well as a fish-person could shrug. “He finds us easy meat. He finds us wealth. We take it because we are strong enough to take it, and those who have it are not strong enough to keep it.”

“Are we done with him?” Razael asked.

No one could think of any other questions. After a moment’s quiet discussion, Osborn stepped up and quickly put a dagger into the kuo-toan’s spine, killing it painlessly. Though Lanara’s suggestion would have caused it to leave as promised, the party surmised that it would likely have reported back to The Claw before going, ruining any element of surprise they had remaining.

“Well, I say we wait a couple of days,” Razael suggested. “See if any of the rest of them come up to see what’s happened. I mean, the only other way they can find out what happened is through divination.” He turned to Kyle. “In your experience, most of the time that divination stuff doesn’t sit well with those evil types, does it? I mean, they don’t do it much, right?”

“Oh, they do,” Kyle said. “There’s nothing about being evil that prevents them from being smart. But kuo-toa practice nature magic, and I don’t think nature magic is too strong in the area of divination. Of course, The Claw could be a priest of Grabâkh, and he might have some things he could do.”

“I agree with Razael,” Autumn said. “Let’s wait a day or two and see what happens.”

“After that, we can consider storming the water,” Razael said, “though I don’t relish that idea.”

“Should we leave the bodies where they can be found?” Maddie asked.

“Or throw them into the lake,” Xu suggested.

“I don’t think so,” Kyle said. “Let’s not tip our hand right away.”

“Okay, then,” Arrie said, “let’s get to work on setting up a camp in town – a real one, somewhere safe and hidden. And then, we can wait.”

* * *

After two days of waiting, the group decided they needed a new plan.

The remaining kuo-toa, as far as anyone could tell, had not come into the gnomish fishing town to look for their missing men. The party spent their days sleeping and exploring the town, except for Razael, who would go out hunting in the surrounding mountains to provide food for the gnomes. They quietly observed Xu’s 21st birthday the day after the ambush, promising her a more elaborate celebration later even as she insisted that it was unnecessary. They found that the town had already been fairly thoroughly looted by the kuo-toa, and the local temple of Krûsh had been defiled.

“So, it looks like we might have to goad them a bit,” Kyle observed. The party was sitting in their hidden campsite, waiting for Razael to get back from a hunting trip. The tracker had been seen little in the last two days; he stood both the first and last watches, and was out most of the day. “Maybe write some offensive graffiti on a rock and throw it in the lake?”

“What kind of graffiti would be offensive to a fiendish kuo-toa?” Osborn asked.

“I don’t know… pictures of happy dolphins beating up fish people, sunny days, that kind of thing.”

Razael walked into the small storage building they’d commandeered and sat down. “Found something interesting,” he said.

“What?” asked several people at once.

“You remember those tracks I found a couple days ago, the webbed feet that turned into wolf tracks?”

“Yeah, the kuo-toan druids that were shifting into wolves,” Arrie remembered.

“Well, I spotted a new set of those tracks, fresh from last night. Seems it was out looking for something. There was another set like that in another spot on the beach, probably from two nights ago.”

“So they are coming up, just not into the town,” Arrie said. “Why? Is there anything in this area they’d be interested in?”

Everyone shook their head indicating that they had not heard of anything significant being in this area. “Of course, that Node’s here,” Kyle mentioned, “and no one knew about that.”

“Can’t you wizards get control of those Nodes?” Razael asked.

“Yes, but not from here. I think this is a pretty low-powered Fire Node, so I’d have to be right on top of it to control it.”

“Okay, then,” Razael said, “we tie a rope around your waist and a rock to your ankle, and send you down.”

Autumn glared at the old elf to indicate she didn’t approve of his plan.

“I have a question,” Arrie said, “if the kuo-toa can come up out of the lake pretty much anywhere, how far can they get away from the water?”

“As far as they like, I’d guess, especially if they’re shifted into the shapes of land animals,” Kyle said.

“Well, then, should we be leaving the gnomes unprotected?”

“That’s a good point,” Osborn said. “Even if the kuo-toa don’t try anything, there’s other dangerous stuff in the mountains out there, and those gnomes aren’t in a very safe spot right now.”

“Maybe a couple of us should go back to the camp and stay there, just in case,” Kyle said.

They ended up drawing straws to see who would go, and Autumn and Osborn were chosen. Osborn mentioned as they packed up to leave that it would be nice to spend a little time around some properly sized people.

“I can start patrolling the shore at night,” Razael offered after Autumn and Osborn left. “See if I can pick up one of their trails and figure out what they’re looking for out there.”

“Sounds good to me,” Kyle said.

The others agreed to the plan as well. Razael went outside the town at sunset, and began walking up and down the shore of the lake, watching steam rise as the air over the water cooled. As near as he could figure, the fish-men were coming onto land at random spots. He’d have to be lucky to run across tracks that were fresh enough to be useful for his purpose.

As it happened, Ladta smiled upon him. He came across a new set of the changing prints in the pebbly sand surrounding the lake, no more than fifteen minutes old. Razael quickly studied the tracks carefully, memorizing the details in the prints as well as calling on his Talent to allow him to pick up the subtleties of the druid’s scent.

He followed the ‘wolf’, staying apace of it but not catching up, as he didn’t want to alert the kuo-toa to his presence. He noted that once it reached the foothills, the wolf began moving about randomly, looking like it was searching for something. Eventually the wolf turned and started heading back to the lake. Razael tried to speed up to catch the druid, but by the time he got to the lake he saw the kuo-toa as a dark shadow in the water, swimming away.

The next morning Razael returned to relay his findings. “Hey, sexy,” Lanara called out to him as he came inside.

“Love you too, darling,” he replied.

Kyle looked at the two of them. “Are the two of you going to need a tent of your own soon, or something?”

“Nah, just need a new playmate,” Lanara said. “Some things aren’t as much fun with Maddie as they were with Kavan.”

“Maybe you should try it sometime and see if that’s true,” Maddie said, smiling.

“Okay, I think Razael wants to tell us about his night, doesn’t he?” Arrie said, a little too loudly.

“Yeah, well, I got lucky, ran across the trail of one of those kuo-toan whips, out wandering around in the mountains. It seems they aren’t interested in the gnomes, at least for now.”

“So, what could they be looking for?” Kyle wondered.

“Actually, come to think of it, it wasn’t like it was looking for something,” Razael said, “more like someone. But someone that wasn’t there.”

“So, it’s crazy,” Arrie said.

“No, I’d guess it was looking for the ones we killed,” Razael said. “So, should I give them a toe?”

“Don’t you need all of yours?” Lanara asked.

“I was thinking of the fish-men’s toes, thanks.”

“Isn’t it kind of odd that they’re looking for them way out there, when up until now the kuo-toa have been coming into the town?” Kyle asked.

“It don’t make a lot of sense to me, either,” Razael admitted.

“Maybe they think that the missing ones found some really sparkly bit of treasure and they ran off with it instead of bringing it back to The Claw,” Maddie suggested.

“That makes sense, actually,” Arrie said. “Kuo-toa are pretty greedy and don’t have a huge sense of loyalty.”

“But they probably need those missing people back,” Maddie continued, “because now there’s not enough of them left to threaten the town.”

Kyle thought for a while, but then sighed. “That won’t work,” he said.

“What, Kyle?” Arrie asked.

“Well, I was thinking that we could try and disguise ourselves as the missing kuo-toa in order to get close enough to take them out. But it’d have to be a magical disguise, and the only spell I know that would come close to doing that is alter self. But there’s limits on how far away I can get from ‘human’ with that spell, and ‘kuo-toa’ is too much of a change.”

“Well, we could always let Maddie skin the dead ones we have, and we could disguise ourselves that way,” Arrie suggested.

They all looked at Arrie, and then at Maddie, whose expression did not indicate whether she was offended or excited by this proposition.

“You know, I’ve done that before,” Razael said, “and it worked pretty well. But that was with a mammal. I don’t know how well it would work with scales.”

“Um, I probably should go ahead and lodge my official protest against the idea of mutilating corpses and defiling the dead,” Kyle said, “seeing as I’m apparently the only one here now with any morals.”

Maddie gave a slight shrug, as did Razael. Arrie, Xu, and Lanara said nothing. “Look, Kyle, I understand your point,” Razael said, “but at this point, what use do the kuo-toa have for it?”

“I’m just saying, that’s all,” Kyle said.

“Well, if you’ve got an alternative, I’d love to hear it,” the tracked said. “I ain’t too keen on getting inside a fish-man skin.”

Kyle sighed. “Nothing off the top of my head.”

But nearby, Maddie and Arrie were whispering excitedly to themselves. “Hey, Kyle?” Arrie said.

“Yeah?”

“Come with us,” Maddie insisted.



* * *



Kyle, Osborn, and Razael looked up at the three story house, and then, despite knowing that the town was abandoned, still looked up and down the street out of habit before walking in.

The home had once belonged to a gnomish illusionist named Bilkin, who was one of the kidnapping victims when the kuo-toa had first started raiding the town. Maddie and Arrie had come across the house yesterday while wandering around, and though they saw nothing of interest, they could tell the home belonged to a mage of some sort. They had managed to track down the illusionist’s apprentice, a gnomish woman named Okam, who confirmed her master’s abduction.

“I was out with… a gentleman that night,” she explained. “Master Bilkin was gone when I came home the next morning.”

“Do you know where he kept his spellbooks?” Kyle asked.

“In his study on the third floor,” Okam said. “Though I don’t know beyond that. The master never let me into the study. I do know that you have to turn the knob twice to the left and once to the right to open it.” She thought for a moment. “Or was it once to the left and twice to the right?”

“Mind if we take a look?” Kyle asked. “Your master may have had spells that would be useful to us to help save the town.”

“I don’t see why not. It’s not like he’s using it any more.”

Osborn studied the knob on the study door while Kyle and Razael stood nearby. Then the hin reached out and turned the knob once, pushing the door open.

“Seems as though Bilkin liked to play tricks on his apprentice,” Osborn said. “Nothing unusual with the door at all.”

They stepped into a small, slightly dusty room. Gnome-sized bookshelves lined the walls, and a desk sat in the middle on top of a brightly colored rug.

“Wow,” Kyle said, looking around.

“What’s the big deal?” Razael said, “they’re just… books.”

“There’s a lot of magical auras in here,” Kyle said. “Mostly illusion. I’d guess most of them are false auras. Kind of a little obvious, really – if it were me, I’d just hit a few odd items in the room with the fake enchantments. When you cover everything in magic, you know it can’t all be real.”

Kyle tried to hit the room with an area dispel to clear out the numerous decoy auras, but the spells were well-established and didn’t respond to his attempt to disrupt them. Kyle went about the slow process of hunting for Bilkin’s spellbooks, while Osborn and Razael sat back and waited. Besides the books on arcane theory, there were several philosophical texts about the nature of reality and the meaning of life. Razael picked up a book and started reading.

Eventually, Kyle found two spellbooks. Pulling them out, Kyle sat down on the floor and started reading, as the desk was far too small for him to sit at.

“You know, you can just take those with you,” Razael said.

“Oh, sorry,” Kyle said. “You guys don’t need to stay here. I’ll be a while.”

“No, I mean, you can take those with you,” Razael repeated.

“But… they’re not mine.”

Razael just stared at Kyle. “The illusionist is dead.”

“So, these should stay here and go to his kin, or to Okam, if she wants them. I just need to borrow them to see if there’s any illusion spells I can use.”

“We could just tell Okam we didn’t find the books,” the elf suggested.

“Yeah,” Kyle said, “but there’s that whole ‘morals’ thing I mentioned before.”

Razael shook his head. “Whatever makes you feel better.”

It took Kyle the rest of the next day to decipher the spellbook. He found an illusion spell that would help him create the image of four living, breathing kuo-toans that could be used to fool The Claw’s minions. At first it was suggested that they have the illusion swim back to the underwater temple, with the ‘dead’ party in tow, but that proved too logistically problematic. Then Maddie suggested that they instead place the illusion somewhere in the mountains, and have the kuo-toa act as if celebrating.

“The ones that are searching for them think they’ve run off, right?” the favored soul said, “so we make it look like that’s what happened. Lure them to the cave, and then jump them.”

It took another day to find a suitable location in a shallow cave, and set up the ambush. Razael created a very faint scent trail to the cave using what remained of the dead kuo-toa, then sat on the trail leading up to the cave and acted as a sentry in order to give Kyle enough notice to cast his spell. Autumn and Osborn were pulled in from their guard duty, and they sat back and waited. Luck was with them, and about an hour after sunset a lone wolf approached the cave, saw the illusion of the dancing kuo-toa, and shifted back into its natural form.

The ambush they had staged several nights ago had been a bloodbath when it was eight against four. At eight against one, it was almost a non-event.

They staged a successful second ambush against another kuo-toan whip the next night (with the illusion appropriately adjusted to include five of the fish-men). No other scouts came for the next two nights, lending credence to the claims of their former captive that only two whips had remained among The Claw’s forces.
“Well, looks like we have to go down there and get him,” Arrie said in the morning after they returned from their last night at the cave.

“Problem is that we don’t exactly know where ‘down there’ is,” Lanara said.

“I could summon a celestial companion that could swim down and find this temple,” Autumn offered.

“What about the heat?” Arrie asked.

“I can take care of that,” Kyle said. “I’ve had a resist energy ready to go since the first day we started dealing with this.”

The party walked to the edge of the lake, where Autumn summoned a celestial dolphin and Kyle cast his spell on the animal. The dolphin swam away, returning two hours later. The dolphin sat at the lake’s edge, looking up at Autumn, then began chattering.

“What’s it say?” Razael asked.

“The link between us is mostly empathic,” Autumn explained, “so I don’t know what he’s actually ‘saying’. But he’s fairly intelligent, smart enough to know what we’re looking for. I think…” she paused a moment. “Yes, I can sense where he’s been. The temple’s at the bottom of the lake, almost right in the middle.” She paused for another moment. “There’s a few dangerously hot areas between here and the temple. I can’t get a sense of exactly where they are, but we’ll have to watch out for them.” She paused one more time, then smiled. “And he wants some fish now.”

After feeding the dolphin a few fish they’d found in a cold storage warehouse in town, it promptly vanished. “Looks like we have some planning to do,” Arrie said. “Let’s go discuss what to do, and we can get some sleep tonight. May as well plan our attack for the next morning, when the kuo-toa will be sleepy.”

The next morning, they were ready. The party elected to have Autumn and Osborn remain with the gnomes again, just in case things went poorly below and they needed to help protect the townsfolk against attack. Leaving two people behind also extended the time for Kyle’s water breathing spell by nearly an hour, which they figured would give them enough time to get down and back.

They eased into the warm water. Arrie and Xu, who were stronger swimmers, stayed close to Razael and Lanara to help them along. Kyle used a spell that changed him into a shapeless, ooze-like mass that was able to swim easily through the water, and he stayed close to Maddie to help her. It was slow going; they swam almost straight down, and then followed the lakebed. Several times they had to pull up short to avoid a geothermal vent; though scalding water scorched several of them, none of them were seriously burned.

They finally reached the temple, a squat, solid structure half buried in muck. Bubbles rose from several spots on the roof, and the water surrounding the temple was quite warm, even by the lake’s standards. They located a set of stairs at the bottom of the mound of muck leading up into the temple. A few steps up, they broke through the surface of the water and found the temple was filled with air.

“Odd,” Arrie said, coming up out of the water.

“The kuo-toa did say that there was air in the temple,” Kyle said.

“Yeah, but I thought he meant a couple of stale bubbles of air in a corner somewhere.”

“Any reason you can think of why this air is here, Kyle?” Lanara asked.

He shrugged as he started passing out light globes to the party. “Could be a lot of things. Interaction between the Fire Node and the lake water, maybe. Maybe the whips created this air pocket on purpose. Maybe…”

Suddenly, both Maddie and Razael hissed “Quiet!” and pointed to the left, down a corridor at the end of the stairs. Pausing, everyone heard the rapid approach of scuttling, chitin-covered feet.

Arrie and Xu ran forward just as the first chuul came up to the stairs, lashing out with its claws and tentacles. Unlike most creatures of its kind, this one was covered in blackened chitinous armor, which betrayed its fiendish nature. A second one was right behind it, but was unable to crawl past its companion, and was forced to wait. The two women were able to ward off the chuul’s initial attacks, striking back in return, but the creature’s hard carapace resisted their blows. Maddie enveloped everyone with the power of a lesser vigor before stepping up to combat the creature, while Kyle tried to blast it with magic missiles, but the bolts of energy dissipated harmlessly, disrupted by the chuul’s magical resistance.

Razael stepped forward, it between the chuul and Maddie. “What’re you doing up here, woman?” he shouted. He turned to fire arrows at the chuul, but had to get close in order to get a good shot, and was quickly snatched up by a large claw and stuffed into the chuul’s tentacle-ringed maw. Lanara, in a panic, dropped a sound burst into the midst of the melee, which hurt everyone except the chuul.

Xu ran up, and with a well-placed series of kicks, caused the chuul to drop Razael. Razael stood and staggered away as Xu continued her assault, felling the fiendish creature. Maddie came up and healed the tracker even as he fired a shot at the second chuul, which was already advancing on the group.

More magic missiles flew through the air, this time penetrating the chuul’s natural resistance. Arrie also lashed out at the chuul, first hurling a shotput then lashing out with her spiked chain. The aquatic creature fought back, striking both Xu and Razael again, requiring Maddie to expend more healing energy on the old elf.

“Who’s protecting who, again?” Kyle said quietly to Lanara.

“I was just wondering that myself,” she replied.

“As long as I’m taking it, she’s not!” Razael said through gritted teeth, even as Kyle sent more magic missiles at the chuul. “Don’t you have anything better than a magic missile?”

“Yes, but why would I waste them on these things?” Kyle replied.

By this time the chuul had decided it disliked being repeatedly struck in the head and body. Unfortunately, the room in which their master had ordered them to wait and attack any intruders had no other exits, and so retreat was impossible. Moments later, the battle was over.

Lanara walked up and pressed a vial into Razael’s hand, even as Maddie poured more divine energy into healing his wounds. “Here. It’s a healing potion. Are you going to be all stupid and not take it?”

“Well, I’ve stopped bleeding,” he said. “I’ll probably just put it in my pouch for now.”

“Drink it!” Lanara snapped. “Arrie’s our stupid one, drink the damn thing!” Lanara started to stomp off. “Sorry, Arrie!” she called back.

Razael looked at Arrie, who shrugged. “I haven’t needed a healing potion for a really long time.”

Kyle walked up, and winked at Arrie. “Gee, think that there’s something more to Lanara’s grumpiness toward Razael than meets the eye?”

The party spent a few moments preparing themselves before moving on, casting spells on themselves. Then they moved down the corridor to their right, Arrie in the lead. They came to a T intersection, and split up when they saw that each hallway turned again a short distance away. Arrie went to look around the right corner; Xu went to the left, while the rest of the party waited in the middle.

“I can’t see the end of my corridor,” Arrie said.

“I see a door, perhaps forty feet down on the opposite wall,” Xu said.

They decided to check the door first. Opening the door, they saw it led to a short, twenty-foot long corridor that ended in another door. Kyle noted that the doors were made of a blackened, petrified wood. On the other side of the door was a chamber they could only assume was a kuo-toan bedroom. A pile of wet rags was in the center of the room, and they saw several large, black scales on the floor. Gnomish bones littered the floor, and in one corner a gnomish head sat, some flesh still clinging to the skull. After a cursory search, the party backed up and went back around to the corridor Arrie had looked down. About a hundred feet down, they came to another door. On the other side of the door, they could hear a low rushing sound, like a raging bonfire. The door was very warm.

“I think we’ve found the Node, Kyle,” Arrie said. “Think The Claw will be in here?”

“Probably,” he said. “Especially if he knows we’re here.”

Everyone got ready, casting their last-minute preparatory spells and readying their weapons. Then, with a sharp blow from Arrie’s boot, the door burst open and they rushed inside.

The hallway on the other side continued for a few feet before turning to the left. Stairs let up into a small chamber, where two kuo-toans waited at the top, each bearing a pair of sai. The center of the room was filled with what looked like a pit of leaping flames, extending at least five feet into the air and filling the air with a visible heat shimmer. Standing in the back corner of the room, obscured by the flames, was a large kuo-toan with black scales and large wings. Sharp claws extended from each hand.

“Oh, good,” Razael said. “They have the fire pit ready for an old-fashioned fish fry.”

The kuo-toan in the back, who could only be The Claw, pointed at the party and burbled something in their native tongue. Everyone glanced at Lanara, who had cast a tongues spell. “He said, ‘Get them!’” she said. “Come on, did you really need me to tell you that?”

The party rushed forward even as the two monitors braced for the assault. Lanara’s bardic music echoed through the small chamber as Arrie and Xu moved up to engage the two monks. The monitors attempted to disarm Arrie’s spiked chain, but despite their speed and precision, she managed to keep her grip on the weapon. Xu slammed a fist into one of the monitor’s heads as she moved past quickly, tumbling inside the room.

The others crowded forward, waiting for an opening into the room. Kyle used magic to try and improve his aim, and then fired a dimensional anchor at The Claw. Unfortunately, even with his enhanced accuracy the leaping flames made it difficult to see, and the green ray hit the back wall of the room with no effect. Razael also fired at The Claw, and although he managed to hit, most of the arrows bounced off its magically toughened scales. Only one lodged in the kuo-toan’s chest, piercing his lung. In response The Claw gestured, and blasted the party with a flame strike, missing only the ever-cautious Lanara, who was outside the pillar of flame, and Razael, who managed to dodge out of the way just in time.

Arrie and Xu forced an opening, and the party began to push through. Between the assault of Xu’s fists, Arrie’s chain, and a searing light from Maddie, one of the monitors fell in a bloody heap, its blood sizzling against the hot stones in the floor. This gave them the opening they needed to get to The Claw himself. Xu punched and kicked at the fiendish kuo-toa, finding her blows were nearly ineffective against his stone-hard flesh.

As more arrows also flew in at him from Razael, The Claw spat out more orders, and the remaining monitor concentrated its attacks on the tracker, whittling down his vitality with a combination of magical fire and cold damage from his sai. Maddie stepped up to help, bashing the monitor with her quarterstaff. Razael, irritated that he was not only being hit once again but also that Maddie was again putting herself in harm’s way, snarled as he shot the monitor at point-blank range, killing it.

Kyle moved forward and tried another spell, one meant to blind The Claw. The spell managed to penetrate his fiendish resistances, and overcome his formidable constitution, and The Claw’s eyes turned white as his sight was stolen from him. The Claw roared in rage and swung wildly with its claws in the air. A moment later, he regained his composure and summoned a fire elemental next to him. The elemental surged forward and swung a flaming appendage at Kyle, badly burning him.

“I’ll keep this thing busy!” Kyle shouted, as he conjured up a lance of force and began jabbing the elemental, “You go after The Claw!”

Xu jumped over the Fire Node, easily clearing the leaping flames to get to the other side of the room where she would be safe from attacks from the elemental. She punched at The Claw, hoping to stun him, but wasn’t able to land her blow in the right spot. Arrie stepped up behind Xu, swinging her chain over Xu’s head. From across the room, Lanara launched magic missiles from a wand, though they did not penetrate The Claw’s resistances. Arrie managed to wrap her chain around The Claw’s feet, and pulled the blind kuo-toan whip off his feet. Now under serious pressure, The Claw uttered words of magic and gestured out into the room, and suddenly the room was filled with a storm of fist-sized hail that pounded down on everyone.

It was an act of futility. By that time Arrie and Xu had established a steady rhythm of knocking The Claw off his feet, then pounding him while down. Razael would shoot more arrows into him when he did rise. Soon they managed to overcome the stoneskin spell protecting the fiendish kuo-toa, and that spelled a quick end for The Claw. As he collapsed, the fire elemental vanished in a burst of heat and ash.

They spent another hour looking through the temple, collecting valuables. Most of the back portion of the temple was flooded, and appeared to be where the lesser kuo-toa had slept. There was far too much for them to gather it all up and get it back to the surface before their water breathing spell expired, so they decided to come back the next day, taking with them only the personal possessions of the kuo-toa, as well as the corpse of The Claw and one of the chuul to show the gnomes that it was safe to return home.

That evening, the party was treated to a celebration, hastily thrown together by the gnomes as they returned to their town. There would be much work ahead for the gnomes to rebuild and catch up on their lost months of fishing, but tonight that was a distant consideration for everyone. Kyle returned Bilkin’s spellbooks to Okam, though she said that he was free to copy anything he’d like before they left.

The next day was spent in hauling treasure up from the temple and sorting through it. Autumn and Osborn volunteered to go down to recover the valuables, not only because neither of them had been able to see the temple before, but because Autumn’s portable hole and Osborn’s skills at searching for hidden stashes of goods would make the job easier. They would have been ready to depart by the next morning, but they decided to stay one more day, mostly because the next day, the 28th of Canith, was Autumn’s twentieth birthday.

It was a simple celebration, with the town having little to offer in the way of amenities and the party having had no chance to prepare or buy gifts. Autumn insisted that none of it was necessary, that all she wanted was to be with her friends and family. The one gift she did accept from the party, however, was when they offered to let her and Kyle spend the afternoon and evening together alone. Kyle borrowed one of the gnomish fishing boats, and the two of them sailed out across the lake, heading for the far shore.

They returned much later, as the sun was starting to disappear behind the mountains. They walked back into the inn where they’d been put up by the gnomes (the same inn that they’d used to stage their ambush of the kuo-toa in the town), walking with their arms around each other and smiling.

“Have a good time?” Arrie asked when they walked in.
Lanara stood and walked over to them, and plucked a blade of the long, thin grass that grew near the shore of the lake out of Autumn’s hair. “I’d say they did,” she said.

“So, what else did you two do?” Maddie asked.

“Oh, I just gave Autumn her birthday present,” Kyle said.

“We know that, Kyle,” Lanara said, “we asked what else you did.”

A small smile crept onto Arrie’s face. “So, what did you get, Sis?”

Grinning ear to ear, Autumn held out her left hand. Sitting on her finger was a large, sparkling sapphire ring.

“We’re engaged,” she said.
 

log in or register to remove this ad

Delemental

First Post
Storm of Chaos

It only took a day for the party to exit the mountains and reach the wide, fertile plains of the Peca Provinces. The branch of the river they had followed rejoined the Plingold, and they followed the north bank, intending to cut north in another week and aim for the city of Tengolt, where they could use the tunnels dug under the Confederates to reach Tlaxan. With the weather fair, they expected to reach Noxolt in a little over a month, close to Midsummer.

During their travels, Arrie made use of the sending enchantment in her wedding ring to communicate with Herion, giving him the specifics on the ship they would need to make their journey to the southern pole. Though trying to impart so much information at twenty-five words a day was frustrating, the party hoped that by the time they reached Noxolt, some of the groundwork might have been laid so that they could start their voyage as quickly as possible.

About three days after leaving the mountains, the party saw a rather large ship coming toward them, traveling on the Plingold heading upstream at an unusually rapid pace.

“Can you see who it is?” Arrie shouted at Maddie and Razael, who had both walked to a higher spot to get a better look at the approaching vessel.

“They’re flying a flag,” Razael said. “Yellow, with blue symbols.”

“Those are government banners,” Lanara said to everyone. “Probably the provincial governor.” She called up to the two elves, “Can you see what the symbols are? Every governor has a different symbol.”

“I thought you said you’d never been in the Provinces,” Kyle said to Lanara.

“I’m a bard. It’s my job to know things.” She shouted out again. “Anything?”

“Just a minute,” Maddie called back. “The wind’s shifting a bit, so we’ll get a better look… yes, there it is. Looks like two dolphins circling a star with several points, not quite twenty, I’d say.”

Lanara blinked in surprise. “Are you sure?”

“That’s what I see, too,” Razael said. “What’s the big deal?”

Lanara smiled. “It’s the Overgovernor.”

The cansin’s assertions were confirmed about thirty minutes later, when two small gnomish craft flying the same yellow and blue banner sailed up the river and approached the group. Uniformed sailors on the deck informed them that Overgovernor Garlen had requested the honor of meeting them, and had dropped anchor a short distance away. As they followed the ships back downstream from the bank, Lanara and Arrie explained politics in the Provinces.

“Every province has a governor, of course,” Arrie said, “and for the most part they’re in charge of affairs in their territory. The governors elect an Overgovernor to represent the nation as a whole, to coordinate the military, and so on. They serve for ten years.”

“Unless he’s voted out by two-thirds of the governors,” Lanara added. “They only do that if the Overgovernor goes crazy, or senile or something.”

“So, where does the Overgovernor, well, govern?” Kyle asked.

“Well, they couldn’t really decide where to put a capital city,” Lanara explained. “Thought it wouldn’t be fair for one province to have that kind of clout. So, the Overgovernor just travels with his court all over the place. Sails up and down the coast and the two main rivers. Rather than people going to the Overgovernor when there’s trouble, he comes to them.”

“Interesting way of doing things,” Maddie said.

“It works for the gnomes,” Arrie said. “Of course, I can’t see where governing a race that tends toward decent behavior and fairness would be terribly difficult.”

The party made their way to the Overgovernor’s vessel. The massive ship had lowered a ramp onto the north bank, and a number of people had disembarked to greet them. Several people in smaller ships surrounding the Overgovernor’s vessel sailed by to wave at the visitors. Most were gnomish, with several water-touched, a few aasimar, and a scattering of other races, though orcs and orc-touched were notably absent. The Overgovernor’s ship itself was larger than any other vessel they’d ever seen, with sails that seemed to be spun out of fine silk rather than sailcloth. Despite its size, it seemed to just barely rest in the water, betraying the fact that the ship was enhanced with powerful enchantments.

After dismounting, the horses were led to a hastily assembled canvas shelter to be cared for. The party was offered a few moments to freshen up in more tents erected for privacy, before being escorted on board. They were led to the rear of the ship, and taken down into the lower decks, where they were stopped in front of a plain-looking door flanked by two gnomish guards.

“The Honorable Overgovernor Garlen awaits inside,” one of the guards announced.

“This is it?” Razael whispered to Arrie. “We get to cram into the cabin with the king of the gnomes?”

“Yes, Razael,” Arrie whispered back, “and if one of your snide comments that you think no one else hears reaches his ears, I won’t wait for Herion’s permission to have you flogged and executed.”

Razael smiled at her. “You know, at times you remind me of Herion’s dad.”

The party cautiously opened the door, wondering if they’d all fit or if they’d have to take turns. By their best guess, the room beyond was only about ten feet from the outer hull.

Going through the door, they each stepped into an enormous indoor courtyard, surrounded by fountains. Flowering plants all around them were home to dozens of tiny songbirds flitting about.

“Extradimensional,” Kyle said, looking around, “makes perfect sense. Opulent enough for a head of state, but portable.”

“And makes it darned hard for the enemy to figure out what part of my ship to shoot,” said a jolly voice. The party turned to see a throne appear suddenly at one end of the courtyard, supported by a small, shallow dais. Sitting in the throne was a wrinkled old gnome with bright eyes and a snow-white mustache that matched his hair. A crown of coral and pearls sat on his head.

“And I assure you that we do have them,” the gnome said. “Enemies, that is. Does tend to make governing a bit… terribly difficult at times.” He glanced quickly at Arrie as he spoke his last comment.

Arrie bowed, and turned a little red. “You Honor, I assure you that I…”

“Psh!” Garlen said, waving Arrie down. “There’s far worse been said about me and my country, Princess. The truth is that we gnomes aren’t a hard lot to please as long as you know how to listen to them.” He smiled. “And I do know how to listen.” Garlen plucked the coral crown off his head and set it aside. “Forgive the pomp. My advisors insist I need to make an impression on visitors, look as impressive as the kings and emperors that run the other countries.”

There were a series of quick bows and introductions. “May we ask why we’ve been invited, Your Honor?” Autumn asked.

“Of course you may, Duchess,” the Overgovernor said, then added, “well, officially I should say almost-Duchess, right?”

“Of course, Your Honor.” There were a few moments of awkward silence before Autumn spoke again. “Excuse me, Your Honor?”

“Yes?”

“You haven’t answered my question.”

“Of course I did, dear. You asked if you could ask why you were invited to see me, and I gave you permission to ask.” He winked at her. “First rule of being in charge, almost-Duchess. Choose your words carefully.” Garlen looked over to Kyle. “You’d best pay attention to this too, you know. From what I hear you’re an almost-almost-Duke yourself. Congratulations, by the way, though I don’t envy you the conversation with her parents. No offence to either of you, I hope,” he said, nodding toward Arrie and Autumn.

“None taken,” Arrie said. “So, Your Honor, why have we been invited to see you?”

“Oh, well, I just wanted to extend my personal thanks to you for your assistance in helping my people with that kuo-toa incursion. We were coming out this way anyway – seems with the slide in the pass between M’ioch and Krek, there’s been a lot more traffic coming down the Plingold, and the provincial governor’s asked for assistance with supplies and logistics and such. Since my ship was close, and I heard you were heading this way, I decided to make a stop.”

“You honor us, Your Honor,” Lanara said.

“Please, it’s nothing,” Overgovernor Garlen said. “I’m especially pleased to meet you, Lanara Rahila. I’ve heard that you’ve made quite an impression on Tlaxan’s Imperial Court. Of course, I’d expect someone who possessed one of the True Instruments to do great things.” The Overgovernor pointed at the fiddle strapped to Lanara’s back, and then lovingly rested his hand on a magnificent harp resting near his throne.

“You’re a bard?” Lanara asked.

“Many of Peca’s Overgovernors have been bards,” Garlen replied. “Bards make the best leaders, you know; very knowledgeable, very persuasive, know how to entertain, and know how to find things out. Plus, I save a fortune by not having to hire entertainers.” He grinned and winked again. “Oh, and by the way, what you did with her twin sister? I loved that. Very ironic.”

The party looked at each other, slightly uncertain. “Your Honor,” Lanara said, “we appreciate your compliments. You certainly seem… very well informed about us.”

“Of course I am! It’s my job to know things, especially when they pertain to my kingdom! I’m a bard, remember? And a pretty good one, too, so I know how to find things out. Besides, it wasn’t as hard as you might think. You bunch are better known that you realize, I think.”

Overgovernor Garlen waved a hand in the air, as if swatting something away. “Well, enough stroking your egos. Vain adventurers quickly become useless adventurers, if you ask my opinion. And I know you didn’t, but you get to hear it anyway. It’s good to be in charge.” Garlen laughed at his own joke before continuing. “Anyway, rest assured that the plight of the town you just saved hasn’t gone unnoticed. I’m sending a few people up that way to assist with the rebuilding, and I’ll be advising the provincial governor to post a small garrison up there. After all, we can’t have our nation’s natural resources being tampered with.”

The tone in Garlen’s voice told the party that when he said ‘resources’, he wasn’t talking about exotic fish or scrimshaw. Now doubt the garrison would be there to secure the newly rediscovered Fire Node.

“As for the lot of you, well, I’d like to give you a little token of appreciation.” He pulled an object out of a pocket, and tossed it to Lanara. It was a disk made of a bluish crystal, about the width of a gnome’s palm, with the royal symbol carved into one side. Small white pearls were embedded into the crystal at each of the star’s eighteen points.

“It’s a Mark of Passage,” Garlen explained. “It gives you access to all roads and waterways in the Provinces free of tolls or taxes, and exempts you from any fees for entering any settlement in the Provinces. Hopefully you’ll consider coming through here from time to time in the future.”

“Thank you, Your Honor,” Lanara said, bowing.

“Not at all. Now, I’m afraid I’ll have to cut things short – we really do need to be on our way upriver. Good luck and good journey to you all.”

A few moments later two liveried servants came through the door and offered to escort the party back to their horses. After they left, another gnome approached the throne from the other side of the courtyard.

“How did it go, Your Honor?” the gnome asked.

“Oh, fine, fine, Pench. Short and sweet.”

The one called Pench nodded. “And did you get a chance to see the one you wanted to see?”

Overgovernor Garlen nodded. “Yes, but not nearly as long as I would have liked. Couldn’t even ask any questions, more’s the pity. But we’re in a hurry, they’re in a hurry – to stall them any longer would have made them impatient, even suspicious.”

“Well, there’s always the Mark,” Pench said.

“Very true. Hopefully they don’t decide to sell it.”

Pench’s eyes widened. “Your Honor, you don’t think they would, do you?”

“Probably not, Pench, but they are adventurers. They can be a funny lot.”



* * *



The party arrived in Noxolt on the third day of Midsummer. The streets were crowded with people milling about, going from shop to shop visiting with their favorite vendors and gossiping. Several of the adults wore crowns of flowers that had been given to them by their children to commemorate the day. The weather had done little to suppress the festive mood; there had been rain and a nearly constant cloud cover over Tlaxan for the past two weeks, but even today, when there was no rain but the humidity had made the heat oppressive, people were smiling and laughing. A number of the city folk, seeing the party ride by along with the Imperial honor guard that had met them at the gate, stopped what they were doing to run up and wave or cheer. Young elven children scampered up and tugged at their cloaks, while blushing maidens batted their eyelashes from behind decorative fans. Razael grinned and almost stopped his horse to talk to some of the young women, until a questioning look from Maddie pulled him away.

In the courtyard just in front of the gate marking the entrance to the Imperial Palace itself, a new structure had been erected. It was a simple glassteel box, about ten feet square. Inside the box, a lone ghoul paced back and forth, occasionally slamming itself into the transparent walls or clawing at them as people went by. A small plaque was mounted to one wall, which Lanara rode up to read.

“Does that ghoul look familiar to anyone else?” Maddie asked as it hissed at her and slapped its long tongue against the glassteel wall.

“It should,” Lanara said, “this is the assassin that killed the Emperor’s son last fall.”

The party remembered that day well. They had been guests of the Palace then, shortly after the previous Emperor had died. It was while investigating the mysterious death of Haxtha’s young son that they first encountered the strange being known as Xerxes, and the party had taken its first step into the hidden world of the psionic races.

“It says that his sentence is to remain caged here until the time it would be expected that his victim would have died naturally.”

The party nodded. Haxtha’s son had been ten years old when he was killed; the assassin’s ghoul would be inside the cage for centuries to come.

They rode through the gates to the palace complex, and a few minutes later were dismounting in front of the grand stone stairs that led to the great hall of the palace proper. Herion was there, dressed in formal garb, along with a bevy of officials, courtesans, and servants. A large crowd of onlookers had also gathered. The party climbed the stairs, but stopped when they realized they would have to endure a formal welcoming ceremony. About an hour later, they were allowed to go inside, all of them sweating profusely.

The party was shown to their rooms in the palace, and that evening enjoyed an informal dinner with Herion and his sister Aralda.

“While you were traveling,” Herion said during dinner, “I have undertaken to find a suitable ship for you, based on what my wife has told me you would need. A ship has been found, and for expediency I purchased the ship from the Imperial treasury. All you will need to do is reimburse the treasury for the cost. Hopefully with the weight of the crown behind it, the sale price was slightly less that what you might have paid on your own.”

“That’s handy,” Lanara said.

“It was not clear, however, if you would require a crew,” Herion added. “I presumed you would, but I have found that my presumptions in regard to the eight of you are often inaccurate.”

“Well, I know how to sail a ship,” Kyle said.

“Great!” Osborn said, “That’s one!”

“Yeah, one person does not a crew make,” Razael said.

“I’m just saying…”

“Well then, it seems you will need a crew,” Herion said. “Word can be sent out after the end of Midsummer.”

“Make sure they’re cute!” Lanara said.

“They’re… sailors,” Osborn said. “The two ideas really don’t go together.”

“I spend as little time as possible on boats,” Lanara said. “How would I know there are no cute sailors? Can the cook be cute?”

“The cooks are usually big and fat,” Osborn said.

“At least the good ones are,” Kyle commented. “If it’s that important to you, Lanara, then hire yourself a cabin boy for the voyage.”

The cansin’s eyes lit up. “Ooh! Good idea! Say, Arrie, want to help me pick out a cabin boy?”

“So, anyway,” Kyle said, “how much do we owe for the ship, Herion?”

“The price was fifteen thousand gold,” Herion replied. “It was a bit more than usual for a vessel of its size, but you did have some unusual specifications. We have also bought some cold weather gear for you, which unsurprisingly was relatively inexpensive in the middle of summer.”

“Okay, well, we have enough stashed away in our shared pool for that,” Kyle said.

“When should we meet with your financiers, Herion?” Autumn asked.

“I’ll take the money to them,” Razael offered.

“No,” Autumn replied.

“Why not?”

Herion looked at Razael, and almost smiled. Almost. “I think perhaps they are not yet willing to trust you with that much coin, Razael, since we seem unable to trust you with more… valuable goods.”

Razael threw up his hands. “It’s never my fault,” he cried. “I don’t chase.”

“Which is an unusual trait in a Huntsman,” Aralda interjected.

“Yeah, he’s over five hundred,” quipped Osborn quietly. “He might break a hip.”

“What was that?” Razael asked, looking at the hin. Osborn declined to repeat his comment, so Razael grumbled quietly to himself but let the matter drop.

“I’ve also taken the liberty,” Herion began, but then he paused. “No, let me rephrase that. I was going to take the liberty of locating scholars familiar with the southern polar region, but by fortune two such men arrived here on their own. They said that they knew you were coming and knew you would need their advice. They’d like to meet with you tomorrow, if so inclined.”

“Research is always good,” Lanara said.

Talk around the table moved on to other topics. Herion’s older brother, the Emperor Haxtha, had taken a new consort, and the birth of a new heir was expected within the next two years. They spoke of affairs at court and major news from the rest of Affon, generally catching up on the world at large. The group also provided tales of their travels since leaving M’Dos, via Lanara and her music.

“So, what’s going to happen with Autumn?” Kyle asked after a while.

“My brother will put you through a formal ceremony the day after tomorrow at noon,” Herion said to the aasimar. “Tomorrow being the Midsummer Day of Mourning, of course, it would be in poor taste to do it then.”

“What if she says no?” Lanara asked.

“Abdicating her title is a decision she could make. She would still be royalty by relation, but she wouldn’t have responsibilities here in Tlaxan, and there would be a loss of status as well as the security of land and income.”

“See, Autumn?” Lanara said, “you can roam around the world with your wizard all you like.”

“But I can do that anyway,” Autumn said, “I just have to come back from time to time.”

Razael glanced down at the ring on Autumn’s finger, flashing and sparking even in the dim candlelight thanks to the mild enchantment Kyle had placed in it. “Okay, Kyle,” Razael said, leaning in toward the wizard, “I’ve got to know. Where did you steal that from?”

“I didn’t steal it,” Kyle said, “I made it myself.”

“Oh, come on,” Razael scoffed.

“No, really! I bought the gems and metal in M’Dos!”

“Since when do you know how to make jewelry?” Lanara asked.

“I’ve known how for a long time,” Kyle protested, “I’ve just never had the chance.”

“You bought that rock?” Razael asked, looking at the sizable sapphire in the center of Autumn’s ring. “Now I know you’re pulling my leg.”

“I have just as much money as the rest of you, you know,” Kyle said. “I saved it up.”

“All right, enough teasing the wizard,” Arrie said. “I think we should get some rest for the ceremony tomorrow. Autumn, you know our parents will probably be coming for that. Which means they’ll be here. In person. To see you.” She glanced over at Kyle, “and your friends.”

“We plan on speaking with them after the ceremony,” Autumn said. “We’ll inform them of our engagement then. That way there are no surprises.”



* * *



The next day dawned stormy and overcast, casting a shadow over the whole city. Razael, looking out across the sky from a balcony, was slightly disturbed, though he couldn’t say why. The city was fairly quiet, as people marked the Day of Mourning and remembered lost relatives and friends. The Imperial Palace was adorned with ivy garlands at every entry, to mark their observance of the deaths of the previous Emperor and the current Emperor’s young son less than a year ago. Maddie was seen only briefly in the morning, wearing funerary white vestments as she went to the temple of Erito in the city to observe the day. Many of the other elves in the palace, including the Imperial Family, wore white as well

There was a loud knock at the door to Autumn and Kyle’s rooms at dawn the day of Autumn’s investiture ceremony. Autumn responded to the sound by shoving Kyle at the shoulder, pushing him out of the bed.

“Ow!” he complained, rubbing his side where he’d hit the floor. “You’re darned lucky there’s a rug on this floor, you know.”

Autumn’s had stuck out of the covers and she waved in the general direction of the sitting room, where the knocking continued.

Grumbling, Kyle crossed the bedroom and began pulling on clothes. “I’ll make a morning person of you yet, Autumn,” he said. There was mumbling from under the covers.

Kyle walked out of the bedroom and into the sitting area. He crossed the room to the door leading out into the hall, glancing out the windows as he walked.

Gods, it’s dark this morning, Kyle thought. He assumed the knocking was a servant who hadn’t gotten word that they wanted to sleep late this morning. He swung the outer door open, and looked straight into the face of Lord Zanich and Lady Auror.

Kyle just stared for a moment, turning white. Zanich tried to look anywhere but directly at Kyle, while Auror just stared coldly, a vein on her temple throbbing.

“I see the servants must have given us poor directions,” Auror said. “Do you know where Autumn’s chambers are located?”

“Well,” Kyle said after a long pause, “actually, she’s here. If you’ll come inside, I’ll go get her.” Kyle stepped back and let Zanich and Auror inside. “Um, if you’d like to have a seat…”

“I think we will stand, thank you,” Auror said flatly. “You go fetch her now.”

Kyle hurried back to the bedroom, and gently started shaking Autumn’s shoulder.

“What?” she moaned.

“Um…”

“Don’t tell me they want me to start getting ready now,” Autumn complained.

“No,” Kyle said, “you… have a visitor. Two, actually.”

“Who?”

“Your parents.”

Autumn looked at Kyle, then looked at the door leading into the sitting room, then peeked under her own blankets, confirming the fact that she was wearing nothing underneath them. “Oh, no.”

Autumn jumped out of bed and threw open her wardrobe. “Why don’t you go out and entertain them while I make myself presentable,” she said, trying to force calm into her voice.

“You’re kidding, right?”

“Do you see another choice here, Kyle?”

“Yes. I think I have a reasonable chance of dimension dooring both of us out of here.”

“That will only make things worse,” Autumn said, pulling a shift over her head. “Go. Go do something!”

Kyle walked out of the room, trying not to panic. He approached Autumn’s parents. “Lady Auror, Lord Zanich,” he said, bowing slightly, “it’s good to see you again. Autumn is getting dr… she will be out shortly. Can I get you anything?”

“We have already broken our fast,” Lady Auror announced. “We will await the arrival of our daughter.”

“Sure, sure,” Kyle said. “Are you sure you won’t sit down?”

“Quite,” Auror said tersely.

“So, Kyle,” Zanich said, “I understand…” he faltered as his wife shot him a withering look, “… that you’ve… been… places.”

“Oh. Oh! Yes, of course! All over the continent!” Kyle began talking rapidly about their travels in the Haran Desert, then across the Khag Steppes. “We were in Miracle in a while,” he said. “Lovely place, what with the not being able to hurt people. We bought a house there, you know. Well, actually, we just obtained the house from an undead necromancer who we destroyed.”

“Fascinating,” Auror said, in a tone that made it clear that it wasn’t.

“And then… well, we were in M’Dos for a while, and then… we came here.” Kyle was desperate, having run out of conversation pieces.

Fortunately, Autumn emerged from the bedroom at that moment, and quickly crossed the room to greet her parents.

“Ah, Autumn, you are here.” Lady Auror turned to Kyle. “Thank you. You are dismissed.”

Kyle’s jaw clenched, and he turned to look at Auror squarely. “Actually,” he said slowly, “this is my room, too.” He sat down on the end of one of the couches. Inwardly, Kyle fumed.

Auror stared at Kyle, and the temperature in the room seemed to drop. Outside, thunder rolled across the sky.

Autumn sat down next to Kyle, resting her hand on his. “Mother, father,” she said, “Kyle and I are engaged.”

There was a long, stony silence. “I would have thought better of you,” Auror said, and then she turned and walked out of the room. Zanich stood unmoving for a moment longer, and then with an ‘I’ll talk to her’ gesture to Autumn, he smiled weakly, nodded to both of them, and followed his wife out of the room.”

The two of them sat there for a while longer, holding each other’s hand tightly. “I guess we can cancel our dinner plans with the folks, eh?” Kyle said.

“Yeah, I think so.” Autumn sighed. “I don’t think I’m in the mood for breakfast.”

“Yeah,” Kyle agreed, then after a while he said, “I’m sorry.”

“For what? That’s just her way.”

“I just don’t like the fact that I’m making this harder just by being me,” he said.

Autumn squeezed his hand. “I don’t think any man would have been good enough for her,” she said, “but you’re good enough for me.”

Autumn and Kyle spent the remainder of the morning studiously avoiding Auror and Zanich. They got a sympathetic look from Arrie when they passed by her in the hall, who had just finished visiting with their parents. By eleven Autumn was escorted away to prepare for her investiture, and Kyle joined the other members of the party in the audience.

The ceremony itself was mercifully brief. Even so, the hot, oppressively humid weather had put everyone on edge. The entire morning had that feel as though a storm were just about to break, though it never did. Autumn was able to tolerate the ceremony only thanks to the endure elements spell Kyle had given her that morning. She noted that her mother, standing nearby on the dais, never even looked at her, and when her gaze did wander to where her friends sat, she seemed to look right through Kyle. Throughout the event, Razael continued to glance at the sky uneasily, though he couldn’t put words to why the weather unnerved him so.

After the ceremony and a brief reception in Autumn’s honor (which Auror and Zanich left very early), the party was escorted to the library to meet the scholars. Outside, the storm had still not broken, but lightning and thunder flashed and rolled across the sky so frequently and loudly that conversation was difficult. They were led to what would normally be a very quiet and secluded wing of the building, but today there were an unusual number of people milling about, a number of them women. When the party exited the shelves and came to an open area with a large table, they had a good idea why.

Seated at one end of the table were two elves. One was very tall and thin, almost gaunt, with very dark skin and hair that looked as though it had been bleached by the sun. He was dressed in fine, but unpretentious clothing, and wore dark lenses over his eyes that hid his pupils. By contrast, the other elf was just as tall, but appeared sturdier in build, though that might have been due to the many layers of rich, extravagant clothing he wore. His skin was tanned, though not as dark as his companion, and he had platinum blonde hair and sky blue eyes. Both exuded a presence that was magnetic, almost entrancing, and their every gesture seemed to draw attention. Several library staff and patrons were going out of their way to walk by frequently to catch a glimpse of the two scholars.

“Welcome,” said the more opulent of the two. “Please, sit down.”

The party took seats around the table. Lanara, who sat next to the opulently dressed scholar, felt a brief chill, as if the room had suddenly become slightly colder, but the sensation passed. Introductions were made; the gaunt elf introduced himself as Tiranel, and the extravagant elf gave his name as AnAnduriel.

“So, what can you tell us about where we’re going?” Autumn asked.

“What do you want to know?” Tiranel asked.

“Everything.”

“Is there a way to get there without using a damn boat?” Lanara asked.

“Not unless you can fly,” AnAnduriel interjected. “Next question?”

“How far would we have to fly?” Lanara persisted. “Can we buy something that will do it?”
“It depends on what you use, and who is flying,” Tiranel said. “And whether your transport has wings, will need to rest or can sleep while flying…”

“It’s longer than you can flap your arms, let’s put it that way,” AnAnduriel said. “I’d rule that idea out if I were you.”

“Damn,” Lanara said.

“What kind of dangers should we expect?” Autumn asked.

“Big, icy ones,” Lanara suggested.

“That’s a fine answer,” Anduriel said. “I’d also worry about the living dead.”

“I’m not so sure you’re going to be getting around to facing any of the dangers there, living or dead,” Tiranel interjected, “unless your boat is really, really nicely outfitted.”

“Herion bought it for us,” Lanara said.

“Yes, but there are limits to what even a kingdom’s treasury can reach,” Tiranel said. “It’s the arctic, after all, and I doubt any of Tlaxan’s shipbuilders have even an inkling of what is required. You are going to need assistance.”

“So, you guys are coming?” Lanara asked.

Tiranel shook his head. “I can’t. I study, I don’t work.”

“Would it possible for you to inspect the ship we have,” Kyle asked, “and make suggestions for modifications that might improve our chances?”

“I could,” Tiranel agreed, “I can also provide you with some trinkets that might be useful in getting past the natural harsh habitat so that you can perish at the hands of the living dead or whatever other horrible things my associate thinks are going to be there.”

“So, have either of you ever actually been there?” Lanara asked.

“Once,” Anduriel said.

“Both of you?” Razael asked.

“I study,” Tiranel repeated, “I don’t work.”

“So, how’d you get the tan?” Lanara asked the gaunt scholar.

“Studying outside.”

“What… why would there be so many undead?” Kyle asked. “My understanding was that the southern pole would be deserted. Nothing there to make undead from or to sustain them.”

“Well, it kind of makes sense,” Arrie said, “The cold won’t bother them.”

“Yes, but why are they there in the first place?”

“Imagine you found something,” Tiranel said slowly, “that you didn’t think anyone else in the entire world should have. Where would you put it, and what would you set to guard it?”

“I’d put it in the sun, and let Grabâkh do it,” Razael said.

“Right. Problem is that the gods aren’t usually willing to just… do that because you tell them to. You’re going to have to do it yourself, and so the best alternative on this planet are the poles.”

“We’re looking for pre-Cataclysmic stuff here, right?” Osborn said. “Maybe before the Cataclysm, where this stuff is wasn’t the pole.”

“Before we get too far off track,” Anduriel said, “I don’t know how much you’ve read about the polar region already, but let me share a few concepts with you, like… undead frost giants.” The richly dressed scholar looked around the table for their reactions. “Just an example.”

“We can go around,” Lanara said.

“I don’t know how much you’ve read about the polar region,” Anduriel repeated, a little condescendingly, “but it is the ‘around’.”

“Are you saying the world is round?” Razael said.

“No,” Anduriel said, barely suppressing a smirk, “there are some things you need to discover for yourself.”

“I assume that would be implied in calling it a ‘pole’,” Tiranel said, “rather than the ‘hub’ or the ‘edge’.”

“You’re assuming he would know the difference,” Lanara said.

“I make no assumptions about your knowledge,” Tiranel stated. “That’s why I’m speaking to you like you were three years old.”

The party bristled a bit at the implication. “So, we can expect lots of undead,” Kyle said, steering the conversation back on track, “and I assume lots of creatures that thrive in the cold, like polar worms.”

“Yes,” Anduriel said.

“Dragons?” Razael asked.

“As a matter of fact,” Anduriel nodded, “that’s the reason you should be interested in what we’re saying.”

“They should be interested?” Tiranel said to his companion. “I don’t know about you, but I’d find that somewhat dissuasive myself.”

“That’s because you don’t work, you study,” Razael said.

“All right,” Tiranel said to him, “if you want to go down and challenge a dragon, more power to you. As I said, I do have some trinkets that might help you in that respect, but…”

“It’s not my choice,” Razael said, pointing to Maddie, “It’s hers.”

“Wait, wait, wait,” Kyle interrupted. “So, there is a dragon down there?”

“Yes,” Anduriel replied.

“Interesting,” Kyle said.

“What?” Autumn asked, “Would it be an undead dragon?”

“No,” Anduriel said slowly, “though the lines blur a bit.”

“That’s an amazing leap of logic,” Tiranel said, “I’m proud of you.”

“Well, here’s the interesting thing about dragons,” Kyle said. “According to legend, the dragons were placed on the world for a reason.”

“Indeed,” Anduriel agreed.

“There’s speculation on what that reason is. Some say they guard locations of elemental power, or protect the balance of magic in the world. The concerning myth is the idea that the dragons are here so that if the world ever becomes out of balance again, as it did during the Cataclysm, they can help remake the world anew.”

“In other words, eat everyone and start over,” Tiranel said.

“Right. Given the possible nature of the information that may be down there,” Kyle continued, “I find it interesting that there’s a dragon down there as well, and I don’t think it’s a coincidence. I also think that means there’s going to be no chance of us avoiding a confrontation with this dragon.”

“Did you actually see the dragon?” Autumn asked Anduriel.

“No.”

“Then how do you know it’s there?” Razael asked.

“Trust me,” Anduriel said, “I know.”

“Can they be charmed?” Lanara asked.

“No, they can’t,” Tiranel said testily.

“Have you ever tried?”

“No,” he said again, “study, not work.”

“Trust me,” Anduriel said, “on a practical level, I can personally assure you it is not possible to charm a dragon.”

“But can you assure us that it’s there?” Razael said.

“Yes.”

“How?”

“Trust me,” Anduriel said slowly, “I know.”

“There’s not a trust here,” Razael said. “How do you know?”

“I know more than you,” Anduriel said, “and I know it’s there.”

“If you know so much, you can describe how you know.”

“I could,” Anduriel said, “but there are certain things that you don’t need to know, and how I know there’s a dragon there is one of them. It’s there.”

“He’s lying,” Razael said.

“Look at it this way,” Tiranel interrupted, “if there’s no dragon there, you have nothing to worry about. But if it is there, you’re prepared. Either way, what’s the difference? The point is that you need to be prepared.”

Razael stood up, and walked away from the table, muttering.

“Let’s start over at the beginning,” Arrie said after an awkward pause. “What do we need to equip ourselves and our ship with to deal with the environment?”

“I’ll defer to my esteemed colleague on this subject,” Anduriel said.

“Your ship needs to be bound in metal, with a wooden hull underneath. It needs to have a special ram, extending in front of the ship at least nine feet, which is wedge-shaped and constructed of a very solid metal; preferably adamantium, though other steel alloys will suffice. You need to make sure that the ship can be rowed as well as sailed, because you cannot count on the wind being there, or blowing in the right direction. Cross-sailing is not always possible. The oars should be reinforced; most military-grade oars are strong enough for this. You need to be able to pull down the entire mast, so that it doesn’t just snap off when the storms start. You need to be able to set up some sort of cover over the deck, so that the ship is not weighed down with snow and ice. You will need to pack several barrels of coarse salt to melt the ice that does build up. You will need to keep the room in which you store your fresh water heated so that it doesn’t freeze. In short, you must prepare for conditions the like of which none of you have ever seen.”

“That’s great,” Lanara snapped. “That ought to be easy enough. ‘We have no idea what we need, and we’ve never seen it before, so can you outfit the ship for that?’”

“But, he just told us,” Arrie said.

“Yes, but we have to describe this to other people,” Lanara pointed out. “I hope you’re taking notes, Kyle.”

“Would you be able to describe these things to the shipbuilder?” Autumn asked.

“Certainly,” Tiranel said, “though I don’t know if he’ll be especially receptive to my comments. I’ve noted that there is little respect among those who work for those who study.”

“Having done a fair bit of both,” Kyle said, “I think I can translate for you.”

“I actually have everything you will need written down here.” Tiranel withdrew a large roll of parchment from a shoulder bag, and handed it to Kyle, who unrolled it long enough to peruse the notes and schematics before putting them away.

“There are other minor items I have that might make the trip survivable, if not pleasant,” Tiranel continued. “I have logs that will burst into flame on command, regardless of the surrounding conditions. I have rings that will afford some protection from the elements as well.”

“What about people such as myself, who wear heavier armor in battle?” Autumn asked.

“Be prepared to be very cold,” Tiranel said. “You’re an aasimar, and so have some natural resistance to extreme cold. It will not be enough. Wear thick, absorbent material underneath your armor. Or obtain magical items that protect against the cold. Better yet, do both. That goes for all of you.”

“Stick to the subject of environment and travel for now,” Anduriel said. “I can field questions about personal items, weapons, and tactics later.”

“What about navigation?” Kyle said. “Once we’re there, I’m assuming steering by landmark is out, or by stars.”

“I still have that wand that tells us which way is north,” Lanara reminded him.
“That’s a good resource,” Tiranel agreed.

“Okay, what about travel hazards, other than the obvious things like blizzards?” Kyle asked.

“You mean, like sinking into the snow?” Tiranel asked. “That far down, the snow pack is firm enough that it shouldn’t be a concern, but you’ll want to take snowshoes just in case. Watch for crevasses, which you should be able to go around or cross using ropes and ice picks. You’re leaving soon, I take it?”

“We hope to get there by late summer,” Xu said.

“Good, then you’ll avoid the worst of the weather. If you find yourself delayed, do not try to make the journey in the winter. Wait a year.” Tiranel dug into a pocket, closing his hand around something inside. “Here’s something that will aid you, but whoever takes it should treat it with care. It’s rather fragile.” He pulled out what looked like a small snow-globe and set it on the table. “If you shake it, it will create an area into which wind and snow can’t penetrate. It only lasts about an hour, and it takes twenty-four hours to recharge. But if you’re caught in a blizzard, it will protect you long enough that you can set up actual shelters.”

“Osborn, can you carry it?” Autumn asked.

“Sure,” he said, picking up the globe and putting it away.

“That is most of the information I had to share,” Tiranel said. “My associate can answer more questions now.”

“Does somebody want to go find Razael?” Maddie asked. “He should probably hear the stuff about weapons and tactics.”

“I’ll go,” Kyle said. The wizard rose and walked toward the nearest balcony, assuming that the tracker would have gone outside.

“How many of you are going on this expedition?” Tiranel asked, as Kyle left.

“Well, all of us,” Autumn said, “all eight.”

“Well, then,” Tiranel said, “I can provide you all with rings that will help – you’ll still be cold, but it will keep your body temperature from dropping. Those are all the trinkets I can provide.” Tiranel dug into a pocket and put eight rings on the table. “I’ll have the firewood I mentioned left at the palace for you.”

“Your help is appreciated,” Autumn said, “Thank you.”

Just then Kyle and Razael returned, looked somewhat disturbed.

“There’s a magestorm coming,” Kyle said. “Razael thinks it’ll hit us in about two hours, maybe less.”

“A magestorm?” Autumn asked.

“It’s a brief surge of wild magic that manifests as a violent storm,” Kyle explained. “They happen all the time, but usually in unpopulated areas, or over the ocean. Magestorms over cities are rare.”

“Do we need to go back to the palace?” Autumn asked.

“I don’t think so,” Kyle said, “There was a messenger outside. They’re going to be raising the palace’s anti-magic shields in about thirty minutes. That should keep us safe here. If anyone has anything they need stored in any sort of extra-dimensional space, though, you’d better get it out now. All our magical items aren’t going to work when the shields go up.”

“How long will the storm last?” Xu asked.

“Well, it’s kind of hard to predict, just based on the nature of a magestorm,” Kyle explained. “Most last a couple of hours, but some only last minutes, while others can stretch out for days.”

As the party took a moment to talk about what they wanted to do, Tiranel and Anduriel looked at each other, and then suddenly stood up. “Unfortunately,” Anduriel said quickly, “I think my colleague and I will have to adjourn for the day.”

“You’ll have to excuse us. Goodbye.” Tiranel said, and walked away.

“If you need anything,” Anduriel said, “I’ll be available whenever the magestorm passes. Good day.” Anduriel also beat a hasty exit.

“Okay,” Kyle said slowly, after they left.

“Well, that was abrupt,” Razael said. He glanced over and saw that Tiranel’s eight rings were still laying on the table.

“Well, some people do get freaked out by magestorms,” Kyle said.

“It seems our schedule for the rest of the day has been cleared,” Autumn said. “I, for one, would like to get out of this corset as soon as possible.”

“Hey, Kyle, I saw that Lord Zanich and Lady Auror were here,” Razael said. “Maybe you could go spend some time with them.”

Kyle shook his head. “I think I’ll go back to our room with Autumn for a while instead.”

“Okay, we know where Kyle and Autumn are heading,” Arrie said. “I should probably go see my husband, too, now that I have some time.”

“I’m going to go spend some time with Aralda,” Lanara said. “Maddie, want to come?”

“I would,” Maddie said, “but I should go to the High Temple. Not everyone in the city will be protected by the shields.”

“You know,” Xu said quietly, “it seems odd that those two scholars left so quickly. They did not seem the type to panic over a magestorm, especially knowing that the palace would be protected by anti-magic.”
“Yeah,” Osborn said, “it’s almost like they were more worried after they heard about the shields. Maybe we should go see where they went.”

“I’ll come with you, too,” Razael said. “All of the people I’m supposed to be keeping an eye on are going places safer than here, anyway.”

Everyone separated, and Razael, Osborn and Xu went off in search of Tiranel and Anduriel. They asked a few people still at the library, and sure enough several people had noted their departure. “I think they went that way,” one scribe said, “toward the palace kitchens.”

The trio of adventurers made their way to the large building that housed the kitchens. There were few people about, most having left after hearing about the impending magestorm. Even so, there were enough people around who had noticed a tall, gaunt elf accompanied by a richly-dressed elf that they were able to track the scholars down as far as the pantries in the basement.

They walked through the labyrinth of vast chambers, were enormous quantities of food were stored. “I had no idea they had an entire room just for beans,” Razael commented.

“I want to find the bacon room,” Osborn said.

“That would be dangerous knowledge in your hands, Osborn,” Xu commented.

“Ooh! That reminds me!” Osborn pulled out the pig statuette that Kyle had given him long ago, and rubbed it, summoning a pound of fresh bacon. “Better get it now before the shields go up,” he said.

A few minutes of searching went by before they felt the strange pressure of the anti-magic shields going up. They took a few minutes to adjust their gear, which now sat heavier on their bodies, and continued looking. After another several minutes, Osborn noted a set of footprints in a fine layer of flour on the floor.

“These shoes look too fancy to belong to a cook,” Osborn said. “Looks like they split up; one heads off into that room, the other into that room.”

“I say the left door first,” Razael said. “I think those stuck-up know-it-alls can delay their snacking long enough to give us a few straight answers.”

They opened up the door, throwing it wide in the hopes of startling whichever scholar had holed up in that room. The chamber beyond was large, but was now mostly filled – not with food, but with something alive.

Xu, Osborn, and Razael stared up, white-faced, at the creature that stared at them. Glistening red scales covered a long, thin body, and a pair of leathery wings scraped the ceiling. Burning eyes regarded them with a mix of disdain and irritation, and it bared large, razor sharp teeth. Waves of heat rolled out of the room and washed over the three adventurers.

Very slowly, Osborn reached into his pouch and withdrew the pound of bacon he’d created earlier. He extended it out toward the massive creature.

“Bacon?”

The dragon opened his mouth, and the world turned into flame.



* * *



Autumn and Kyle walked back to their suite, conversing intimately with each other. As they reached the palace, they felt a strange snap in the air as the anti-magic fields activated. The ambient light in the palace dimmed, as the magical lights winked out, having been hastily supplemented by more mundane illumination.

“Wow,” said Kyle, as the shields went up, “that’s an odd sensation. I never realized how different it feels not to have any magic at all. It’s a little unnerving, really.”

“Well, it’s not like you’ll need your magic to deal with anything in the palace,” Autumn observed.

“Except maybe your mother.”

“Kyle!” Autumn mock-punched him in the shoulder.

“I know, I know.” Kyle sighed. “I should probably at least make an attempt to talk to her in a couple of days, shouldn’t I?”

“Yes,” agreed Autumn, “but don’t expect too much.”

“I won’t. But I’ll talk to her just the same. Maybe she doesn’t like it, but we’re getting married regardless of what she thinks. Maybe I’ll never be treated like a son, but at least she can stop treating me like a servant.”

“You know I’ll be behind you, no matter what,” Autumn said.

“I know.”

They walked a little further, climbing stairs up to the wing where their rooms awaited them. “You know,” Autumn commented, “it would be nice if we could have both sides of the family at the wedding.”

Kyle sighed. “I’m working on it, really. I’ve tried scrying for my father a couple of times, but I’m getting… odd results. I think maybe there’s some sort of interference from Targeth’s barriers. After we get back from the south pole, maybe we can arrange a trip back into Targeth and I can try again then. Even if that does the trick, it’s going to be a slow process finding everyone.”

“I can wait,” Autumn said.

“I’m not so sure I can. Besides, even if I find Pa and my brothers and sisters, there’s not much chance they’d be able to come to the wedding. I doubt any of them married nobles, so they can’t just pick up and be gone for weeks just for a wedding. Common folk gather for weddings that are the next village over, not the next country over.”

“Well, they’re still getting invited, if you find them,” Autumn said. “I at least want to meet your family once.”

“Like I said, I’m working on it. But can we leave off talking about weddings and family for a while?”

“Not yet,” Autumn said, “we have some letters to write to announce the engagement, and you have better penmanship than I do. You can write by candlelight as well as you can with magical light.”

“Fine,” Kyle sighed, “but do we have to start doing that as soon as we get back?” He put his arm around Autumn’s waist. “You did say you wanted out of that corset, right?”

Autumn pulled close to Kyle. “Well…”

They reached the door to their suite a minute later. They paused for a while, listening to the fury of the magestorm outside, which shook the palace even though the shields were up and they were deep in the interior of the building. Finally, they went into their chambers, which is when they were attacked.

Two men clad head to toe in black jumped out of the shadows and grabbed Kyle and Autumn from behind, wrenching them apart and throwing them to the floor. Their assailants quickly and expertly immobilized them, and pressed cloths onto their faces. Foul vapors drifted into their lungs, and they both felt themselves getting light-headed.

Kyle managed to pull the hand away from his face with brute strength, and began shouting for help even as he struggled to break free. But they had closed the door on the way in, so the sound didn’t carry very far out into the hall. Kyle was twisted so that he couldn’t even see where Autumn was, and thus couldn’t see that she was in a similar predicament. The man attacking Kyle seemed somewhat surprised that a wizard was able to put up such a fight, and reacted by punching him hard in the ribs. There was an audible snap, and the breath exploded out of his lungs. The attacker used the opening to press the cloth on Kyle’s face again.

Autumn was having similar problems. Though she was able to pull her face free from the drugged cloth as well, she couldn’t breathe well in her corset, and it kept her from twisting around at the torso to grab her assailant back. With the cloth off her face, Autumn’s attacker also resorted to brute force, slamming a fist into Autumn’s face. Blood sprayed onto the carpet, and she felt herself swooning. She was dimly aware that the blows were very precisely aimed at pressure points, much as she had seen Xu do when in battle. Briefly Autumn wondered if these might be monks sent by Hungai to kidnap Xu, when she heard another hard blow next to her, another snap of bone, and Kyle’s shouts were suddenly silenced.

Outside in the hallway, Arrie approached her sister’s suite. She’d gone to find Herion, but he was gone, working on securing the palace from the magestorm. So instead she’d gone to her own rooms and changed out of her formal clothes into her armor and weapons. She hoped Autumn might be up for a bit of exercise, to work out some of the frustration she must be feeling after her morning encounter with their parents. As she drew up to the door, she heard a commotion behind it; the sound of people struggling, and Autumn shouting in rage.

Arrie kicked open the door to see her sister sprawled on the floor, held down by a large man wearing black clothing and a mask. Blood flowed from her nose, and she looked as though she were gasping for breath. The man punched her in the back of the head, and she went limp. A second masked assailant had picked up an unconscious Kyle, slinging him over one shoulder like a sack of flour.

Arrie whipped out a set of bolas and hurled them at the man carrying Kyle, who casually batted them out of the air. But he was now faced with trying to get past Arrie, who blocked the only exit from the interior suites, her spiked chain already in hand. The man moved forward, and suddenly hurled Kyle’s body at Arrie. She managed to spin and avoid the wizard’s bulk, turning to face the black-clad attacker again and Kyle landed heavily in the hall outside. Arrie waited patiently for the would-be kidnappers to make the first move, at the same time shouting for guards through the now open door. The man who’d had Kyle tried to roll past Arrie, but she was ready, and lashed him with her chain. In response, he punched and kicked at her, landing a few telling blows.

“Oh, you really want to fight, do you?” Arrie growled, as she whipped her chain around again. With blood dripping from several wounds, the man again tried to spring past Arrie, this time slipping through and fleeing down the hallway. The other kidnapper, who had made certain that Autumn would not be getting up, stood and circled near the center of the room, wary of the reach of Arrie’s weapon.

“You may as well surrender now,” Arrie said, “the guards are no doubt already on their way.” She repeated the warning in a few languages, but got no response. The masked man suddenly leaped, trying to get past Arrie rather than face her. She tried to get her chain around his feet to pull him down, but he danced out of it, and began running very quickly down the hall. Arrie threw her second set of bolas at him, and managed to snare his knees. The man fell, but was wriggling out of the cords and standing even as Arrie ran up. She was able to get off one last parting blow before the kidnapper ran off again, too fast for her to follow. Moments later a squad of guards ran up, and Arrie ordered them to capture the two kidnappers, pointing out the blood trails.

“Secure the palace,” she ordered, “Bring all my companions to my sister’s chambers immediately.” As the guards ran off, Arrie rushed back to Autumn and Kyle. She pulled Kyle back into the room, laying him down next to Autumn before rolling her sister over. Both were deeply unconscious, and a lingering foul odor surrounded them. Arrie inspected the wounds as best she could, cursing the fact that she had no skills as a healer. Autumn’s nose was still bleeding, and possibly broken, and she had several bruises and minor scrapes, but otherwise she seemed intact. Arrie cut her sister out of her corset with a knife, allowing her to breathe more deeply, then inspected Kyle. He looked far worse off; his face was covered in blood and bruises, and his jaw sat at a strange angle. She could feel a rib move inside his chest when she pressed gently on his torso.

After a few minutes, Autumn began to stir, coughing weakly. “What happened?” she asked.

“You were attacked, but they’re gone now.” Arrie gently stroked Autumn’s hair to reassure her. “The guards are looking for them now.”

“Kyle?” Autumn said, a slight panic in her voice.

“He’s here, but still out cold. Looks like they were a little rougher with him than you.”

“Don’t think… they expected to be out-muscled by a wizard,” Autumn laughed weakly.

“I think you’re right.”

“Arrie,” Autumn said, “do you think it was Hungai again? Those two fought like Xu does.”

“Hopefully we can capture one of them, and find out,” Arrie said. “But why attack the two of you if they were after Xu?”

Kyle took another ten minutes to wake up. He opened his eyes, and saw Arrie and Autumn looking back at him.

“Don’t try to talk,” Arrie said quickly. “Your jaw…”

Nodding, Kyle reached up and felt along his jawline. After a moment of exploration, Kyle placed the heel of his left hand against his jaw, and with a hard shove over and down popped the jaw back in.

“Kyle!” Autumn cried, “be careful!”

“I know what I’m doing,” Kyle said slowly, after working his jaw back and forth a couple of times. “Us farm boys can’t always nip off to the cleric’s every time we get hurt, so you learn a thing or two. Dislocated joints are easy.” Feeling down along his ribcage, he winced as he felt the sting of his broken rib. “This will take a bit more effort.”

“We’ll get the healers,” Arrie said, “once the storm passes you’ll be good as new.”

“What was that stuff they were trying to force us to breathe?” Autumn asked.

“Insanity mist, I think. It’s nasty stuff, and not cheap. Fortunately neither of us got a very big dose, or we’d be drooling idiots for a while.”

“Who do you think did this?” Arrie asked.

“No idea. Could be old enemies, could be people trying to kidnap and ransom some nobles.”

“They certainly caught us at our weakest point,” Autumn said. “Do you think they planned their attack to coincide with the magestorm?”

“Impossible,” Kyle said. “No one can predict a magestorm. They were just lucky on their timing.”

“Okay, no more talking for a while,” Arrie said. “Everyone should be showing up here soon. I’m going to help you both up into bed.”

It was some time before anyone else reached the room. Lanara was the first to arrive, looking peeved. “What’s this all about, Arrie? I was having a perfectly good time with Aralda, and suddenly I’m chased out of her rooms by guards and escorted here. What’s the…?” Lanara then saw Kyle and Autumn laying in their bed. “Oh.”

Maddie came a short while later, and saw Lanara cleaning up Kyle and Autumn’s wounds while Arrie paced. Guards were coming in giving regular reports; the attackers had not yet been found, but the search was narrowing.

“So, no one else got attacked by angry men in black pajamas?” Arrie asked. Lanara and Maddie shook their heads.

“Where are the others?” Maddie asked.

“They went off to find the scholars, last I knew,” Lanara said. “Haven’t seen them since.”

Thunder from the magestorm rumbled through the walls, causing the room to shake, and the lamps flickered as though a breeze had blown through the room.

Just then, Razael, Osborn and Xu burst into the room, panting from exertion.

“What’s wrong?” Arrie asked. Their clothing and hair was slightly singed, and all three looked as though they’d run non-stop all the way across the palace complex.

“Did you just fight with men in black pajamas?” Maddie asked.

“No,” panted Razael, “there weren’t black pajamas, and they weren’t men. And we weren’t fighting.”

“We… we just saw a dragon,” Osborn gasped.

“A what?” Kyle said, almost forgetting not to sit up.

“A dragon!” Razael confirmed.

“Yeah, right.” Lanara said. “The kind that comes out of a bottle?”

“No, it was the scholars. Anduriel and Tiranel. They’re dragons.”

“Yeah, they’re in the pantry,” Osborn said.

“Now I know you’re pulling my leg,” Lanara said.

“Lanara,” Xu said, “have you ever know me to lie?”

“No.”

“There was a dragon.”

“Yeah, a big red one!” Osborn said.

“I thought there were two dragons,” Autumn said.

“We didn’t see the other one,” Razael admitted. “We were too busy running.”

“If you didn’t see the dragon, how do you know it was there?” Kyle said, not bothering to hide a slight grin as he mimicked Razael’s earlier conversation with Anduriel.

“We tracked down Anduriel and Tiranel to the pantries,” Osborn said. “Their trail split up and stopped at two doors, and the red dragon was behind one of them.” The hin’s face suddenly broke into a grin. “It was the greatest thing I’ve ever seen. I offered him some bacon!”

“Well, I guess that explains why those two had to leave so suddenly,” Kyle said. “Shape changing is a magical ability.”

“I don’t think I’ve ever run like that from anything,” Razael said.

“That would have been what I did,” Maddie commented.

“I don’t think so,” the tracker retorted. “The way you act, I think you would have run up and brandished a stick at it.”

“Well, at least she wouldn’t have egged it on like you did,” Osborn said.

“He probably didn’t hear me,” Razael said.

“I’m pretty sure he did,” Osborn countered. “You ran off screaming ‘I know how you know there’s a dragon at the pole, ass!’”

“All right,” Maddie said, “can we get a coherent explanation of everything that’s happened?”

The group spent a few minutes getting their facts straight. Just after they finished, a squad of guards came into the room. Two of the guards were dragging one of the black-clad attackers behind them, the body leaving bloody streaks on the floor from several spear wounds.

“Excellent!” Arrie said. “Good job!”

“We thought you’d want to see the body,” the guard said. “The other one escaped.”

“That’s one of the ones that attacked us,” Autumn confirmed.

The guard pulled off the mask, revealing an unremarkable elf. “The only marking we found was this.” He pulled up one of the dead man’s sleeves, revealing a symbol branded into the forearm. It was a vaguely diamond shape, with lines radiating upward from the lateral corners. It was vaguely shaped like bird’s beet. Kyle looked at the symbol, turned white, and passed out.

“Why did that just break Kyle?” Arrie asked.

“Your Highness, shall we take the body away to be cremated?” the guard asked.

“Why don’t we have him interrogated by a priest first?” Arrie suggested. “Leave the body here for now and send someone to pick it up later.”

“Of course, Your Highness,” the guard saluted, and they exited the room.

Once the guards were gone, Autumn shook Kyle awake. “What happened?” she asked as his eyes fluttered open. “Why did you faint?”

“What… what does he have on him?” Kyle asked.

“Let’s find out,” Razael said. He began going over the body, pulling off a belt stuffed with vials. He opened one, sniffed it, and winced. “Damn, that’s foul. Mind if I keep this?”

“Does he have a knife of any kind?”

“Nope, unless he’s smuggling one in,” Razael said. “I can search him more… thoroughly if you want.”

“No, the kind of blade I’m looking for wouldn’t work for that,” Kyle said.

“So, what’s the deal?” Razael asked.

“I’ve… seen that symbol before,” Kyle admitted.

“Where?” the tracker asked.

“It was months ago, last fall when we were in Tlaxan last time,” he began. “Actually, it was during that brief stay in Merlion at you parent’s castle. Remember the day you went out to investigate those goblin attacks on caravans, and I wasn’t around?”

“I remember,” Arrie said.

“I don’t,” Maddie was sure to say, “I wasn’t there.”

Kyle nodded, knowing that Kavan had been there, but that Maddie was only trying to firmly separate the two identities. “Well, it turns out that I have a cousin that lives in the village surrounding the castle, one of my uncle Seamus’ sons named Kevin. Found him quite by accident, when his wife Elsie mistook me for Kevin’s brother. See, Kevin had been expecting a visit from his brother – adopted brother, actually – Nicholas, who was a merchant. But Nicholas was overdue, and I volunteered to go up to the next town to see if he’d been through – the town, Balnad’s Ford was supposed to be his last stop on his trade route, and it’s only a couple days ride from Castle Verahannen. I went because I could get away more easily than Kevin or his wife, who both work at the castle, and because I could use magic and make the trip in a day.

“Well, I made it to Balnad’s Ford fine, and found out that Nicholas had been there several days ago, and was seen heading toward the castle, so should have been there by then. But I also found out that there had been other men looking for Nicholas too… men who carried disemboweling knives. So, I backtracked on the road to about where I figured these men would have caught up to Nicholas, and looked around.”

Kyle paused, swallowing to wet his throat. “Well, I found him, or what was left of him, in a ruined house just off the road. It wasn’t pretty. He’d been killed… ritually killed. Magical diagrams were scribed in blood all around him, I’m assuming in his blood. His eyes had been cut out, and so had his tongue, his kidneys, and his heart, and he’d been castrated. Every bone in all his fingers had been broken. Two iron nails were driven into his ears. Most of it was done while he was still alive. As far as I can tell, the purpose of the ritual was not only to make sure he was dead, but that his soul was destroyed as well. Not trapped, or sent to the Shadow Plane, but eradicated.”

Autumn leaned over the other side of the bed and threw up.

“I have no idea if the ritual really worked,” Kyle continued when his fiancée had recovered, “that’s just what it was intended to do. The only other thing I saw was that symbol painted on the wall in blood.” Kyle pointed at the diamond-mark on the dead elf’s arm. “It wasn’t part of the ritual, I know that. I never really said anything at the time about it. I figured it was a small cult of Fiel; the symbol on the wall was rather crude, and it sort of resembles a spider. And honestly, out in remote rural areas, little cults like that spring up all the time. A farmer has a couple of bad harvests, a shepherd loses his flock to disease, they get desperate and start blaming others for their misfortune. Most of those kind of cults don’t to anything worse that sit in someone’s barn wearing black robes and burning candles, maybe killing a chicken. The worst will kill one or two people, and then they’re rounded up by the sheriff and are hung. At the time we were in a hurry to get up to Noxolt because the previous Emperor was dying, and I figured it was worth bothering all of you with something that the local law could probably handle.”

“Well, I don’t know if they ever were caught,” Lanara said, “and I don’t know what it has to do with anything, but that symbol is pretty old, and it has something to do with magic and preservation, though for the life of me I have no idea how the two ideas are connected.”

“Well, you know more than I did,” Kyle said. “I looked for a reference to that symbol in the library here, but found nothing other than it probably wasn’t a symbol of Fiel. I let it go, honestly; I figured it was a random thing, they probably picked Nicholas out of the crowd. I didn’t think I’d ever deal with it again. But to see it now, here, after someone attacked my fiancée…”

“And you, too,” Autumn reminded him.

“It was a little unsettling,” Kyle admitted. “I guess with everything else today it was just a little too much. And now, once again, this comes up when we’re pressed for time again.”

Thunder shook the palace again, startling everyone. However, they noticed that it seemed to be lessening in intensity.

“Can someone get me a pen and parchment?” Kyle asked. “I want to copy that symbol down.”

“We could just cut it off for you,” Maddie offered.

“Paper’s fine, thanks,” Kyle said.

After making a copy of the symbol, Kyle rolled up the parchment, and then slowly started to rise out of bed.

“You shouldn’t be doing that,” Maddie said.

“I’m fine, I’ll just walk slow,” he replied.

“Kyle, the man’s not going anywhere,” Maddie said, pointing at the man who’d attacked them.

“I’m not worried about him.”

“Kyle, lay down and rest tonight,” Lanara said. “There’s not much you can do with this storm going.”

“Where did you say the dragons were?” Kyle asked, seeming to ignore Lanara.

“In the pantry,” Osborn said, “basement of the kitchen.”

“Kyle,” Arrie said slowly, “if the dragons tried to immolate them…” She pointed at Xu, Osborn, and Razael.

“Well, clearly with the shields up I’m not a threat,” Kyle said.

“I don’t think the dragons thought these three were a threat either,” Maddie countered, “and look what happened.”

“I don’t think he was really trying to immolate us,” Osborn said, “because he would have if he wanted to.”

There was another blast of thunder outside, which abruptly cut out mid-tremor. The torches and lamps flickered, and then seemed to steady, and the light seemed somehow cleaner. Razael left the room, and returned a minute later. “Magestorm’s gone,” he said. “Not a cloud in the sky now.”

“Which means that they’ll drop the shields soon,” Autumn said, with the message for Kyle clear; and the dragons might see you as a threat now.

“Fine,” Kyle said, “I’ll stay.” He settled back down into the bed. “But promise me one thing. I assume we’re going to meet the scholars tomorrow?”

“Assuming they don’t leave tonight,” Arrie said.

‘Well, if we do, can we not play that awkward game where everyone pretends they don’t know that Anduriel and Tiranel are dragons? I kind of wanted to go now to avoid the whole issue.”

“I think we can agree to that, Kyle,” Arrie said.

Fifteen minutes later the anti-magic shields were dropped. “Oh, good,” said Razael, “Now those two can get some help.”

“Hey!” Lanara protested, “I’m the one that stopped their bleeding!”

“Oh, yeah, that,” Razael said, shrugging.

“I can’t offer healing to Autumn,” Maddie said, “because she’s not one of Erito’s flock. But I can do nice things for Kyle.”

“Yes, you could,” quipped Lanara, “but wouldn’t that require Autumn’s permission or cooperation?”

After a laugh, Maddie healed Kyle while Autumn accepted a potion from Osborn. After a while, Arrie summoned some guards, and had the body of the elven assailant dragged out of the room and placed under guard until an Eritan priest could speak with the body. They continued to discuss the night’s events, until they heard a loud knock at their door.

“Now what?” Arrie asked, heading to the door. “Is everyone decent?”

“As decent as we get,” said Lanara.

Arrie opened the door and saw Tiranel and Anduriel standing in the hall, looking just as they did when the party had first met them. Razael, who could see who was at the door from his angle, quickly looked around, and seeing that Kyle and Autumn’s suite had no windows, he dove into a closet.

The two ‘elves’ quickly pushed their way into the room. “Okay, everyone,” Anduriel said, “sit down. This isn’t a request.” Anduriel walked over to the closet, and pulled Razael out, setting him down on the end of a couch.

“So, do you actually live at the south pole?” Kyle asked Anduriel.

“No.”

“But you know who does, right?”

“Right. Okay, since it seems the mage is a little incapacitated…”

“Can you do something about that?” Lanara interrupted.

“No.” Anduriel pulled a large, leather-bound tome from his robes and handed it to Arrie. “Allow me to summarize the contents of that book. At the southern pole, you will find an insanely angry, insanely powerful dragon. This is of concern to me, because this dragon is not doing what he’s supposed to be doing.”

“Does he have anything that belongs to you,” Lanara asked, “or would like to own?”

“Irrelevant,” Anduriel spat. “Essentially, because this dragon isn’t doing what it’s supposed to be doing, it no longer enjoys it’s membership in ‘the club’, if you will.” Anduriel turned to look at Autumn. “In answer to your question about armor; I would either wear as little as possible and maximize your protection in other ways, or I would get as many thick, heavy furs as I could, and try to get them large enough to go on outside the armor.”

“Or you could wear the rings I gave you,” Tiranel muttered quietly.

“In regard to threats you’ll find,” Anduriel continued, as if he hadn’t heard his companion, “there are a lot of undead, as I said before. These undead are unhappy with their state of existence, and they’ll take it out on anything living they can find.” The dragon-elf gestured at the party.

“Are you sure we have to go there this summer?” Lanara asked.

Anduriel scowled, clearly irritated by the cansin’s constant interruptions. “Don’t talk,” he said to her, his words clearly laced with the power of a suggestion spell. Lanara was actually able to slip off the draconic enchantment, but decided not to talk anyway, just to avoid more confrontations.

“As I was saying,” Anduriel continued, “Have you faced the undead before?” The party voiced their assertion that they had.

“Then you know what’s effective against them,” Anduriel said. “Positive energy, disruption weapons, anti-undead magic. I can tell you that the dragon at the pole has delved so far into the realm of undeath, that although he’s not actually undead himself, it’s speculated that he’s close enough to it that some of these same weapons might affect him in the same way. I’d at least give it a try. I strongly recommend against using negative energy of any kind.”

“What about sonic energy?” Lanara asked, breaking her silence.

Anduriel looked irritated that the bard wasn’t obeying his suggestion. “Go wait in the closet,” he snapped, though this time there was no sorcery behind it.

“It’s a legitimate question,” Lanara stated calmly.

“You’ll have to forgive him,” Tiranel said, stepping up, “elemental energies are not his forte. Beyond the obvious reasons for avoiding cold energy, try not to rely on electrical attacks too heavily. There may be constructs down there reinforcing the undead that are immune to electrical damage. Sonic and acidic energies should be fine. And although I may have a bias, I would say that fire is best.”

“Well, at least we know which one it was,” Razael whispered to Osborn.

“Hope you enjoyed the bacon!” Osborn said to Tiranel.

“Are there any questions?” Anduriel asked.

“Well, since you’ve pretty much told us to shut up and listen to you…” Lanara grumbled.

“I have an unrelated question,” Kyle said, “so I’ll wait for others to ask things related to the south pole first.”

“That’s fine,” Anduriel said, “ask your question.”

Kyle unrolled the parchment that he’d copied the symbol on. “Do either of you know what this is?”

Both dragons peered at the parchment. “No idea,” Tiranel said.

“A human glyph of some sort?” Anduriel offered.

“I thought that since you’re scholars, you might have an idea,” Kyle said.

“I don’t spend much time with humans,” Tiranel said.

“I’m not real sure it is human in origin,” Kyle said, “but never mind. If you don’t know, you don’t know.” He rolled the parchment back up.

Anduriel looked around at the party. “I apologize for the heavy-handedness. We try to move in much less overt circles normally.”

“So, why aren’t you taking care of this upstart dragon yourself?” Razael asked.

“Yes, would not dragons wish to deal with draconic affairs?” Xu added.

“There are a few reasons,” Anduriel said. “It would be in my capacity to do this, certainly.”

“It wouldn’t be for me,” Tiranel admitted. “The environment is contrary to my very nature. I’d be at too much of a disdvantage.”

“For me,” Anduriel said, “I have other things to worry about, honestly. My role is not simply to ‘deal with draconic affairs’. I have other responsibilities, and my presence at the pole or my absence elsewhere could have grave effects in other areas.”

“So, it’s like the same reason the Emperor of Tlaxan doesn’t personally deal with every trade dispute or border conflict,” Kyle said.

“Exactly. The reason we’re trusting this to the eight of you is that you’re relatively high-profile, and you’re reasonably competent. I’d hoped we could have convinced you to deal with our friend down there without being so direct about our interest in the matter, but through no fault of your own, it’s happened.”

“How is it ‘no fault of their own’?” Tiranel asked.

“Well, they didn’t summon the magestorm, did they?”

“No, but they did come snooping around the pantry looking for us.”

“Well, never mind that. Any other questions?”

“How long will you be in the city?” Autumn asked.

“Not much longer, I’m afraid. But if any of you absolutely needs to speak with me, here.” Anduriel produced a platinum ring embossed with a golden dragon, and gave it to Autumn. “Concentrate on the ring, and I’ll do what I can to help.”

“You already have what help I can give,” Tiranel said. “When you return, I’ll find you to get back what I’ve loaned you.”

“Thank you,” Autumn said in Draconic. “We appreciate your help.”

Both Tiranel and Anduriel nodded. “You’re welcome,” Anduriel said. “Good luck to you.” With that, they both turned and walked out of the room.

The party milled about for a bit, still absorbing all the information they’d heard. Looming largest in their minds was that not only had they met two dragons, the most powerful and legendary creatures on the planet, but they were preparing to set off for the ends of the earth to challenge a third.

Kyle broke the silence first. “Hey, Arrie? Can I have that book they gave you? With everything that’s happened today, I don’t think I’m going to sleep much anyway.”



* * *



Tiranel and Anduriel walked side by side, down the wide road leading away from the Imperial Palace. They conversed quietly in Draconic.

“Ten thousand gold says they don’t make it past the first guardian,” Anduriel said.

“I’m not a betting creature,” Tiranel replied. “Besides, I have at least that much invested in them just in the magic I’ve loaned them. If they die, you can fly down there and get it from them.” Tiranel snorted. “Besides, what happened to ‘reasonably competent’?”

“They are,” Anduriel admitted, “but they’re still only humanoid.”

“Be that as it may, they’re all we have right now. If this doesn’t work, it will make things complicated for all of us.”

“I know that,” Anduriel snapped, then sighed. “I’m sorry. I’m just hungry. I could use a few sheep right about now.” The extravagantly garbed scholar glared at Tiranel. “You could have at least shared the hin’s bacon.”

“It was obviously a burnt offering to me,” Tiranel said.

“But you burned it!”
“Details, details,” he waved the accusation away. “But it’s nice to see that some humanoids still have the sense to know how to show proper respect to a dragon.” Tiranel thought for a moment. “I should go to the temple of Erito, and donate some money and ask for a special blessing for the hin.”
 

Delemental

First Post
Preparing for Trouble

The party gathered early the next morning down in one of the palace’s underground meeting rooms, awaiting the arrival of a priest of Erito and the body of the elf that had tried to kidnap Kyle and Autumn. Only Arrie was absent; Herion had been sent on a diplomatic mission to the Red Archipelago that morning, and had requested Arrie go with him, as the people of the island kingdom held a deep reverence for family, and Herion thought that going there as a married couple might help the mission proceed more smoothly.

Kyle and Autumn were both looking better after a night of rest and magical healing, though Kyle still had a few bruises around his jaw. Kyle sat quietly, reading the book that Anduriel had given them, while Autumn joined in the small talk around the table.

About thirty minutes later, two guards carried in the body of the elf on a litter, setting it on the table. They were followed by a short, skinny axani wearing ceremonial Eritan robes. The priest stood at the end of the table, near the elf’s head.

“I am Vaxnor,” he said. “I have been instructed by the Church to perform the rite that will allow communication with these remains. You will be able to ask three questions before the magic expires. Are your questions prepared?”

“We’ve got ‘em,” Lanara said.

“Who will be the designated questioner?”

Kyle closed his book and stood up. “I guess that’s me.”

“Please stand here, at my left. Do you speak the Elvish tongue?”

“Yes,”

“Very good,” said Vaxnor, “as the remains will most likely communicate in their former native language. A translator will not be required.” He looked around the room. “Does anyone know the deceased’s patron deity?”

“Off the top of my head, probably not Paccë,” Lanara said.

When the others in the room indicated that no one knew, Vaxnor nodded. “Then I must advise you before I begin that if the deceased’s patron is not Erito, the lingering animus in the remains will recognize the dissonance in the ritual’s divine signature and may resist the compulsion to answer.”

“Kyle, I think we require a translator after all,” Lanara said.

“He means that the body can tell who’s casting the spell, and if he doesn’t like them he can try to not answer questions.”

Kyle took his designated spot, and waited while Vaxnor intoned the words to the ritual. Several minutes later, the body of the elf suddenly jerked, and the eyes began to dart about as the mouth opened and closed slightly. Vaxnor produced a tall, thin hourglass from under his robe, and set it running on the table.

“The ritual is complete,” Vaxnor said. “You may proceed with your first question. There will be some brief time available to you after each answer for translation and discussion, but the magic will expire when the sand runs out.”

“All right,” Kyle said, then leaned over to the body. “What was it you intended to do with the people you assaulted and attempted to abduct in the palace?”

The jaw began to move faster and wider, and an eerie, whispering voice spilled out of his dry lips. “Purify him.”

After the translation from Elvish, Autumn frowned. “He only answered half the question,” she said. “I thought he was supposed to be truthful, but he only said what he was going to do to Kyle.”

“I think he did answer the whole question,” Osborn said. “He didn’t intend to do anything with you.”

“They probably would have left you unconscious on the floor,” Kyle said. “They were after me.” He looked a little unsteady on his feet.

“You? Why you?” Autumn demanded. “And what does ‘purify’ mean?”

“This is just a guess,” Razael said, “but I think Kyle’s cousin might have been ‘purified’.”

Autumn was about to say something else, but Kyle held up a hand. “Lets finish the questions first.” He leaned over to the body again. “What does the symbol branded on your left arm represent?”

The ethereal voice again echoed in the room. “It is the mark of our Order.”

Kyle scowled. “Damn. I meant to phrase that differently. I was flustered by the last question.”

“Well, it tells us that there’s some sort of organization behind this,” Maddie offered.

“Great, so I have a whole group of people out to kill me,” Kyle snapped.

“Kyle, do you need to take a break?” Autumn asked. “Someone else can ask the last question.”

“No,” Vaxnor said, “He has been designated as the questioner. The designation cannot be altered mid-ritual. The wizard must ask the third question.”

“I’m fine,” Kyle said, though he didn’t look it. “Who gave the order for this attack to be carried out?” he said to the corpse, rather loudly.

“The Suelamach,” the body whispered, and then it stopped moving.

“The what?” Kyle said, his voice rising. “Who in blazes is that?” Kyle looked at Lanara, who shrugged. Then he turned to Vaxnor.

“Cast the spell again,” Kyle said, “I have more questions.”

“I cannot,” Vaxnor replied. “I have only prepared that ritual once today.”

“Tomorrow, then,” he snapped.

Again, Vaxnor shook his head. “The lingering animus has been depleted. It will take a week before it is sufficiently robust enough to endure another communication ritual.”

“Fine,” Kyle growled. “A week, then.” Kyle cast a spell of his own, and the body glowed slightly for a moment. “Tell the guards to put that somewhere safe for a week,” he barked, “when Vaxnor here can come back and do this again.”

“I’m afraid I cannot guarantee my availability to you six days hence…” Vaxnor began. But Kyle had already come around the table, and snatched up his book.

“Maddie,” Kyle said, pointing at Vaxnor, “clear this up. Him or someone else, I don’t care.” He began to walk toward the door.

“Where are you going?” Autumn asked, rising from her chair.

“Praxos,” Kyle said, “I have a ship to rebuild.” He walked out of the room, letting the door slam behind him.

Stunned, Autumn hesitated for a moment, then walked out of the room in pursuit of her fiancée. The others sat silently until Vaxnor had collected his belongings and bid the party a good morning.

“Somebody woke up on the wrong side of the sentinel,” Razael said.

“Well, you’d probably be grumpy too if you found out someone was hunting you down and trying to kill you,” Osborn said.

The tracker shrugged. “It’s not so bad once you’re used to the idea.”

“Well, Kyle’s not ‘used to the idea’,” Osborn said. “I can see why people would want to hunt you down. But Kyle?”

“He’s got a point,” Lanara said. “I mean, we’ve got plenty of folks out there who want us dead as a group, but Kyle specifically? The man couldn’t make enemies if he tried.”

“Tell that to Lady Auror,” Razael observed.

“I don’t think we’re going to figure this out any time soon,” Maddie said. “I’ll go to the church and arrange for another priest in a week. Maybe some more questions will help. For the time being, though, I think we should avoid the subject around Kyle.”



* * *



The next few days were extremely busy. Kyle’s mood improved quickly, but he was still seen rarely by the others. The party had been given permission to use the palace’s teleportation circle to the port city of Praxos to facilitate the work on their ship and the hiring of crew for the voyage. Kyle was at the shipyards from sunrise to sunset, directing workers to make the modifications that Tiranel had specified to their ship. He did a significant portion of the work himself, using magic to fashion armor plating quickly or to speed up modifications that might have taken weeks otherwise. At night, he would return to the palace and start reading Anduriel’s book again, staying up late into the night. When Autumn expressed her concern, Kyle tried to reassure her that he was just trying to get everything done as fast as he could and that he’d ease up once the ship was finished. Autumn wasn’t entirely convinced, but she and Lanara were busy trying to recruit a crew, so she had little time to ponder it.

The others kept busy as well. Razael was placed in charge of consumables, and he decided to go out hunting, and prepare fresh jerky for the voyage. Osborn was given the task of obtaining dry goods and supplies, and Maddie was charged with gathering the equipment they’d need to survive in the arctic climate. Xu was not given any specific task, but was left free to help whoever needed it most from day to day. The monk did make one important contribution on her own; she had saved up quite a bit of money, having no need to spend it on herself, and used the money to purchase an extradimensional trunk for the ship, which eased the cargo burden considerably.

The party met in the evening of the fifth day, the night before the church of Erito was sending another priest to perform a second speak with dead rite. They each reported on their progress; Kyle said that the armor plating was half done, and the framework for the collapsible mast was complete, and the ice ram would be delivered tomorrow. Razael had arranged for delivery of all the non-meat foodstuffs, taking advantage of his former connections in the capital, and had a healthy stock of jerky being smoked. Osborn was also well on his way to getting all the supplies they would need, and Maddie had been able to get several cold-weather outfits and tents at very reasonable prices.

“We have the crew pretty much hired,” Autumn reported, “including an… extra hand or two.”

“Hey,” said Lanara, “if I’m going to be forced to be on a boat for two months there and two months back, I’ll need to relax. I see no problem with having my own masseuse. You’ve got someone to rub your shoulders already.” Lanara grinned at Maddie and Xu. “But I’m willing to share of anyone’s interested.”

“So, all we need are the captain and mates,” Autumn continued.

“Duchess, if I may,” Razael said, “I’d suggest skipping the captain, and just getting us a really good first mate.”

“Why is that?” she asked.

“Well, I’ve put in a bit of time on ships in my time,” he said. “Spent two years on a free trader coaster, and stints here and there in the Imperial Navy, or other… unaligned naval powers. Why, there was one time we was running from this band of pirates, and there was a storm…”

“Raz?” Maddie said, gently laying a hand on his arm. In their short time with the old tracker, the party had noticed that he would sometimes ramble a bit about his past.

“Oh, right. Anyway, in my experience, the captain of the ship ain’t always the one who knows the most about the ship. They’re just the ones with the money or the family to run a ship. It’s the first mate who runs the show. Besides, the rule at sea is that the captain has the final say over anything on the ship, even over the owners. We don’t need a captain going against our orders.”

“I have to admit, he makes sense,” Osborn said.

“True,” Autumn agreed, “but no crew will accept eight captains. We’d have to pick one of us.”

“Count me out,” Lanara said.

“Me too,” Razael said. “It’s not my cup of ale.”

“Well,” Kyle said slowly, “I do know a little bit about sailing, so I wouldn’t be completely incompetent. And I will know the ship pretty well by the time we set sail. So I guess I could do it.”

Lanara slapped her hand on the table. “Captain Goodson it is, then.”

Autumn smiled at Kyle. “Would you like me to get you a nice captain’s hat?”

“I’d say get a parrot, too, but then Violet might get jealous,” Maddie offered.

“I can teach you to dance a jig and drink rum!” Lanara added.

“All right, all right,” Kyle said, “enough of that. Look, I think I might actually turn in early tonight. Tomorrow’s going to be a long day, what with the ram coming in, and of course the…” he paused for a half-second, “… thing in the morning.”

Autumn laid a hand over Kyle’s. “Are you going to be all right at the ritual tomorrow?”

“I will,” he said, “I promise. I just got a little freaked out last time. But it’s better I know as much as I can now.”

“All right,” Autumn said, “but if you change your mind, tell me.”

Kyle nodded, then stood. “Well, see you all downstairs in the morning.” He walked to the door, and then stopped halfway to the door. “Autumn? If you’re not busy, I’d like a little company tonight. I’m not in the mood to read.”

“All right, Kyle,” Autumn said, “in a little while.”

Kyle left, and the rest of the party sat quietly. Autumn glanced around the room, then at the door, then fiddled with the waistband of her dress a bit, looked at the door again, and then at everyone else.

“Oh, for Ladta’s sake!” Lanara said, “Go!”

Autumn stood up, mumbled a quick “thanks,” and then left. As she went out the door, Lanara sighed and rolled her eyes.

“That’s why I have no use for decorum,” she said.



* * *



They had taken up positions nearly identical to where they were last week as the priest came to perform the ritual. This time it was a red-haired elf-touched priestess who came, who introduced herself as Anika. Kyle again chose to ask the questions, reassuring Autumn that he was fine.

As the corpse began to twitch and the mouth opened, Kyle leaned in. “What is the name of your order?”

The body whispered a phrase in Elvish, and Kyle’s brow furrowed. “Scion-Watchers?”

“Psion-Watchers?” Autumn said, “Is that what he said? I couldn’t hear. Which group of psionicists do you think they’re part of?”

“No, no,” Kyle said, “it’s s-c-i-o-n, not p-s-i-o-n. They sound the same in Common but not in Elvish. I have no idea what a Scion is, though.”

“It’s another term for a descendant or heir,” Razael said.

“I meant that I don’t know what it means in this context,” Kyle explained. “I’ve never heard of a group called the Scion-Watchers. Lanara?”

“Sorry, Kyle,” the bard said.

“Okay, then.” Kyle turned his attention back to the corpse. “How was the one you were after impure?”

“His bloodline made him so.”

“My bloodline?” Kyle said, “but that makes no sense. My family…” he stopped, and took a breath. “It’ll wait until after the last question.” He leaned in for the third and final time. “What does your order hope to accomplish or prevent with these purifications?”

“To ensure the bloodline remains pure,” the body gasped, before falling still once again. Anika bid the party farewell and left shortly thereafter.

“What’s going on here?” Kyle said after she left, clearly irritated. “That all makes no sense. If my bloodline makes me impure, then how will killing me purify it? And why is my bloodline impure? My family is nothing but farmers and laborers!”

“Except for you,” Maddie said.

“And didn’t you say that the cousin that was killed was a merchant?” Lanara asked.

“Yes, but he was adopted into the family. He’s not a Goodson by birth.”

“Maybe these people didn’t know that,” Lanara said.

“And you have at least one mage somewhere in your lineage,” Autumn reminded him. “Remember, it is your ‘family’s staff’.”

“Do you want to ask more questions?” Maddie asked. “I could try and get another priest.”

Kyle thought for a moment. “No,” he said. “I don’t think this guy is high enough in their order to be able to answer the kinds of questions I would have. All it would do is get me more worried about my family.”

“Your family,” Autumn gasped. “Kyle, do you think they’re safe?”

“I don’t know,” he replied. “But what can I do? I have no idea where they are. Targeth’s shield keeps me from scrying them. I’d have to be inside the shield to try, and even then it will take a lot of time to find them. And we have no time for me to go there right now.”

“We could put the voyage off…” Autumn offered.

“No, we can’t. We’ve come too far to back out. Besides, the stuff that’s down there is important for us to know. As much as I hate to say it, the world kind of takes precedence over an old farmer and his five kids right now. I just have to hope that these Scion-Watchers have as much trouble finding my family as I have.” Kyle swallowed. “Still, if and when we get back, I’d appreciate it if we could plan a trip to Targeth if nothing more pressing comes up.”

“Absolutely,” Osborn said.

“It might be a good idea anyway,” Maddie said. “We could go to The Tower. They have huge libraries there. Maybe you can find some reference to these Scion-Watchers, or why they might be interested in you or your family.”

“I’ve never been to Targeth,” Razael said. “They’d never let me in.”

“I can’t imagine why,” Autumn said.

“Tlaxan wanted to have at least one major nation on the continent they weren’t at war with because of Raz,” Kyle said, half-joking.

“I have never started a war,” Razael protested. “Not while you’ve been alive, anyway.”

Kyle shook his head. “I should get to Praxos,” Kyle said. “The ram’s probably already at the shipyards waiting.”

“I have a question first,” Razael said. “What in the blazes is a psion – the p-s-i-o-n one - and why does the word seem to make everyone’s hair stand up on end?”

The party all looked around at each other. “I do need to go,” Kyle said, “but maybe it’s about time we let Raz here know why exactly we’re going to the south pole, and what we’ve been doing.”



* * *



Another week and a half passed. Kyle finished the work on the ship, ahead of schedule, and was able to spend a couple of days in Noxolt buying new spells. He also stocked up on raw materials to create some magical and alchemical items aboard the ship. The mates were hired and took charge of loading the cargo on the ship, leaving Autumn free to make arrangements for the care of the party’s animals with Aralda. Herion and Arrie returned from their mission; Arrie’s skin was noticeably tanned, and she wore necklaces made from brightly colored flowers. The prince and the warrior were caught up on the events of the past several days.

Three days before the ship was set to sail, Kyle was sitting in his room, reading Anduriel’s book, when Autumn walked in. She moved slowly, and looked pale.

“What’s wrong?” Kyle asked, jumping up and helping her to sit down.

“Herion…” She swallowed heavily, “Prince Herion has bestowed my duchy on me.”

It was something they’d expected. The investiture ceremony had granted Autumn official status as a Duchess within the Empire, but Herion had said that the Emperor would take longer to decide where her lands would be located.

“So, I take it you didn’t get some remote little area in northern Tlaxan like we’d thought,” Kyle said. “They didn’t put you close to Merlion, did they?”

Autumn shook her head. “They gave me Vargas.”

Kyle’s jaw dropped. Vargas was a major trade city on the Lassh River, Tlaxan’s western border. “You’re kidding.”

“No, I’m not.”

“But… we’re leaving in three days.”

“Apparently the Emperor has informed the former Lord Mayor’s steward of the situation. He will manage the city and my estate in my absence.”

“The former Lord Mayor? They didn’t fire him, did they?”

“You don’t ‘fire’ a Lord Mayor, Kyle. They’re nobility. No, apparently Duke Marniel fell ill and passed away a few days ago, and he had no heirs – none that are recognized by the Crown. The rumor around court is that it was the very lifestyle that produced so many illegitimate heirs that finally caught up with him and did him in.” Autumn laughed bitterly. “How fortunate they were that there was a lady of sufficient title to take on the mantle of leadership so soon after his parting.”

“I see,” Kyle said. “So… what now?”

“Now we sail to the south pole,” Autumn said, “and on the way there and back I’ll have a lot to think about. When we get back, I should probably visit my new duchy and set affairs in order there. I should at least meet the man who’s running it for me.”

“Well, you know I’ll help where I can,” Kyle said.

“Thank you, Kyle.” Autumn snuggled up next to him. “Of course, you know that once we’re married, you’ll be Duke of Vargas, and it’ll be just as much your problem as mine.”

“Don’t remind me,” Kyle groaned. “I’m having enough trouble adjusting to ‘Captain Goodson’.”

The last three days were a whirlwind of frenzied last-minute preparations. All thoughts of assassin cults or noble titles were pushed aside as the party rushed to meet their deadline. Summer was passing them by quickly, and if they were too slow in starting their voyage, they would arrive at the pole in the middle of winter, which would make the already dangerous mission nearly impossible. It was a close thing, but they barely finished their work within the window of opportunity.

They gathered at the docks in Praxos, having said their farewells to the Imperial Family in Noxolt that morning. They spent a few moments regarding their heavily modified ship. The squat, ironclad vessel sat low in the water, its wedge-shaped ram making it look very front-heavy. The mast had been pulled down; the ship would need to be rowed out of harbor anyway, and the first mate wanted the crew to practice assembling and dismantling the mast a few times while they were relatively close to port.

“Damn, that’s an ugly ship,” Lanara said.

“At least you can tell it apart from all the others,” Arrie offered.

“Ugly or not, that’s our home for the next six months,” Kyle said. “Shall we?”

The party began to move toward the gangplank. “Wait!” Maddie said suddenly, and she ran off down the docks into the city.

“Where’s she off to?” Razael cursed, and followed after her.

The party waited around for a little while, until Maddie came back, Razael still behind her. She held a large bottle of wine in one hand.

“We haven’t given the ship a name yet,” she said. “She needs a name. It’s bad luck to sail without one.”

“It’s bad luck to be on a boat, period,” Lanara said quietly to herself.

Maddie handed the wine bottle to Kyle. “Since he’s captain, I say he gets the honors.”

Kyle looked at the bottle. “Well, one idea comes to mind, but you won’t like it.”

“How do you know until you tell us?” Arrie said.

Kyle told them his idea. The party looked at each other for a moment, and then each of them nodded their approval. Kyle grinned. “Okay, then, I hereby christen this ship… the Armadillo.”

Kyle smashed the bottle on the hull. Several sailors who’d been standing near the railing cheered.

“Okay, folks,” Arrie said. “Let’s go.”

With that, the party boarded their ship, and prepared to meet their destiny.
 

Delemental

First Post
Slow Boat

Destiny, as it turned out, took a long time to get out of the harbor.

Their iron-shod ship was heavy and cumbersome, and the entire crew had to man the oars to get it moving. The fact that a ship of the Armadillo’s size wasn’t built to accommodate oars didn’t help, as the angle of the oars wasn’t optimal. In their favor was the fact that few other ships wanted to get in the way of their metal monstrosity, and the party was given right-of-way.

Two hours later, they were out in open water, and the crew was starting to raise the main mast and tie up the rigging. By noon, they were under sail and heading south along the Tlaxan coast.

“Never, ever make me do that again, Kyle,” Lanara said, rubbing her aching shoulders. “It’s a good thing I thought ahead and brought a masseur.”

The voyage settled into routine quickly. With a full crew, the party had little they had to do to help sail. Even Kyle was free from spending a great deal of his time being captain, though he had to spend it making magic and alchemical items instead, as well as absorbing the information from Andariel’s book.

“It’s a biography,” Kyle told the party one night, after he’d finished reading the book through thoroughly. “It’s about the spirit dragon Auxariel.”

“Spirit dragon?” Razael asked.

“It’s how they describe white dragons sometimes,” Kyle explained. “See, it turns out that the reason scholars can’t agree on what it is dragons are supposed to be doing in the world is that they have lots of different jobs. White dragons are in charge of regulating the flow of negative energy back to Erito so that she can continue to create magic.”

“I take it this Auxariel isn’t doing such a great job,” Osborn commented.

“No. Apparently he’s been purposely hoarding the energy for about the last century. Whoever wrote the book thinks that Auxariel was adapted by Erito to the cold because he’s supposed to be regulating the death cycle for arctic creatures.”

“So, why should we care?” Razael said.

“We should care because without negative energy flowing back to Erito, magic will decline, and the entire life and death cycle could be thrown out of whack,” Kyle explained.

“Right now?” Razael asked.

“No, not right now,” Kyle said. “But eventually yes.”

“So, again, why should we care? It’s not going to affect us.”

“Because we can stop it before it gets to that point,” Autumn said sternly.

“Well, if you still think you can kill a dragon, that’s your own bit of craziness to deal with,” Razael stated.

“If you’d like, we can put in at the next port,” Kyle said, “and we’ll send you on your way.”

“Not while she’s here, no,” Razael said, hooking a thumb over his shoulder to Maddie.

“Then stop griping about it,” Autumn said. “If we can find a way to stop this dragon without fighting it, we will. But we have to get there first.”

Three and a half weeks after setting sail, the Armadillo caught the last glimpse of the continent, marking the farthest any of them (save Xu) had ever been from home. Maddie marked the occasion by announcing a special dinner for the party.

“Maddie, we appreciate the thought,” Kyle said, “but the supplies are pretty tight. And, to be quite honest, you’ve never been the best cook.”

“Well, none of us are, really,” Arrie pointed out.

Maddie smiled. “I’m not the one doing the cooking tonight.” Maddie unfolded a fine-looking white tablecloth, and unfurled it on the long table in the captain’s cabin. The instant the cloth settled on the surface, a large quantity of food appeared.

“It’s not exactly gourmet,” Maddie explained, “but it beats sea rations.”

“Where did you get this?” Kyle asked.

“I made it. You’re not the only one who knows how, you know. I bought a few scrolls of create food and water to make it with while you were getting the ship ready. It only works once a day, but I figured that will get us by when we leave the ship and head out over the ice.”

“Wow, great thinking, Maddie!” Arrie said.

“Yeah, wonderful!” agreed Autumn.

“No bacon?” asked Osborn.

After three more days, the ship turned to head southwest. Directly below Affon was the Great Southern Reef, which they would have to go around to avoid running around on the coral. Though it added weeks to their travel time, it was unavoidable; no one had charted the reef, and so a direct route was out of the question.

Another week passed before anything else happened. The lookout called down to the first mate, a grizzled human named Parkes who was missing his left ear.

“Ship ahoy! Seventy degrees to port!”

The crew moved to look for the ship, with some climbing into the rigging, including Razael. The rest of the party waited on deck.

“What’s a ship doing this far out here?” Osborn asked.

“I don’t know,” Arrie said, “but it’s usually not for good reasons.”

“She’s bearing this way, sir,” the lookout called down. “Gaining fast.”

“There’s a huge surprise,” Lanara said.

“Has anyone see their colors?” Kyle asked.

“Nay, captain,” Parkes said, “she’s too far out yet. Could be one of the elves will spot them afore long.”

“This is why I wanted a ballista,” Razael grumbled. A few moments later, as the ship came into view to the rest of the crew, he squinted and shouted out to the crew. “She’s flying a black flag. White skull, with two crossed kukri’s behind it.”

A fearful murmur began to ripple through the crew, and Parkes quickly went to work getting them back in line. “That’s not good,” Lanara said.

“Please, explain before my crew starts jumping overboard,” Kyle said.

“Those are the colors of the pirate captain Starke. He sails the Youth’s Vengeance. He’s well known in these waters. He’s known for being a decent fellow, as pirates go, as long as you’re not flying a Medosian flag. Those ships he leaves with no survivors. The big concern is his crew. They say he used to have a human crew, but not any more.”

“Who’s his crew now?” Osborn asked.

“The stories vary. Some say celestials, other demons. There are stories of the undead, of shapeshifters, of half-humans, and other fantastical beasts.”

“Well, we’re not going to outrun him or avoid him in this tub,” Arrie said.

“He’s sailing out of the Southern Reef,” Kyle observed. “I wonder how he did that?”

“I say that we should just make a show of looking competent,” Arrie said, “and hope they decide we’re not worth it.”

“This is why I wanted a ballista,” Razael repeated, this time out loud.

They continued on course as the other ship approached, pausing occasionally to get another ‘pep talk’ from Parkes or to check on their preparedness. Maddie went below, and returned a few minutes later. Osborn used his ring and turned invisible. The other ship came up behind the Armadillo, crossing through her wake and up along side. As it approached to within hailing distance, they all saw the name painted on the vessel’s bow; Youth’s Vengeance.

Their attention did not stay on the ship’s bow for long, as they got a good look at the crew. They noted that the helm appeared unmanned, though there were sailors manning the rigging. A blue-skinned ogre mage was on deck, as was a large, gruff-looking minotaur. Looking up at their main mast, Razael saw a flash of orange fur. He removed his goggles, rubbed his eyes, and looked again.

“Well, I’ll be,” he said. “I haven’t seen one of those in forever.”

“What?” Lanara asked.

“It’s an orangutan.”

“You’ve actually seen one before?”

“In five hundred years, you see a lot of things.” Razael strung his bow, and placed a pair of arrows on the string.

As the Youth’s Vengeance came up on the Armadillo from the starboard side (putting the reef to port, Kyle observed), a handsome, well-dressed man leaned out from the rigging, apparently supported only his feet. There could be no doubt that this was Captain Starke.

“Ahoy!” Kyle shouted.

“Ah, good day, sir!” Captain Starke shouted back. “And welcome to my waters!”

“Your waters?” Lanara asked.

“Why, yes.”

“So, to what do we owe the pleasure?” Arrie asked.

“Well, I do like to know who’s traveling through my waters, of course.”

Lanara cast a quick glibness spell, and was ready to feed Captain Starke a line about their purpose so far south. But as she started to open her mouth, Captain Starke interrupted.

“No, no, dear,” he said, waggling a finger at her like he would a child, “No fair. I know that trick, I’m afraid.”

Lanara shrugged. “You can’t blame a girl for trying, right?”

“I suppose not. So,” Captain Starke said, clapping his hands together gleefully, “who are you, and what are you doing here?”

“We’re travelers, and we’re going south,” Lanara said.

“Actually, you’re heading southwest right now,” Captain Starke observed. “You’re not very good travelers, are you?”

“Reefs are not our favorite method of stopping a boat,” Arrie said. “It’s effective, but not if you want the boat back.”

“That I can understand. Still, it doesn’t really answer either of my questions, does it?”

“We’re on a exploration mission to the south pole,” Kyle said quickly. “You know, look at ice.”

“Oh, how terribly exciting,” Captain Starke said.

“Well, no, not really.”

“No, not really at all. Well, sir, in exchange for safe passage through my waters, my crew and I do require a few trifling items from you; things like food, and water, and perhaps some of your handsome young men.” The captain’s brow arched as he spoke.

“Yeah, my ass,” Razael grumbled. Lanara elbowed the tracker and glared at him.

“Well, captain,” Kyle explained, “I’m afraid that due to the size of our ship, we’ve barely been able to stock enough provisions to make the voyage to the pole and back.”

“In other words, :):):):) off,” Razael muttered again, this time drawing dark looks from both Lanara and Arrie.

“Perhaps we could make other arrangements here,” Kyle offered, “or if safe passage is a problem, then you could inform us of the extent of your waters and we’ll simply sail around and no longer intrude on your territory.”

“Well, perhaps an arrangement can be made,” Captain Starke said. “But tell me, oh handsome young man, who am I dealing with?”

“My name’s Kyle Goodson.” Kyle said. Behind him, Razael muttered another ‘quiet’ epithet, which drew stares from Autumn and Arrie and a backhand slap on the arm from Lanara.

“Did you say Kyle Goodson?” Captain Starke asked.

“Yes,” Kyle said, suddenly very nervous. After all, the last people who’d known him specifically were the Scion-Watchers, who had wanted to kill him.

“Ye gods, man, you’re famous! Don’t you know that? You’re part of The Legacy!”

The party looked at each other in confusion. The Legacy?

Captain Starke was very excited by this time. “Are all of you aboard? Ariadne, and Madrone, and Autumn? Tolly and Lanara… you know, The Legacy!”

“Well,” Kyle said cautiously, “Tolly’s not with us anymore. He’s moved on to other things.”

“Damn,” Starke swore, “I never get to defrock the priests.” The look of disappointment vanished from his face, and he addressed Kyle again, sweeping his large hat off his head in a brand bow. “Say no more. Allow me to offer my sincerest apologies. May I come aboard as a friend?”

Razael pulled the arrows in his bow back farther in response, but Arrie gently lowered his aim. Kyle waved Captain Starke over. One of Starke’s crew tossed him a grapple and line, which the captain then tossed into the Armadillo’s rigging. He swung over, and landed on the deck with a flourish of his cloak.

“Thank you, thank you ever so much,” Captain Starke said, enthusiastically running up and shaking Kyle’s hand. “I do apologize again. Had I known who you were I never would have tried to rob you or swindle you.” He moved around to each of the party, grasping their hands and greeting them warmly. He seemed genuinely thrilled to meet each and every one of them. He even offered a cordial tip of his hat to Razael, who was still standing with an arrow strung on his bow.

“Forgive my rather abrupt demands earlier,” Captain Starke said, “however, the reason I made them is that my crew is in fact running low on food and water.”

“Have you ever tried just purchasing supplies?” Lanara asked.

“Well, we wouldn’t be very good pirates if we did that, now would we?” he replied with a smile.

“I thought pirates were after loot,” Lanara said.

“Booty,” Starke corrected, “the word is booty for us.” To emphasize his point, Captain Starke suddenly reached out and grabbed the nearest behind, which turned out to be Kyle’s. “Booty.”

“Yes, I’m familiar with the word,” Lanara said, “and its many meanings.”

“You know,” Razael said, “if we shot him, then his crew would have food for at least a day or two.”

“But we’re not going to do that,” Arrie said to him quietly.

“Well, I appreciate your honesty and sympathize with your plight, Captain Starke,” Kyle said, “but what I said before is true. Our ship only barely holds enough to get us where we’re going and back.”

Maddie cleared her throat to get Kyle’s attention. When he looked over, she pulled a corner of her new magical tablecloth out of her pack, reminding him that they did in fact have extra food.

“Oh!” Kyle said, “I’d forgotten!” He turned back to Captain Starke. “Actually, we might be able to provide you with a small amount of food after all. Not enough for all your crew, I’m afraid.”

“Well, some of my crew can fend… a moment, if you please?” Captain Starke leaned over the railing between the two ships. “Edgar!” he shouted, “have you found anything yet?”

There was a splashing noise below, then the sound of something climbing up the metal hull. Flopping over the rail came a very large, very wet otter, roughly as long as a human was tall. Razael immediately spun his aim toward the new creature, though again Lanara discouraged an immediate attack. The otter chattered at Captain Starke.

“Ah, good, he found a little something after all,” the captain said.

“Great Feesha, where did you find that?” Lanara asked.

“Oh, he found me.”

“You have quite an interesting crew,” Kyle commented.

“Yes, I do, don’t I?” Starke grinned.

“Is that really an orangutan?” Lanara asked, pointing.

“Oh, up there in the nest? Yes, that’s Sebastian. His brother Harold takes the night shift.”

“Wow.” Lanara turned to Razael. “Hey, Raz, they’ve got two orangutans!”

“I have enough arrows,” the elf muttered.

“You’ll have to forgive Raz,” Lanara said to Captain Starke, “we traded Tolly in for him, but not by choice.”

“I see.” Starke turned back to Kyle. “So, you say you’re heading for the southern pole, correct? Well, as you might imagine, I have much better maps of the reef than you. In exchange for the food you can provide, I would be willing to guide you through. It would shave significant time off your voyage.”

Kyle nodded thoughtfully. “It’s an interesting offer. If you’ll give me a moment to confer with my friends and officers?”

“Of course,” Captain Starke said, bowing, “I will withdraw to my own ship.” He reached up and grasped the rope he’d used to swing over, and made the return trip effortlessly.

“So,” Kyle said as the party gathered together on deck. “So how bad does this reek of an ambush?”

Razael held his hand up to about nose level.

“Actually,” Lanara said, “I think he’s being honest. He talks like someone who’s used to laying it on pretty thick all the time. It’s almost like he’s so used to lying that when he does tell the truth it still sounds like a tale, but less polished.”

“He’s an ass, and deserves to be shot,” Razael said.

“Sometimes, so do you,” Lanara retorted.

Razael shrugged. “Good point.”

“So, what’s his reputation?” Kyle asked.

“He keeps his word,” Lanara said. “If he says he’s not going to kill, he tries his hardest not to kill. I’d describe him as ‘famous’ rather than ‘infamous’.”

“That’s not to say he won’t try to squeeze as much opportunity out of a situation as he can,” Arrie commented.

“And if you’re a Medosian ship, all bets are off,” Lanara added.

“Why is that?” Kyle asked.

Lanara shrugged. “Probably best we not ask, in case it’s a sore spot.”

“I wouldn’t trust him any father than I could shoot him,” Razael said.

“You can shoot a long way,” Maddie said, “so you trust him a long way?”

“No, I trust him as long as he’s in bow range.”

“You make no sense,” Maddie complained.

“Well, let’s look at the situation here,” Kyle said. “If he wanted to ambush us, we’d be ambushed already. We can’t outrun him or outsail him in this ship. He could have brought in several ships and attacked on the open ocean.”

“But if he wants the ship,” Razael said, “the best thing would be to drag us onto a reef and immobilize us.”

Kyle shook his head. “That makes no sense. This ship is a pig in water. A pirate wouldn’t be caught dead in the Armadillo. They want fast, maneuverable ships, not armored barges.”

“Could we just make them a tablecloth of their own?” Lanara asked Maddie.

“No,” the favored soul replied. “I don’t actually know the spell you need to make it. I had to buy scrolls to make the one we have.”

“What if we gave him something to buy food with?” Lanara offered. “I have that set of goblets somewhere in my bag still.”

“I doubt he’d accept,” Arrie said, “he needs food now, and the nearest port is weeks away.”

“Besides,” Kyle said, “we’ve already established that we’re on an exploration mission, and we haven’t got anything to spare. Suddenly, we’re dragging out valuables? He might start getting suspicious of us.”

“Just an idea,” Lanara said.

“I could just start shooting,” Razael offered.

“But we have no reason to,” Kyle said, suppressing a sigh of frustration. The tracker’s apparent complete lack of altruism or trust was becoming tiresome.

“So, the simple choice is this,” Kyle continued. “We could say no now, and sail away. If Captain Starke wants to get us, he’ll get us later. We can’t avoid that. If we take his offer, then maybe he does something sneaky. But we can be ready for it, and if they’re leading us through then they have to be ahead of us, which tactically is our advantage.”

“And this ship should be able to take running aground on coral better than most,” Autumn pointed out.

“We have to deal with him one way or another,” Arrie pointed out, “and I’d rather do it on friendly terms.”

“You know, he kind of seemed in awe of us,” Maddie said.

“Yeah, I want to know more about what he called us,” Arrie said, “The Legacy, was it?”

“Why?” Razael asked.

“Because some of us enjoy the company of others, and have curiosities,” Arrie replied.

“So, let’s take him up on his offer, then,” Kyle said. Stepping out of the circle, Kyle hailed the Youth’s Vengeance. “Ahoy, captain!”

“Yes?” Captain Starke called back.

“We accept your offer,” Kyle said, “guide us through the reefs, and we’ll share what provisions we can.”

“Most excellent!” Captain Starke turned to his own crew. “Eddie! Freddie! Come about!”

At the helm, two dire weasels suddenly rose up from the deck, each of them taking one side of the wheel and starting to turn away from the Armadillo as the rest of crew began to put their ship to sail.

“All right, then,” Kyle said. “Parkes! Set sail and follow that ship!”



* * *



The Youth’s Vengeance and the Armadillo sailed through the Great Southern Reef for the next two weeks, winding through sometimes narrow corridors between coral banks. During that time, the party was invited onto Captain Starke’s ship several times, and vice versa. Only Razael declined the offers of dining with the famous pirate captain and his equally famous crew.

The party met the crew, which consisted of a handful of humans and a variety of strange beings and awakened animals – the latter were on board thanks to a pair of merfolk druids in Starke’s crew. There was Nhura, the water naga that helped control the weather for the ship, who spent much of her time swimming alongside the Youth’s Vengeance. The minotaur Andrios stated that he was originally from the Tauric Kingdoms, a far away land where the ruling class was comprised of those beings with a mix of animal and humanoid traits. When asked about his own history, however, Andrios would only say that he was a criminal in his homeland, and discouraged further questions by glaring. The ogre mage introduced himself as Ulao.

Some of Starke’s crew were beings that no one in the party had ever seen, that the captain explained were from lands closer to the Tauric Kingdoms that to Affon. There was a humanoid with large feathered wings and bird-like features named Kiar, who referred to himself as a raptoran. A pair of humanoids, two huge men with rough, dark skin and bony protrusions all over, were introduced by the other crew as Click and Clack; the pair were unable to introduce themselves, as their tongues had been cut out some time before joining Starke’s crew. No one aboard knew the name of their race. They also saw, though they never formally met, ‘Hank the Tank’, a being that looked like a bear with hands and armor that one of the crew described as an ‘urskan’. It quickly became apparent how the legends of Starke’s crew came to be.

The party also found out why Captain Starke had referred to them as ‘The Legacy’. Tales of the party’s adventures had been slowly spreading throughout Affon, stories being shared by those they had helped over the past year. The group had never chosen to name themselves; it seemed that “The Legacy” was the name that had been given to them by the storytellers.

By the time they reached the southern edge of the reef, the temperature was noticeably colder, though not the bitter cold the party had prepared for. The two ships pulled alongside each other and dropped anchor while the crew of the Youth’s Vengeance began transferring food and water over.

“Oy, captain!” Sebastian called down from the crow’s nest to Captain Starke, who was on the deck saying his farewells to The Legacy, “there’s another ship heading this way!”

Starke and the party walked over to the railing. “Another ship? All the way out here?” the captain said.

The other ship soon came into view. Razael, who was coaxed aboard Starke’s ship when he was told of the new vessel approaching, described the ship as it drew near.

“It’s a bit smaller than ours, I’d reckon,” he said. “Look’s like she’s sitting pretty shallow in the water.”

“She’s built for speed, not cargo,” Captain Starke said, looking at the other ship through a spyglass. “She’s come from somewhere near here. There’s people aboard – I see five, maybe ten on deck.”

“She’s not flying any colors,” Razael said. “And it looks strange to me. The ship’s not right, but I can’t say what it is.”

“The shape of the hull’s wrong,” Starke said, “and the rigging’s not set like I’d expect for its speed.”

As they studied the strange ship, they all heard a message – inside their heads.

Surrender the Mind-Killers, and you will go free. Fail, and there will be no survivors.

Captain Starke looked around at his crew, confused at both the message and the method of delivery. The party, however, had a pretty good idea what was going on.

“They’re after us,” Kyle explained. “We’re the Mind-Killers.”

“I see,” said Captain Starke, “I must say I rather prefer The Legacy.”

“Well,” Kyle said, turning to the party, “shall we respond?”

“Most definitely,” Arrie said. “Captain Starke, those people want to pick a fight with us. If you wish to participate, you may.”

“We will discuss it,” Captain Starke said.

The Legacy returned to the Armadillo. “So,” Lanara said, “are we sailing over there to meet them? Are we going to ram them?”

“No,” Kyle said, “I see no reason to risk the lives of my men. We can take the fight to them.”

“How so?” Arrie asked.

Kyle cast a spell, and suddenly everyone in the party was buoyed by the power of flight. “We go over there and give them our answer.”

“Kyle, you’re the best brother in law ever,” Arrie said, grinning.

After casting a second fly spell on Razael to allow him to separate from the group if he wanted, Kyle began flying toward the strange ship, the others spreading out around him. The ship was still several hundred yards away. As they gained altitude, they saw what had made the ship look so odd. There were several crystal protrusions all along the hull, which seemed to glow slightly. There were a few people on the deck, as Captain Starke had said, but none of them seemed to be manning the ship itself. They could also see five figures being towed behind the ship by ropes, skimming along the surface of the water. The five people were very large, and wearing full plate armor.

“Are those some of them rocky people, like Click and Clack?” Razael shouted up to Kyle.

He shook his head. “Half-giants. I’ll explain later. Just don’t get close enough to let them hit you.”

“Not a problem there,” Razael said, loading his bow.

The party closed with the ship. The psions made the first move, launching balls of energy onto the air and blasting the party with electricity. Singed but alive, Kyle quickly cast a spell to protect the party from further electrical attacks. The psions responded with blasts of fire and cold. Lanara tried to respond with a fireball from her wand, and after a few fizzled attempts a moderate-sized fireball blossomed on the deck. Kyle also cast a spell, channeling it through his metamagic rod to create a much larger explosion.

“Showoff,” Lanara said.

The psions switched to defense. A bank of fog rose up in front of the party, and a wind gusted behind them, pushing them into the cloud. Strange tentacles made of solid cloudstuff battered those who were unable to fly out of the way. Maddie had to fly back and forth among the party, using her healing wand to repair injuries to herself and other members of her party.

Finally, they came within a few hundred feet of the psionic ship, and started descending rapidly. Lanara cast a spell with the aid of a new magical mandolin she’d picked up, accompanied by her inspiring music. Several of the people on deck had gone below, apparently tired of being hit with fireballs. The half-giants had pulled themselves in, and were climbing onto the deck. Razael, who had been firing a few test arrows at the crystal protrusions to see how fragile they were, aimed at the armored foes on deck. Kyle cast another spell, and summoned a defenestrating sphere, though he found that the half-giants were too massive to be flung overboard by the ball of wind. Xu, who was toward the front of their formation, pushed her speed and leapt onto the deck, delivering a flying kick to one of the half-giants.

From the stairs at the rear of the ship, two robed figures emerged. One of them pointed, and Arrie was suddenly hit with a blast of frigid air, sending her flying backward. The other one sent out another ball of cold into the party members still flying up to the ship. The half-giants closed around Xu, even as Lanara blasted a few of them with a sound burst.

“Kyle!” Arrie shouted, “what happens if I get out of range?” The wizard had warned them on the way over that the mass fly spell would end for anyone who got farther than ten yards from another person.

You’ll fall!” Kyle warned, as he finished casting a haste spell, “but slowly at first!”

“Fabulous,” Arrie said, and she immediately flew as fast as she could toward the rear of the ship. She felt the magic keeping her aloft fail, but it dwindled slowly, and her momentum carried her over the railing and onto the deck. She whipped her spiked chain out and pulled one of the psions off his feet. Razael put a few arrows into the other psion, which seemed to have trouble penetrating his skin, although the psion winced at the sting of both cold and fire energy. Xu tumbled out of the cluster of armored half-giants, aided by the fact that she could still fly, and ran to the back of the ship to assist Arrie in assailing the psions. But suddenly, there was a shimmer in the air, and a cluster of daggers flew at each of the psions, killing them outright. The now visible Osborn, floating in midair, smiled and waved.

Kyle, seeing an opportunity as the half-giants that had been attacking Xu were looking for new targets, swooped down directly in their midst and released a blast of force that pushed them all back. Unfortunately, the blast was not quite strong enough to push any of them overboard, though it was a close thing. As he flew up and out of the range of the half-giant’s claws, he was smacked in the back of the head by Autumn.

“What happened to ‘don’t get close enough to let them hit you’?” she said, before flying down to attack the half-giants herself. Maddie also flew down to attack them, and even Lanara lent a direct hand, jabbing at one with her rapier.

A battle cry echoed out from the hold, and a half-dozen people came up, each with a pair of energy blades in their hands. They tumbled and leapt about, surrounding Arrie and Xu.

“Soulknives!” cried out Kyle from his aerial vantage point, recognizing the blades the men wielded. Maddie broke away from her combat with the half giants and dropped a sound burst into their midst. The close confines of the ship’s deck meant that the soulknives were packed closely together, and several succumbed to the sonic blast. Xu’s quick strikes rendered two more senseless, and then she and Arrie began using the same tactic that had served them so well against the two psions, knocking them off their feet to keep their enemies from mounting an effective offense.

Razael, high above the ship, was still raining arrows down on the half giants closest to Maddie when a movement on the water caught his eye. Looking down, he saw two merfolk climb out of the water and up the side of the psion’s ship. The pair leapt over the railing into the midst of the soulknives, transforming into large wolves as they landed. The two wolves began savagely tearing into one of the psionic warriors. Glancing over his shoulder, Razael saw that the Youth’s Vengeance was approaching rapidly, and several of her crew stood ready with grapples.

By the time Captain Starke’s crew boarded the other ship, however, the battle was mostly over. Over half the soulknives had been killed, and only two half giants remained, one of whom was now missing his armor due to a metal melt spell from Kyle. The party did get to witness some of the unusual combat maneuvers of the famous pirate crew, such as when Andrios grabbed Nhura by the tail and flung her over to the other ship, where she wrapped herself around one of the soulknives and began savaging him.

“Well, well,” said Captain Starke, swinging over to the ship as the last opponents fell. “It seems that your reputations are well deserved.” He glanced around the ship. “I say, this is rather an unusual ship, isn’t it? What purpose do those crystals serve, I wonder?”

“It, er… is some kind of magic, I’m sure,” Kyle said, not wanting to get too involved in explaining psionics.

Starke raised an eyebrow. “I’m sure. Well, what do you plan to do with her?”

“Captain, perhaps I could suggest something?” Arrie said. Both Kyle and Starke turned to her.

“We obviously can’t take this ship with us on our expedition; we can’t spare the crew, and even if we tow it, the ship would probably be smashed on the ice. What if we allowed Captain Starke to take possession of it for now? Even if those crystals can’t be made to work for them, the ship itself might suit his needs. On our return trip, we could meet up with Captain Starke again to discuss either reclaiming the ship or being compensated for it.”

“That sounds fine to me,” Kyle said, “if you’re agreeable.”

“Oh, most certainly,” Captain Starke said, clasping Kyle’s hand to seal the bargain – though he held Kyle’s grasp perhaps a bit longer than was necessary.

“Captain!” shouted Sebastian, “one of these large fellows is still breathing!”

“Well, correct the problem, then,” Starke said casually.

“Wait!” said Autumn, “we need information! We have no idea who sent this ship after us, or if they know why we’re out here.”

“She’s right,” Kyle said. “Captain, have your men bring the living one over to the Armadillo. After we’ve questioned him, we’ll get you the rest of the supplies I promised.”

“A fair arrangement,” Captain Starke said. “Very well.”

The members of The Legacy watched as the limp body of the half-giant was carried on board by Click and Clack. All of them had the same thought; now was a poor time for interference from the psions. But was that interference intentional? Did the psions somehow know why they were here?

Either way, the message to The Legacy was clear; their enemies were no longer content to sit back and wait.
 

Delemental

First Post
Frozen Heart

“Kyle, can I talk to you for a minute?”

Kyle looked up from the sea charts he was studying. They had taken careful notes while crossing through the Great Southern Reef, led by the famous pirate Captain Starke, and hoped to use the same passage on the way home, as it had shaved nearly two weeks off their travel time.

“Sure, Raz, come on in.”

The tracker came into the cabin and shut the door. “We done interrogating that half-giant yet?”

“Arrie and Xu are in with him now. I don’t think it’ll be too much longer, why?”

“We’ll be killing him, right?”

Kyle sighed. “Yes, we will. As much as I hate the idea, there’s no way we can keep him contained. Even if we could, what would we do with him?”

Razael scratched at the side of his head. “Well, if you could just hold off on cutting his throat for a bit, I’ve made an arrangement for disposing of the body that’ll help out one of Starke’s crew.”

“I’m surprised to hear you wanting to help out Starke’s crew, considering you’ve spent the last two weeks just a hair shy of shooting them.”

“I guess I have to admit that they didn’t cross us like I expected,” Razael admitted, “and besides, this is sort of a mutual benefit arrangement between myself and Nhura.”

“Nhura? The naga? What’s she have to do with this?”

“She wants the half-giant for herself. She says someone his size will keep her from being hungry for weeks.”

Kyle turned pale. “You… offered to let Nhura eat the half-giant?”

Razael shrugged again. “Throwing him in the ocean’s a waste of good meat.”

Kyle buried his face in his hands, shaking his head slowly. “Please, please tell me that it’ll at least be a quick death.”

“That was my understanding,” Razael said, “she said that a fresh kill was best.”

“And do I want to know what she’s giving you in exchange?”

“Probably not, I’d wager.”

Kyle uncovered his face and leaned back in his chair. “I’m going to end up in the Shadow Plane for this,” he said to himself. “Why come to me? Why not just talk to Arrie?”

“Well, you are the captain,” Razael said, “and since you seem to be intent on being the moral watchdog for this group…” He left out the part about secretly enjoying watching the wizard squirm.

“The only reason I’m agreeing to this is that we were going to kill him anyway, and it will help out Starke,” Kyle said. “I’ll tell Arrie to turn him over to you when they’re done.”

As Razael turned to leave, Kyle spoke again. “You know, I’d kind of hoped you being with Lanara now would have given you a better perspective on your fellow humanoids.”

“Takes more’n a few days of sex to reverse five hundred years of experience,” Razael said. “But I didn’t know you knew about the two of us.”

“Raz, everyone knows,” Kyle said. “If I’d had an inkling that the two of you were going to be so… boisterous, I’d have iron-plated the interior walls too.”

“You’re one to talk,” Razael said.

“Out,” Kyle scowled.



* * *



The half-giant, who identified himself as ‘Wave-Dancer’, held little information. This was somewhat expected; the party would have preferred interrogating one of the psions, or a soulknife, but they decided that it was too dangerous to let any of them regain consciousness. Wave-Dancer had revealed that they had been sent by none other than Xerxes to eliminate the ‘Mind-Killers’. They learned that they had been located by psions known as ‘seers’, and that the two psions that had been in command were ‘kineticists’ and they were the ones propelling the ship. As far as they could tell, Xerxes did not know why the party was so far south.

After delivering the last of the supplies to the Youth’s Vengeance (including a very large, lumpy bundle carried straight to Nhura’s quarters), the party and crew of the Armadillo bare farewell to Captain Starke, and continued their voyage south.

Two days later, there was another knock at Kyle’s cabin door. Arrie opened in and poked her head in. “Are you all finished in here?” she asked.

“Just wrapping up,” Maddie said, taking off her headband and rubbing her temples. The rest of the party sat around the room, surrounding the favored soul. Kyle was at the desk, writing.

“Great.” Arrie came in and sat down. “So, what did Erito have to say?”

“Well, if you’d been here in the first place, you’d already know,” Autumn chided.

“It’s all right, Autumn,” Kyle said, “no harm done. It’s not like she has to be sitting here for the commune to work.” Kyle handed Arrie a sheet of parchment. As she took the paper from him, they exchanged a knowing look.

Arrie scanned the contents of the parchment. Kyle had written down the questions they had posed during the commune, and the answers they received. The first nine questions she had already seen; they were asked last month, when Maddie had last used her headband of communion.



1. Is the information in the book given to us by the dragon Andariel in regard to the dragon Auxariel hoarding negative energy accurate? YES

2. If Auxariel continues his current activities, will the consequences result in harm to living beings elsewhere in the world? YES

3. Does Erito want Auxariel to be destroyed? YES AND NO

4. Can Auxariel be stopped from continuing his current activities through means other than destroying him? YES

5. Are there psionicists aiding Auxariel in any way? NO

6. Is Auxariel’s lair at or very near the location shown on the map on Madrone’s back? YES

7. Will the information found at this location reveal what truly happened during the Cataclysm? YES AND NO

8. Will the information found at this location reveal the meaning of the term ‘Scion’? UNCLEAR

9. Will the information found at this location aid us in defeating psionicists or foiling their plans? UNKNOWN



1. Is Auxariel using a device or object to hoard negative energy? NO

2. If this device is destroyed, will it stop Auxariel without unduly harming people, other than the members of The Legacy?

2. Is the oathbond dagger of Bail that was stolen by Marrek somehow important to their plans? UNCLEAR

3.Would Erito prefer that The Legacy deals with Auxariel without destroying him? YES

4. Is the group known as the Scion-Watchers attempting to keep Autumn’s bloodline pure? NO

5. Will the information found at the location shown on Madrone’s back reveal facts about Kyle’s ancestry? YES

6. Does Erito intend for The Legacy to remove any physical objects from this location? NO

7. Is Auxariel currently aware that The Legacy is coming? NO

8. Is there information at the location shown on Madrone’s back about psionics in general? YES

9. Have any members of Kyle’s immediate family been ‘purified’ by the Scion-Watchers? NO

Arrie handed the parchment back to Kyle. “I told you the Scion-Watchers were after your family, Kyle,” she said.

“I know, I know,” Kyle said sadly. “I was grasping at straws. When Lanara suggested that it was Autumn’s bloodline that they were trying to keep pure, not mine, well…”

Arrie put a reassuring hand on Kyle’s shoulder. “Well, at least you know they haven’t found anyone else in your family.”

“For now. But it’ll be three months before we’re back in Affon, and who knows how long after that before I find them myself.”

Arrie let Autumn take her place by Kyle’s side, then picked up the parchment again. “So, we’re supposed to try not to kill Auxariel, I see.”

“Yeah,” Razael drawled, “and I’d like to know exactly how we’re supposed to fix this problem without killing the dragon.”

“We don’t know,” said Autumn. “Maybe something will present itself when we get there. I say we do our best to solve this diplomatically, but if that fails we’ll have no choice but to try and destroy him.”

Maddie looked up at Razael. “At least you’re not still saying that this is all a conspiracy to get us to do the dirty work for the other dragons,” she said.

“I’m still not convinced it isn’t,” he replied, “but Erito seems to want the same thing, and the Goddess is one of the few people that has never steered me wrong, even if I don’t always know where she’s headed. Why else do you think I’m here watching your butt?”

“Well, at least we won’t have to drag you into this kicking and screaming,” Maddie said. “For me, although I doubt we’ll be able to end this problem without violence, I will do my Goddesses’ will. I won’t try and kill Auxariel if we can help it.”

“How long before we get there?” Osborne asked.

“We’ve got another two weeks of sailing before we reach the edge of the ice,” Kyle said. “From there I’m guessing at least two or three weeks on foot to get to the actual pole.”

“Well, super,” Lanara said, standing up. “That’s two more weeks with my cabin boy.”

“And your masseur, too,” Osborn observed, holding back a smile and glancing at Razael.

“Yeah,” Lanara winked, “him too.”



* * *



The Armadillo made icefall two weeks later, just as predicted. The ship carved through the thick ice easily, until they reached the point where they could go no further. The crew dropped grapples and pikes into the hard ice, and the party made their way down the ramp once the ship was secure. All of them, save Maddie, were heavily bundled. The favored soul wore close to her normal traveling clothes.

“Forget something, Maddie?” Arrie asked.

“Erito has graced me with an immunity to deadly cold,” Maddie explained. “I’m quite comfortable, actually.”

They set off due south, using Lanara’s wand of know direction to locate true north, then going in the opposite direction. The eight adventurers trudged along steadily through the snow, pausing occasionally to marvel at the continuous presence of the sun in the middle of the night, or to gaze upon the unearthly colors of the southern aurora. Within a few days, they came upon what could only be described as an ice desert; drifting snow and ice piled up into dunes like sand, and the air was bone-dry. They made their way across the desert, shuffling across the blowing snow with snowshoes.

A day or so into the ‘desert’ crossing, Razael and Osborn motioned for everyone to hold still and be quiet. In the distance, they both heard the sound of approaching footsteps carrying in the wind.

“Mix of biped and four-legged,” Razael hissed, “coming this way, but doesn’t sound like they’re hurrying this direction, either. I don’t think we’ve been spotted.”

“Quick,” Osborn said, “everyone lay down.”

The elf and the hin quickly threw snow over the top of the rest of their companions, burying them to hide their location. Then the two of them waited for whatever was coming to appear.

They didn’t have long to wait before two figures appeared over the top of an ice-dune. One was a tall frost giant carrying an enormous scythe, the other was a winter wolf. The giant slowed as he saw the two strangers, but continued their way. Neither Osborn nor Razael could read the giant’s intent, although the tracker could tell that the wolf was hungry, but would obey the giant.

The giant stopped a safe distance away and bellowed out a greeting in a language neither of them understood. When Osborn shrugged to indicate they didn’t understand, the giant switched to Common.

“Greetings, small ones,” he said. “What brings you so far out here?”

“Exploring,” Osborn said.

“Looking for anything in particular?”

“Just having a look around,” Razael said, “heard some rumors.”

The giant studied them for a moment. “Well, let me give you two pieces of advice for fellow travelers. First, you will want to avoid my clan.” The giant pointed with his scythe to the west. “They’re about two days that way as I walk, so I imagine it’d be three or four for you. My clan is unwelcoming of strangers.”

“Got it,” Osborn said, “and the second?”

“There’s a blizzard coming in about twelve hours,” he said. “I’d suggest you find some shelter. I can tell by the way your breath steams that you’re not accustomed to this climate.”

Razael glanced up at the clear sky, then nodded. “Much obliged.”

“Farewell, travelers,” the giant said, before walking off. The winter wolf whined at the smell of a meal, but followed his master anyway. Razael and Osborn walked off in the opposite direction, circling back after a few minutes to unbury their companions.

“About time,” Lanara complained, as snow fell out of her pink hair.

The party marched for another six hours before they found a suitable site to make camp. The first wispy clouds heralding the storm had appeared overhead as Lanara conjured a tiny hut to use as the foundation for a shelter. They spent the next few hours building and stacking blocks of hard-packed snow just inside the magical hemisphere, as the wind started to pick up and the temperature dropped. Two hours into construction, they saw a huge bank of clouds roll in off the horizon, seeming to head straight for them. With the first flurries starting to fall, the party entered the igloo and settled in. The temperature inside soon dropped to barely below freezing, which was still much higher than the air outside. With the use of one of Tiranel’s sure-burning logs, the interior quickly became as cozy as they could expect under the circumstances.

A few hours into the storm, as the fatigue from their travel began to set in and the party started to discuss sleeping arrangements (with Razael encouraging both Lanara and Maddie to stay close to him for warmth), Kyle suddenly cried out. Everyone turned and saw him sitting next to one of the walls, with a clawed, ghostly hand protruding from his chest.

“That’s not right,” he said, blood draining from his face.

The next few minutes were very harrowing, seeming to stretch into eternity. Autumn was also struck by a surprise attack through the walls of the igloo, the unnaturally cold touch of the undead sapping her vitality as it had Kyle’s. The creatures darted in and out of the shelter, seemingly unfazed by the raging blizzard, swiping at those too close to the edge. It would be several months later, after the party had returned to Affon, that they would learn that these beings were known as rimewraiths. For now, they were simply an enemy. The party quickly gathered in a defensive cluster near the center of their shelter, forcing their assailants to fully enter the chamber to strike. Fortunately, they had prepared well for just such an attack; Kyle had spent some of his time during the voyage south making flasks of ghost oil. With their weapons so enhanced, the party soon ended the menace of the undead.

But long after the battle was over, long after they had removed their armor and settled in under heavy blankets, Lanara remained awake, staring up at the white ceiling, listening to the wind howling outside. Something… odd had happened to her, when the rimewraiths attacked, something she wasn’t ready to share yet. When she’d begun playing her bardic music to help her friends in battle, she’d felt something stirring in her mind… no, in her soul. She could sense it was coming from the bardic instrument she was using, her Fuirmach Fiddle. Or, to be more precise, the Fuirmach Fiddle. Lanara had come to possess three of the fabled True Instruments, the legendary pieces created long ago by the masters of the long-vanished Bardic Colleges. Though copies of those magical instruments were not uncommon, it was a rarity for even a world-famous bard to ever find more than one. Lanara had often wondered what the effects might be of carrying three of them, as rumors had it that the True Instruments held their own spirit, an animus that gave true life to the music they created. She had felt some of that spirit today, urging her to keep playing, to keep the song alive. It had been difficult to put the instrument down, even after the last rimewraith had been felled.

It took the storm two days to blow over, which in one sense was fortunate, as it allowed Autumn and Kyle a chance to rest and recover their stolen strength. When they saw light filtering down through their roof once again, they punched their way up through it, as the igloo had been completely buried. After getting their bearings, the party continued south.

Thirteen days passed in the dull monotony of walking ever forward in a field of unending white. The days began to blur in their minds, until checking their progress with Lanara’s wand almost seemed a pointless exercise. But fortunately, they overcame their ennui enough to keep up the routine. Still when the day came when the wand simply spun around in a circle without settling on a single direction, it took them all a few moments to realize what it meant.

A search of the area around the south pole soon revealed an ice cavern nearby, the opening yawning into darkness. Kyle took a moment to cast spells on the party that granted everyone darkvision as well as extra protection from cold before the party descended into the cave. They chose to travel in darkness, relying on Kyle’s spell for vision, in the hopes of not alerting any denizens of the caverns. Occasionally they would spare a miniscule amount of light to consult the copies of the maps they’d made, both of Maddie’s back and of the surrounding area that had been discovered long ago by dwarven explorers. Soon there was no doubt that the areas matched.

The caverns descended rapidly, and within an hour of travel, the party noticed that they had gone from compacted ice to bedrock. They found nothing living in the caves, though once or twice they did stumble across a small cluster of mindless skeletons or zombies that were quickly dispatched.

After another hour and a half, they reached an area just outside where Maddie’s map revealed a massive cavern. There were no exits from the chamber beyond.

“That has to be it,” Kyle whispered.

“Auxariel’s lair,” Arrie said just as quietly. “So, now what?”

The party took a few moments to cast a few preparatory spells, just in case. Once they were done, they came back to Arrie’s question.

“Well,” Kyle said, “it’s safe to assume that Auxariel knows we’re here, right?” When everyone nodded, Kyle cast another spell, and suddenly the air around him was swarming with several magical ‘eyes’. Kyle began directing them into the cavern beyond, instructing some to fly along the left wall, some along the right, others up to the ceiling looking down, and so forth. The magical eyes darted off into the cavern, and a minute later returned, relaying what they’d seen to Kyle. He frowned.

“Auxariel’s in there,” he said, “at the back of the cave. He looks like he’s asleep, though I wouldn’t believe it for a minute. Behind him, on the back wall of the cavern, there’s a big, swirling portal. Between him and us there are three small skeletal dragons.”

“How small?” Razael asked.

“About the size of Rupert. There’s also a kobold off in the corner to the right, who looks like he’s doing menial labor. It’s strange, though. I got a good look at the skeletal dragons as well as Auxariel. Judging on the age of the bones, certain similarities in appearance, and whatnot, I’d guess that all four dragons in there are from the same brood.”

“What?” said several people at once.

“It looks like they’re siblings,” Kyle repeated.

“So, you reckon Auxariel turned his brothers and sisters into undead?” Razael asked.

“I doubt it. Those skeletons are of very young dragons, almost hatchlings. Auxariel would have been the same age when it happened, and somehow I don’t think he came out of the egg that powerful. More likely it was done by something else.”

“Maybe that’s why Auxariel’s doing this,” Autumn said, “trying to restore true life to his family.”

“It could be an angle we could use,” Kyle said, “find out what happened.”

“What about the swirly thing?” Osborn asked.

“Not sure, really. It could be something that Auxariel’s created with the negative energy he stole.”

“So, do we want to go in polite?” Razael asked.

“Well, we are going to try not to kill him,” Maddie reminded them.

“We have our ambassadors,” Kyle said, gesturing to Lanara and Autumn.

“We should announce ourselves,” Autumn said, “so as not to start off on the wrong foot if we’re trying diplomacy first.”

The party walked forward, with Autumn and Lanara in the lead, with Osborn walking invisibly between them. Arrie, Xu, and Kyle came in behind, and Razael and Maddie brought up the rear. They spread out as far as they could, wary of the dragon’s breath, though even the cavern’s wide opening did not afford as much space as they would have liked.

As soon as they came within sight of the great white dragon, a loud voice rang out..

“Foolish mortals! Why have you wandered into the lair of Auxuariel?”

The dragon spoke in its native language, which fortunately both Autumn and Lanara could understand. Kyle translated quietly for those in the group who couldn’t speak Draconic.

“Great Auxariel!” Autumn began, also speaking in Draconic, “we wish to speak with you on Erito’s behalf.”

There was a low growl. “I do not care to hear it. Be gone or be dead.”

“Erito would like to avoid your death,” Lanara continued, “even where others would actively seek it.”

“You are trying my patience,” Auxariel said, hissing.

“Surely a being as long lived as you would have immeasurable patience,” Lanara said, “surely you could hear us out, at least?”

“ENOUGH!!”

The dragon Auxariel began to rise.



* * *



Razael handed a waterskin to Maddie, who sat with her back on a cold rock. She took it and took a large swallow, realizing suddenly that this particular waterskin didn’t hold water. She smiled as the warmth spread from her belly into her limbs.

“Feeling better, lass?” Razael said.

“Much better, thank you,” she replied. “Though my life-force is still diminished.”

“It’ll pass,” Kyle said, who was leaning on the wall nearby. “Osborn’s already feeling more like himself.”

“That’s ‘Osborn Wyrmslayer’ to you,” the hin said proudly.

“Oh, I forgot, you killed the dragon,” Lanara said, walking up to Maddie and taking the waterskin from her. “Of course, all the arrows and fireballs and spiked chain hits before that had nothing to do with it.”

“Lanara,” chided Osborn, “you of all people should know it’s all in how you tell the story.”

“Speaking of stories,” the cansin said, “I’m curious, Kyle. How exactly did you figure out that the kobold was the real Auxariel?”

“I didn’t, really,” Kyle admitted. “I just guessed lucky. When that big dragon in the back stood up and all its skin fell off, something didn’t sit right with me. Andariel and Tiranel had said that Auxariel wasn’t undead himself, so when that skin came away and there was nothing but a huge skeleton, I started to wonder. When it charged and attacked by biting and clawing, I got more suspicious. Why not blast us with his breath? Or use a spell? Then I realized that the kobold was just plain out of place. Why would Auxariel have a kobold all the way down here? It’d freeze to death. So, I took a chance, and sent the kobold a message telling him that we could still stop the fighting and hear what he had to say.”

“Yeah, unfortunately what he had to say was ‘I’m going to change back into a dragon now and breathe negative energy on you.’” Arrie observed. She chuckled a little, then stopped abruptly, grasping her ribs and wincing. “Or that damned force blast of his.”

“Yeah, and our side’s blasting seemed to start up a little late,” Autumn chided.

“I wanted to wall off that portal first,” Kyle said. “I didn’t want anything coming in or out of it.”

“You know I’m kidding,” Autumn said. “I’m just upset that I wasted so much time attacking the fake Auxariel.”

“Just because it was a false dragon, do not discount the threat posed by the large skeleton,” Xu said. “I fell victim to those teeth and claws, if you recall. I might have died had Autumn not healed me.”

“Yeah, I know how you feel,” Maddie said. “I thought I was a goner when Auxariel bit me. Next thing I knew, there was Lanara standing over me.” Maddie scowled a little. “And stepping on my clothes to keep me from getting up.”

“Someone had to keep you from just running right back into the fight,” Lanara said. “Sometimes I think Raz is right when he says you have a secret death wish. If I hadn’t held you down, Raz probably would have been forced to come get you, instead of shooting the dragon.” Secretly, Lanara was glad she’d even been able to come to Maddie’s aid; she’d felt the instruments trying to prevent her from stopping her bardic music again.

“And I’m a fair sight better with a bow than I am with a blade,” Razael said, “so the longer I can keep shooting, the better.”

“I’ll have to admit,” Arrie said, as she finished tying off the last bandage on her sister’s arm, “I was impressed by how many of your shots got through his hide. It almost makes up for your personality.” She grinned at him, and he tipped his cap in return.

Razael spat onto the hard stone ground. “I tell you what, though, that Auxariel turned out not to be as large as I’d expected.”

“Yeah, I thought dragons got bigger as they got older,” Osborn said. “Auxariel was about half the size of his fake.”

Kyle shrugged. “Who knows? Maybe the myth about a dragon’s size showing how powerful he is was just that – a myth. Not like we can ask him.”

“Yes, it’s too bad we couldn’t talk to him openly, and spare him for Erito’s sake,” Maddie said sadly. “But, he didn’t give us much of a choice.”

“No, he didn’t,” Osborn said. “I almost get the idea that dragons aren’t as smart as everyone thinks.”

“I’m just glad we all made it through that fight alive,” Autumn said. “But now what?”

“Well, we came here to find this knowledge Erito wants us to have,” Lanara said, “but I don’t really see any books around here.”

“The place we’re going may be through that portal,” Kyle said, pointing with his staff toward the swirling disc on the far wall that gently illuminated the cavern.

“Don’t forget we got us a dragon to carve up,” Razael said. “The cold should keep the good parts from spoiling before we get back to the ship.”

Kyle shook his head. “I’m torn between my general dislike of desecrating corpses, and knowing that there’s a lot of value in dragon bits.”

“And aren’t dragons supposed to have big treasure hoards?” Lanara asked.

“Not necessarily,” Arrie warned, “that could just be a human myth. I can’t see how Auxariel would be able to find anything to hoard all the way down here, anyway.”

“Well, in that case,” Razael said, “best we get to the skinning and gutting now. Care to lend a hand, Maddie?”

“Of course,” she replied, and the two elves walked over to where the body of Auxariel lay, drawing their daggers.

“It’s almost too adorable,” Lanara said, watching the two of them walk away, “it’s like a father-daughter picnic held by the church of Fiel.”

The group had a hearty laugh at the image, then busied themselves with packing away their gear and cleaning up the last of their wounds. A minute later, however, Maddie’s voice called out.

“Hey, everyone! Can you please come over here? Now?”

They all dropped what they were doing and walked over, curious at what was so important. Maddie and Razael stood over the still form of the dragon. Both of their daggers were still unbloodied.

“Auxariel,” Maddie said quietly, “is still alive.”

* * *

The party stood around the still form of Auxariel, which they could now all see was slowly rising and falling as it breathed. Almost in unison, everyone turned to look at Kyle.

“What are you looking at me for?” he cried out.

“Because you have the big brain!” Osborn said.

“And that moral compunction not to just kill the thing,” Lanara added.

“I think it has more to do with Erito’s moral compunctions,” Arrie said.

“That’s true,” Razael observed. “Erito did tell us that she’d rather we not kill this dragon if’n we can avoid it. Personally, I say we start pulling scales off until we figure out how many it needs to live, and stop just before that.”

Maddie was closely examining Auxariel. “I think he’ll be out for at least a day,” she said.

“Look, I know what Erito wants,” Kyle said, “and like I said before, I was willing to give it a shot just because she’s helping us out by showing us where this place is. But I’m not sure of our ability to contain a cranky dragon long enough to teach it some manners.”

“Maybe we should try and figure out what it was doing first,” Arrie suggested. “That might help us know what to do. Let’s try looking around for a while.”

The party spread out through the cavern, searching thoroughly. Unfortunately, they found little of interest other than the portal – no records, no indications of what Auxariel might have been doing with the negative energy he was hoarding. During the search, Kyle noticed Osborn crouched down, staring intently at the floor.

“What’s up?” Kyle asked.

“Something’s odd under the floor here,” he said. “Can I get some light?”

“Sure.” Kyle fished out one of his light-globes. They’d been working mostly in the dark, thanks to Kyle’s mass darkvision spell. When he activated the light, he easily saw what Osborn had seen.

Just under the hard, icy surface of the floor, coins and gems sparkled in the bright light. They had found Auxariel’s hoard. The others soon noticed it as well.

“So, how to we get it out?” Maddie asked.

“Fireball!” Lanara shouted, starting to pull out her wand. Kyle put a hand on her arm to stop her.

“A fireball’s too fast to melt the ice,” he said. “Something longer-lasting would work better. Like flaming sphere.”

“We also have ice picks,” Autumn pointed out.

“Either way, it’s a job that should wait until after we deal with Auxariel,” Maddie said. “Digging all that out could take days.”

“We also have that to reckon with,” Razael said, pointing at the blowing blue portal on the far wall. “So, you think that’s a portal to this place Erito’s sending us?”

“That’s my guess,” Kyle said, “but I haven’t really taken a good look at it yet.”

“Is there any way to test the portal without risking sending someone through?” Lanara asked.

“Not really. We’ll just have to tie a rope to someone and pull them back in.”
“I’ll go,” Arrie volunteered.

“No,” said Osborn, “because if something happens to you, we’ll have elves made at us.”

“I’ll go,” Arrie repeated. The rest of the party muttered their reservations.

“Come on!” she said. “I’ve been really moderate so far. Amazingly moderate for me.”

“She has,” Autumn admitted.

“And it’s good to see that kind of control in a future peer of the realm,” Razael drawled.

“But then, maybe she should get all those wild impulses out now,” Kyle said, “so that when she does have to go back she’ll be controlled.”

“No,” said Razael, “I want her controlled now, so that later she’ll make Herion’s life miserable.”

“Since when has she not done that anyway?” Autumn asked.

“Let’s finish looking around first,” Kyle suggested.

They went about searching the cavern again, with Arrie waiting relatively patiently by the portal and Autumn waiting close by her. Osborn’s attention remained on a large diamond he spotted under the ice, and he had to be dissuaded a couple of times from trying to chip it out with one of his daggers. After a while, they gave up on the search and gathered around the blue circle of energy.

“I have an idea,” Lanara said, “why not tie a string to one of Raz’s arrows, shoot it in, and see if we can pull it out?”

“Because if there’s a guardian on the other side, I’d hit it, and make it mad,” Razael said.

“Or what if there’s a kindly old man sitting there, waiting to answer all our questions?” Kyle added.

“Okay,” Lanara said, “how about we throw a rock in?”

While they talked, Arrie was slowly reaching toward the portal. Autumn glared at her, but then realized that they would probably be arguing about how to deal with the portal for some time, and there was no way her sister would wait that long. With a sigh, Autumn decided to get it over with.

She walked into the portal herself. Just as Arrie let out a cry of surprise and moved to follow her, Autumn walked through the energy curtain and smacked into the wall behind it.

Kyle was by her side immediately. “Are you all right?”

“Fine,” she said.

“Well, that’s going to make for a less than inspiring song,” Lanara said.

“So much for that!” Osborn said, “let’s dig the stuff out of the floor!”

“There’s got to be a way to activate it,” Kyle said. “Some sort of key or something.”

Arrie looked over at Maddie. “Why don’t you try touching it?” she suggested.

The favored soul slowly approached the portal, and touched it. From where her fingers met the energy, a wave of color spread throughout the portal, turning it purple in color.

“Look!” Arrie said gleefully, “I found the key!”

“Shall we go in?” Maddie said. “We could be letting cold air in.”

“Why don’t you try going in and coming right back out?” Osborn suggested.

Autumn stepped forward through the gate. Arrie was immediately behind her, and Xu followed as well.

They emerged into another cavern, which was pitch dark, though their darkvision allowed them to see that there was a tunnel leading off ahead of them.

“Should we go further?” Autumn asked.

“Let’s wait here a minute,” Arrie said.

A few moments later, they saw a light approaching from far off in the tunnel. As it drew closer, they realized that the light was actually a rainbow-hued sphere, about four feet wide, floating in mid-air. When it was only a few feet away, it stopped, and coalesced into the form of a radiant figure. The figure resembled a tall, thin elf, with dark blue hair and violet eyes, and wore dark robes. He radiated an iridescent aura of both power and calmness. Autumn recognized the figure as a tulani eladrin, one of Erito’s most powerful servants.

“Good evening,” Autumn said, bowing. The other two followed her lead.

“Welcome,” the tulani said, nodding his head slightly toward them. “You have been expected. Where are the others?”

“We were uncertain what lay beyond the portal,” Autumn explained. “The others are waiting on the other side for us to return and report.”

“I see. Would you please have them join you now? It would be most appreciated.”

Arrie immediately turned and went back through the portal, stepping out in front of the others. They all blinked in surprise.

“That was quick,” Kyle commented.

“There’s a dark-haired, elf-like being with a rainbow aura on the other side,” Arrie explained, “all kinds of power flowing off him. He’d like us to come in.”

The others looked at each other, shrugged, and stepped through.



* * *



“If you will follow me,” the tulani said, after the whole party was together (apparently again seeming to come through the portal at the exact moment that Arrie had gone out), “The Librarian wishes to see you. He has things to discuss with you first.”

The group traveled down the rough cavern passage, which slowly gave way to worked stone. Autumn made conversation with the tulani in Celestial as they walked (though she knew that Celestial was the language of the archons, not the eladrin; no one knew what language Erito’s servants spoke or even if they had their own tongue).

They soon came to a large, brightly-lit hallway, flanked on either side by statues of elves. Each statue had a name carved on the base, but they all noted right away that none of the names seemed very elvish in nature. They also noticed that some of the statues were blank, with no name and indistinct features, as if they were still waiting to be sculpted.

“Any idea who they are?” Osborn asked Lanara.

“No clue,” the bard admitted.

“Something’s not right about these elves,” Razael said. “They’re too stocky, and the ears are too long. They look more like fey ears.”

“I beg your pardon,” Arrie said to the tulani, “but these statues are obviously of important personages, but their significance is lost on us.”

The tulani paused before answering, and his words almost seemed strained. “They are both exemplars and warnings,” he said, “but it is not my place to reveal more. The Librarian will be here shortly and can answer your questions. I must take my leave of you now.”

“Thank you,” Arrie said.

Nodding to the party, the tulani changed back into a ball of energy and quickly flew off down a side passage. After a few minutes, they saw a figure emerge from between two of the statues further down the hall and start toward them. The figure was an albino, and had the same stocky build and extended points on his ears that the statues possessed. As he drew closer, they also saw that instead of eyes, the man’s sockets were filled with a lightless void. The figure stopped in front of the party, regarding each of them, not seeming to have any trouble seeing them. His gaze was hypnotic, and they felt compelled to listen to whatever he had to say. There was a palpable aura of power surrounding him, yet there was no otherworldly feel to him, as they had perceived with the tulani or with other potent outsiders they had encountered.

“Hello,” Autumn said.

“Greetings,” the figure said. “I am the Librarian. This is Erito’s Library of Ages. You have come here seeking information, and information we have in abundance. But it is information that cannot leave this place. Before I can allow you access to the Library, I must have all of you… all of you… submit to a geas that what you learn here will not be communicated to any other being, in life or in death, ever. If you cannot accept this, then you may not go further.”

“So, this would prevent the knowledge from being taken from our spirits in death?” Arrie asked.

“Yes. It is more than a compulsion of the mind. The magic will also suffuse your very soul.”

“We’ll still be able to talk about it amongst ourselves, won’t we?” Osborn asked.

“Yes. The geas will not apply to those who share the knowledge you gain here.”

“How will we know who else has the information?” Autumn inquired.

“Simple. You will be able to speak of it with them.”

Most of the party, after a moment’s consideration, nodded their willingness to accept the Librarian’s terms. Lanara, however, seemed torn. Xu sensed her conflict.

“For one whose purpose is the sharing of information, such a vow must represent a great conflict of interest,” the monk commented.

“Yes, it does,” Lanara admitted.

“But if’n you don’t take the vow, you won’t learn anything to share anyhow,” Razael pointed out. “And if’n you know it, you can act on it, and ain’t nothing says you can’t tell everyone about what you did.”

“What you stand to learn here is earth-shattering in scope. I mean this in a very literal sense.” the Librarian told her.

The bard sighed. “I suppose you’re right. No fun being on the outside looking in.”

When everyone agreed to the vow, the Librarian began to recite words in a language that none of them understood, even when Lanara cast a tongues spell. The words seemed laced with power… no, they seemed to be power. Each of them felt the words seep into their minds and spirits.

“Follow me, please,” the Librarian said, switching back to Common. “Do not stray from my lead, or you will not find your way out again.”

The party followed the Librarian down the great hall. As they walked, Autumn stepped forward to address their guide.

“Excuse me,” she said, “but might I ask what race you are?”

“Of course,” he replied. “”No question is forbidden here. I am of the leShay.”

The others looked at each other blankly. “Where do you hail from?” Autumn asked.

“The leShay are the results of an unfortunate twist of cosmic fate,” the Librarian replied. “There are few of my kind, though it is possible to create more. In some respects, we are much like yourself and your cansin friend. The leShay are what happens when the servants of Erito interbreed with humans.”

“You mean the eladrin?”

“Yes. Those who choose to favor their human parentage become the leShay. But for reasons no one fully understands, a leShay inherits a much greater portion of their eladrin parent’s power than most outsider-touched, such as yourself. But our human natures separate us from the natural limits that the gods place on their servants.”

“What do you mean by limits?” Kyle asked.

“All outsiders are restricted in their functions by their natures,” the Librarian explained. “An archon must be Lawful, a devil must be Evil, and so forth. They exist in a balance. An eladrin is dedicated to the idea of neutrality, of maintaining that balance. But like the other Touched races, a leShay only has an inclination to follow their outsider’s nature, rather than a mandate. You, Autumn, as an aasimar have a proclivity towards goodness, but nothing would stop you from becoming evil if you chose that path. This is the danger that the leShay present. If they choose to stray from absolute neutrality, then the balance of power between the philosophies is shifted. A single leShay is powerful enough that their destruction would require many decades to accomplish and cost hundreds, if not thousands of lives.”

“So, that’s why the leShay aren’t seen in the world,” Autumn concluded.

“Correct. A nascent leShay is hunted down by the eladrin, and either killed or removed from the Prime before they realize their potential. Outside of the Prime, the ethical and moral choices an individual leShay might make have less impact on the overall balance. This is how I came to be here.”

“So, you said that more leShay could be made,” Kyle said. “Why would the eladrin take that risk?”

“In the beginning, many leShay were created, simply because no one knew that the results of unions between eladrin and humans would be so dire. Since then, most of Erito’s servants practice abstinence. But an eladrin is no less susceptible to temptation than a demon, or an angel, or an archon. Some succumb to their lusts, or to more noble emotions. Others are bound by mortal arcanists and forced to breed. Thus new leShay do come into being, perhaps one in a century at most.”

About halfway down the great hall, the Librarian turned left and walked through another violet portal. On the other side, the party walked into the bottom of what looked like a huge amphitheater, but instead of rows of seats a single pathway spiraled upward as far as they could see. All along the path, large black globes were set on pedestals. Inside each of the globes they could make out a humanoid form, wrapped as if they had been mummified.

“Who’s in the globes?” Kyle asked, after they had looked around in awe for a while.

“These are the Serenities of Erito,” the Librarian said. “Every one of them, since the beginning. Here, at the bottom, is the first Serenity.’

Everyone looked around the room again with renewed awe. The thought of being in the presence of every high priest of Erito that had ever existed was staggering, and somewhat intimidating.

“If you wish to communicate with them,” the Librarian continued, “simply place your hand on a globe and they will awaken. Each newly-arrived Serenity shares what they know with the others, but it is best to speak with the Serenity who has the knowledge first-hand if you have specific questions. Also bear in mind that the last Serenity arrived nearly two and a half centuries ago, so their knowledge of current events is nonexistent.”

“Are they being punished?” Razael asked.

“No, this is their reward. Here they will stay, asleep and unaware, until their knowledge is needed, until the end of time.” The Librarian looked straight at Razael with twin pools of darkness. “This is part of the knowledge that cannot be shared outside this Library.”

“I can thing of things I’d rather be doing with my afterlife,” Razael said, shivering.

Lanara, meanwhile, had wandered over to the first globe. The figure inside was very old, and looked like it had decayed significantly. Still, she could tell he was a human. At first it struck her as odd that the first Serenity wouldn’t be an elf, but then she thought about it and realized it made sense; elves didn’t even exist until after the Cataclysm.

Gently, she put a hand on the globe, and thought, who are you?

They all heard the response in their minds, in what they each perceived as their native tongue. I am Errial, first Serenity of Erito, and the third human to walk on Aelfenn.

“The third human?” Arrie asked.

Erito created first a female in her own image, and then a male in the image of her own Consort. Then, from their union, I was created to be Her first priest.

Everyone was startled by the reply. None of them had ever heard anything about Erito ever having a consort. “Can you tell us about this Consort?” Arrie asked.

It was he who helped shape this world. It was he who impregnated Erito, and she gave birth to The Four, and then The Many.

Now they were in shock. Not only had this Consort apparently existed, but he seemed to be Erito’s peer, and had an equal hand in the creation of the universe.

“What happened to him?” Lanara asked.

It is my understanding that he was destroyed by his creations, the psions.

It was several minutes before anyone else spoke.

“Okay,” said Lanara, “I’m officially at a loss for words here.”

“Why did Erito allow the psions to kill her Consort?” Autumn asked.

That is something you would have to ask Erito herself. I could not presume to know Her mind or Her will. But even Erito is not omniscient, not omnipotent.

“We already know that the gods apparently had trouble defending against psionics,” Kyle said, “Maybe she couldn’t stop them.”

“Tell us more about the Consort,” Lanara said. “What was his name?”

I cannot. The knowledge does not exist. He does not exist, and has never existed.

“But… you just said…”

It is difficult for me to explain. There is another Serenity who can help you understand, who was there when the Consort was destroyed. Seek him out.

The figure inside the sphere closed his eyes, and seemed to fall still.

“Great,” Lanara said, “how do we know who to ask?”

“We should be able to figure it out,” Kyle said. “Remember how Aran told us that the Cataclysm was really caused by the psions killing a god?”

“Yeah, but he said it was one of the Many,” Osborn said, “not Erito’s boyfriend.”

“Okay, so there are inconsistencies. Anyway, it’s safe to assume that the Cataclysm was really the result of the Consort’s destruction. We also know that the elves and other non-human races didn’t get created until after the Cataclysm.” Kyle pointed up the spiraling path. “So, we go up until we see a Serenity that’s an elf, and we know that’s post-Cataclysm. Then all we have to do is backtrack a bit to talk to the Serenities that were around during the Cataclysm.”

“Okay, I’ll go find it,” Razael said, proceeding up the spiral. “If any of y’all want to talk to these others along the way, go ahead.”

Autumn looked at the Librarian. “How much time do we have here?”

“There is nothing but time here. While in the Library, you will not have need of rest, or sustenance. You will emerge from the Library at the same moment you left it. To anyone who would have been waiting outside the portal for you, it would be as if no time had passed, even if you spent months or years in here.”

The party slowly spread out among the globes, speaking to people who had been dead for millennia. The vast majority were human, though there were a scattering of various element-touched and planet-touched races, though obviously no elf-touched or orc-touched. Most of the bodies were in far better condition than Errial; when asked, the Librarian explained that the state of the body in the globe matched its state when it was committed to its final rest on Aelfenn; Errial’s body had been lost for some time before it was found and consecrated.

Their questions were wide-ranging, from general queries about ancient history, to advice on spiritual matters, to knowledge about psionics. The psions had apparently practiced openly in the days before the Cataclysm, so many of the Serenities were quite familiar with their abilities. Eventually, they caught up with Razael, who was leaning against the wall next to a globe containing the mummified body of a female elf.

“This here’s Kertalla,” he said, “the first elven Serenity of Erito. The first elf, actually.”

“Ooh!” Lanara said, immediately putting her hand on the globe to talk to her.

“Okay,” Kyle said, “so let’s go back about five globes.”

As they walked back, they noticed that the Serenities in the globes appeared to have old wounds, as if they had died by violence. One even had her head separated from her body, floating nearby.

It took a bit of trial and error to find the right globe; many of the Serenities just before Kertalla reigned during the violent aftermath of the Cataclysm, and thus their service was very brief. One Serenity had held the office for only a few weeks before being killed. The party ended up going back about fifteen globes before finding the person they thought they needed.

The Serenity inside the globe was a human male, with black hair. He wore the traditional white robes of Erito, trimmed with dark blue. From speaking with other Serenities, they knew that this signified a priest that had arcane training as well as divine.

Kyle put his hand on the globe. “Hello. May I ask your name?”

The figure opened his eyes, and regarded Kyle with blue-gray pupils that matched his own. I am Justin Godscion, he said. Welcome to the Library, my descendant.



* * *



Kyle’s hand jerked back as though the globe had grown hot. Autumn quickly reached over, grabbed his hand, and slapped it back up on the smooth surface.

“Now is not the time,” she said quietly to him. “You need to know this.”

Kyle swallowed, and nodded. “Sorry,” he said to Justin. “So, you were the Serenity just prior to the Cataclysm?”

I was witness to the events that led to it, yes, Justin said. He glanced over at the staff in Kyle’s hand. I see my staff has found its way to you. It assisted me in hunting down and slaying psions. I see you have unlocked some of its powers – with knowledge you will unlock more.

Autumn could feel that Kyle’s hand underneath hers was trembling.

“Okay, then,” Kyle said, “tell us about…well, tell us about the events leading up to the Cataclysm.”

A band of very powerful psions, led by a being who had learned to survive using only the energy of his mind, were becoming tyrants. They were speaking out against the gods, saying that they were not needed, that all that was needed was the self. They were garnering followers, and they claimed they would prove their claims. No one knew how they would do this, until it was too late. They banded together to slay their creator.

“Erito’s Consort,” Kyle said.

“What was the consort’s name?” Razael asked.

We cannot speak it.

“Why?” asked Autumn.

He was not just killed; he was eradicated, made as though he never existed.

“So you can’t speak the name because it never existed,” Razael said.

Exactly.

“But if he never existed, but you know there was a Consort…” Lanara shook her head. “This makes my brain hurt.”

“No, I can see how it works,” Kyle said. “Sometimes the absence of a thing can be as big an indication as its presence. It’s kind of like using an invisibility spell underwater; you’re technically invisible, but there’s a person-shaped space in the water – you know someone’s there, you just can’t tell who. In this case, there’s a hole in reality where the Consort was. You don’t know what’s supposed to fill that hole, but its there.”

Justin nodded in approval. It is difficult to fill a deity-sized ‘hole’.

“There is a group out there,” said Autumn, “Known as the Scion-Watchers. Does this mean anything to you?”

Justin’s body seemed to sag a little, as if recalling something very sad. When I failed to prevent Erito’s Consort from being slain, my descendants – my scions – were cursed. For seven times seventy generations, magic would not touch them. You are the first Godscion to be free of that curse. The Scion-Watchers were a sect of Erito’s church, charged with monitoring my descendants to ensure the curse was maintained. I have learned from other Serenities that have come here after me that the Scion-Watchers are no longer officially recognized by the church, and have become a splinter cult.

“If that’s the case, why are they still hunting Kyle?” Autumn asked.

I would assume that they have lost track of time, and believe that he should still be without magic. They have lost much knowledge since their founding.

“How to we rectify the situation?” Lanara asked.

“Eradicate them,” Razael replied immediately.

There are many possibilities. Which one you choose is your lot to decide.

“Maybe I can find this ‘Arcanamach’ person,” Kyle said, “and get them to see where they messed up.”

The Arcanamach was the title of the sect’s leader, Justin explained.

“Why would they have tried to kidnap both Kyle and I?” Autumn asked.

Most likely they were going to attempt to cleanse him of magic, and were only acting against you to prevent your interference.

“Cleansing?” Lanara asked, “One of them mentioned cleansing. Do you mean cleansing like with his adopted cousin?”

“He was killed, quite brutally,” Kyle explained to Justin. “They may not have known he wasn’t a blood relative.”

The cleansing ritual is not meant to be lethal, Justin said, though it is unpleasant. However, as I said the Scion-Watchers have lost much knowledge, and the cleansing ritual may have become perverted.

“So, they’d be out to ‘cleanse’ anyone in my family… our family,” Kyle said.

Possibly. It depends on how much information they have.

“And we can’t even tell ‘em they’re wrong,” Razael said. “Thanks to that vow we took.”

“It’s not like most fanatical cults listen when their victims try to tell them they’ve made a mistake, anyway,” Arrie observed.

“So, where will Kyle find the knowledge to work this staff to its fullest potential?” Lanara asked.

The knowledge lies within himself. By arriving here, some of what he needs to know will become available to him.

Kyle sighed. “Given your position, you’re probably very familiar with the workings of psionics.”

Yes. It was much more common in my time, and practiced openly.

“Is Kyle going to end up psionic?” Lanara asked.

No. Our family’s talents lie in the arcane, not in psionics.

“This being that could exist on pure thought,” Kyle continued, “the one who led the attack on the Consort. Who was he?”

His name was Silko.

For about the hundredth time since they had arrived, eight jaws dropped to the floor.

“The Hero?” Razael asked, incredulously.

“The Paragon that remained on Aelfenn when the others ascended?” Lanara added.

Yes. To many at the time he was a hero. He had many followers.

“Were the other Paragons also psions?” Kyle asked.

No.

“Were they even real people?”

I do not know for certain. The myths of the Paragons were created after the Cataclysm. Whether they were based on real people or not, I know no better than you.

“But Silko was real.”

Yes.

“Is he still around?” Razael asked.

Justin seemed to sigh. I don’t know. What I saw before I died was that Silko’s body was destroyed. However, one of the powers he had developed was the ability to shed his physical form and exist purely as mind.

“Kind of like a spirit.” Autumn said.

Similar, but not exactly. He did not shift to a transitive plane like the Ethereal or the Shadow. Perhaps it was another coterminous plane we are not aware of. Or perhaps on this plane but unable to interact with it. He had trained others in this power, but he alone possessed the skill to be able to manifest it in less time than the blink of an eye. When the Consort was destroyed, an eye-blink was all anyone present had. Regardless, when he did shed his form, his ability to affect this world was greatly diminished. Thus it would not surprise me if he were still in existence, but unable to affect the world around him.

“So, he’d have to find some other means of working in this world,” Lanara said.

He would still be able to communicate, Justin said.

“And train others,” Kyle said.

“If he had someone collecting energy for him,” Lanara asked, “would that bring him back?”

My knowledge of psionics is academic, and therefore flawed. So I don’t know all the nuances of their abilities. However, in order to interact with the world, Silko would need to re-corporate into a physical body. It’s possible that the energy released upon the Consort’s destruction had the same effect on Silko’s body that it did on the Consort’s entire being. Thus he may be unable to restore his physical form.

“Would any of the other psions that were with Silko when he destroyed the Consort still be alive?” Autumn asked.

No. They were obliterated with the Consort. As I said before, only Silko was skilled enough to shed his body fast enough to avoid that fate.

“Is there anyone in the world today who would possess the knowledge of what Silko might be doing?” Lanara asked.

If the knowledge exists, it would be among the psions themselves.

“Do you have knowledge of the psion named Aran?”

Oh, yes. He and I were good friends, actually. He did not agree with Silko with the direction that Silko was taking. He believed that the gods were necessary, but not for everyone. Silko felt that the god’s usefulness had ended at the creation of the universe. Because of who he was, he could not join with either side in the brewing conflict. Aran served as a messenger between the two sides, and I came to know him very well.

“Well,” said Kyle, “we’d offer to say hello for you the next time we see him, but we won’t be able to thanks to the geas.”

It is my understanding of the vow that it does not preclude you from speaking openly to those who also have the knowledge contained in this Library, even if it didn’t come from the Library directly. If Aran is still alive, then he is old enough to know these things firsthand.

“Can Aran be trusted if he communicates with us again?” Lanara asked.

I know that he could be trusted. It has been many thousands of years since I knew him, though.

“Do you know the name Xerxes?” Lanara asked.

Justin shook his head.

“What about Kristyan?” Razael asked. “That was one of the names you guys mentioned, right?”

If I remember correctly, Kristyan was a psionic acolyte who had just entered Silko’s service at the time of the Cataclysm, Justin said.

“Damn, we’re dealing with some old people here,” Kyle muttered.

The energy that sustains their bodies without food or rest also alters their physical selves so they do not age, Justin explained. Essentially, they become another race, known as the élan. It is a race that one cannot be born into; you must be transformed into it by unlocking the potential within – much as this young woman here has done. Justin’s hand pointed down toward Arrie.

The others turned to look at a red-faced Arrie, gasping. Only Kyle didn’t stare. Instead, he just shook his head sadly, saying to himself, “Well, now I know that putting your foot in your mouth runs in the family.”

Your companions did not know of your talents? My apologies.

“When were you going to tell me about this, sister?” Autumn said, eyes flashing.

Arrie ignored the question, instead addressing Justin. “I’m curious. Since the Consort is no more, and the Consort was apparently the creator of the psions… my understanding is that when someone dies, their soul is taken by the god they worshipped to their planet. What happens to those who have no god?”

Death still releases the energy that Erito requires to keep magic in the world, Justin said to her, upon death, all souls go first to the Shadow Plane. Those of the faithful are collected by their deity’s servants. Those without a divine patron remain on the Shadow, and either discorporate and merge with the essence of the plane, or if their will is strong enough, they will become undead.

“So, for a psion whose creator is now gone,” Razael concluded, “the choice is either achieve perfection or disappear.”

Yes.

“Are there any gods that will accept a psionic being as a follower?” Kyle asked.

None. All the gods now hate and fear psionics, and none will accept it into their fold.

Kyle scowled deeply. “So, regardless of who they are, just because they were born with an ability they have no control over?”

They were born with a Talent, like all others, but it is psionic rather that magical. In truth, many who live today have Talents which are psionic in origin, but with the decline of psionics in open practice, the ability to discern psionic Talents from magical ones has been lost – though my staff is capable of it. Those who do not develop their abilities beyond this point are still accepted by the gods. Only those who choose to develop their powers beyond what they possess at birth are rejected.

“That’s incredibly unfair,” Kyle said angrily.

“Okay,” Lanara said, sensing that Kyle might be ready to start an argument with his distant ancestor, “jumping topics again, is there anything you recommend we do about Silko if he’s still out there?”

If the destruction of the Consort has taught us anything, it’s that nothing is permanent. That which is done can be undone. Whether it wants to be undone, or whether it should be undone, is a different matter. Silko proved that destroying a god can be done; should he have done it? I leave that to others to debate.

Kyle looked up slowly. “But by extension, if something can be undone, then it could be restored.”

“Like the Consort,” Razael said.

Or Silko, Justin observed. That may be what his followers seek to do.

“Or maybe they’re going the opposite direction,” Arrie said. “In order to have some hope of an afterlife, maybe they’re wanting to undo what Silko did. But in a way that would make the new Consort more agreeable to them.”

“With enough negative energy, could Erito be destroyed?” Lanara asked.

Erito is positive and negative energy. It cannot harm her.

“Yes, but if enough negative energy were hoarded to disrupt the balance, would it disrupt her? The dragon that was guarding the portal here has been hoarding negative energy.”

It would take more energy than a single being, even a dragon, could possibly garner.

“But maybe he wasn’t trying to destroy Erito,” Razael said. “If’n he was helping the psions, maybe they were just trying to disrupt magic. After all, if there’s no magic, what’s there to stop the psions?”

“But we already know from the communes that Auxariel wasn’t getting help from the psions,” Kyle said.

“But Erito’s not omniscient,” Razael pointed out.

“And it doesn’t mean that he wasn’t helping them,” Lanara added. “Those communes are very literal.”

“I still don’t buy it,” Kyle said. “If Auxariel was in leaguer with the psions to pull off something that big, he would have been better defended. And besides…”

Do you have further questions for me? Justin interrupted. The longer I remain awake, the more of my essence is drained.

Everyone immediately turned their attention back to the former Serenity. “Sorry,” Kyle and Lanara both said.

“I do,” Autumn said. “Would a dagger consecrated by Bail have significance to the psions in regard to what we’ve been discussing?”

It would carry a portion of His divine essence. A miniscule portion, to be sure, but a portion nonetheless.

“Could such an item be used to destroy a god?” Lanara asked.

Unlikely.

“But it is a connection that could be used to contact or locate that god,” Kyle said.

Indeed. Why do you ask about this item?

“I had located such a dagger,” Autumn explained, “and it was stolen by a priest of Qin-Chu named Marrek, whom we know to be working for the psions.”

This could be a problem, especially if they are attempting to gather similar items from all the gods.

“Could we stop them from doing it?” asked Lanara.

There are probably hundreds of such consecrated items in the world for each god. They would only need one.

There were a few exchanged glances, but they had run out of questions. “I think we can let you sleep again,” Autumn said, “thank you.”

I am only performing my duty to my goddess. But if you wish to express your gratitude, allow me to speak to my descendant privately.

Autumn looked at Kyle. “Are you going to be all right?”

“I’ll be fine. Like you said, I need to know this.”

The sentinel smiled at him. “I had no idea you had such a prestigious lineage.”

Kyle smiled back. “Neither did I.”

“Yeah,” Lanara commented, “I think the spelling of your last name has changed a bit. It’s just too bad you won’t be able to tell Auror about your ancestry.”

“She wouldn’t believe me anyway.” Kyle looked up at Justin. “I’m ready to talk.”

Excellent. I would suggest that the rest of you continue to interview the Serenities that preceded me for information about psionics. Their knowledge of the subject is far greater than those who came after the Cataclysm, when the psions went underground.

Time lost all meaning, not that time existed in the Library of the Ages. Dozens of Serenities were interviewed, on a wide variety of subjects. Kyle spoke at length with Justin Godscion, then spent a good deal of time with Errial before moving on to others. Lanara ended up speaking to randomly chosen high priests throughout the Library, adding to her store of eclectic knowledge. She also asked about the strange effects she’d noticed recently from her Bardic Instruments, hoping to learn a way to counteract them. Autumn concentrated on techniques for combating psions and the psionic races. Arrie focused her efforts on learning all she could about the Consort.

Razael, in contrast to the others, spent most of his time speaking with the Librarian, after finding that his subject of interest was not well known by the Serenities – dragons. Razael learned that Auxariel had been one of the children of the previous spirit dragon guardian, thus accounting for the fact that he was not as old or powerful as they would have expected. The Librarian explained that the spirit dragon that guarded the southern pole had two tasks; guard the entrance to the Library, and regulate the birth and death cycle for living beings in the area. Auxariel, who had apparently been twisted from an early age, had arranged the deaths of his siblings (who he later raised as skeletal guardians), and when he assumed his mother’s mantle of power after her death, he soon began to neglect the birth cycle. Fertility among the arctic creatures had dropped to dangerously low levels.

Finally, they met together, compared notes, and realized they had gathered all the information they could use at this time. They knew it was time to return to Aelfenn. Immediately upon reaching their decision, the Librarian walked in to the room they were meeting in, with a ghaele eladrin next to him.

“I can escort you to the portal to Auxariel’s cavern,” he said. “But Madrone’s presence has been requested by the eladrin. She should only be gone a few minutes.”

Maddie nodded, and walked over to the ghaele eladrin, bowing. The two of them walked away down a corridor.

“I was wondering something,” Razael said to the Librarian after they left, “we’ve still got Auxariel to deal with when we get back. Now, Erito said she’d prefer if we didn’t kill him, but I don’t think we can keep him still long enough to give him a good talking to. But if we could bring him in here, it wouldn’t matter how long it took to straighten him out.”

“The dragon cannot enter the Library,” the Librarian said. “Spirit dragons cannot leave the Material plane; their connection to the spirit world would be cut off and they would die.”

“Well, so much for that idea,” Razael said. “But I’ve got another one. There’s no good way to say this, but is there any way we can borrow an eladrin?”

“What for?” the Librarian asked

“To take out there with us, to help us decide if it’s worth trying to save him, and if so, maybe be willing to pitch in. We don’t have the time to re-educate Auxariel, but an eladrin would.”

“I can make inquiries,” the Librarian said, “though my request may not be well received. Though the leShay and the eladrin have a cordial relationship now, many of them bear the scars from the days when we first arrived in this world, and were seen as abominations. We did slay a great deal of their number.”

“Maybe if you had Madrone do the asking, it’d go over better,” Razael suggested.

“Perhaps. Wait here, and I’ll see what I can do.”

Much later, the Librarian returned, along with another ghaele eladrin. “Ghyndall here will accompany you out of the library and observe your interactions with Auxariel, and advise you as to Erito’s will. Madrone must remain here for a time, though from your perspective she will emerge from the portal immediately after you.”

They followed the Librarian out of the room and through the twisting corridors and halls, going thorough two portals before coming to the cavern where they had first entered the Library. They stepped through, and immediately felt the snap of cold air around them. A second later, Maddie stepped out of the portal.

“What was all that about?” Kyle asked.

“Nothing, really,” Maddie said. “I had a decision to make, and I made it.”

“Okay, then,” Arrie said, “good to have you back, then. So, let’s deal with Auxariel, shall we?”



* * *



The party busied themselves chipping or melting things out of the ice. The eladrin Ghyndall stood vigil over the dragon. At one point Autumn approached him and asked if he ever associated with his peers among the other gods, such as the archons or angels.

“My function is to interact with them in a violent manner,” he said. “We do not speak to each other otherwise.”

“You fight against angels?” Autumn asked.

“They embody an extreme philosophy, and upset the balance,” Ghyndall replied. “That you find their philosophy more appealing than others is irrelevant.”

The hours dragged on. After almost a day, it seemed that Auxariel still had not stirred.

“You think we could speed this up, Maddie?” Razael asked.

They gathered around the dragon, with Autumn standing ready with her axe just behind Auxariel’s head. Maddie reached down and touched the dragon, sending healing energy into him. Auxariel immediately stopped breathing.

“Damn!” she swore, and quickly invoked another rite, drawing on her own essence to pull Auzariel’s spirit back into his body. “I forgot that he’s infused with negative energy,” she said by way of explanation. “Positive energy will hurt him like it would undead.”

“So,” Lanara asked, “do you use negative energy instead?”

“I’m not sure,” Maddie admitted, “I don’t know if Auxariel was so infused that it would respond to negative energy like an undead being. Besides, the only rite I know of that nature is rather potent, and I’m assuming we want to keep him relatively weak.”

“Let’s just wait for him to wake up on his own,” Arrie suggested.

Hours later, Auxariel began to stir. They took up their positions around him, careful not to stand directly in front of his mouth. Auxariel’s eyes opened, and immediately narrowed as his vision focused. A low growl rumbled in his throat.

“You might want to suppress your anger just a bit for a couple of minutes,” Arrie said quietly.

The dragon took a moment to take in his surroundings. “Since I am not slain, I assume that you want something,” he snarled.

“Indeed,” Arrie said. “It seems that Erito, with whom you have had some recent disagreements, has expressed a desire for you not to be destroyed. Personally, I don’t care one way or the other.”

“Erito is not here,” Auxariel snapped. “You are. What do you want?”

“Well, Osborn wants that diamond over there,” Lanara said.

The dragon’s eyes flicked over to the cansin. “I am powerless to prevent it,” he said.

“Well, really all we want is for things to go back to the way they should be,” Lanara continued.

“They can. Leave here, and all will be as it should.”

“As they should be from Erito’s view, not yours,” Lanara snapped.

The hint of a smirk curled Auxariel’s lips. “If you destroy me, I will return more powerful than before.”

Lanara blinked, unsure if Auxariel was sincere or not. Then she returned the smile. “Not powerful enough to avoid us.”

Autumn glanced over at the eladrin, who had been silently observing the exchange. “It has no reverence for divine will,” he said. “End it.”

Autumn’s axe fell, and Auxariel was no more.

There was a moment of awkward silence, as everyone backed away to avoid being covered in the dragon’s blood. “Sorry, Kyle,” Lanara said.

“Don’t apologize to me,” he said. “Like I said before, it was worth a shot, but I’m not particularly obliged to carry out Erito’s will.” As the others moved away, he added under his breath “especially now.”

“I will report what has happened here,” Ghyndall said. “Another guardian will be appointed. Your efforts to redeem Auxariel are noted.” The eladrin turned and walked back through the portal, which turned back to its original blue as soon as he went through it.

“Well,” Razael said, pulling out a long knife, “no sense letting the parts go to waste.” The tracker walked up to Auxariel’s corpse and began cutting into it.

“Now that we’re back here,” Arrie said, “does anyone want to see some psionic powers being manifested?”

“Sure,” Osborn said, and others readily agreed. Arrie did a brief demonstration of her abilities, explaining how she called upon her powers, and allowing everyone to experience the signs of psionic manifestations, explaining how she had suppressed these side effects up until now.

“How did this happen?” Autumn asked.

“You remember in Miracle, when I was in that near-death state because of Neville? Well, I was… aware of my surroundings during all of that.”

“Wow,” Lanara said after a pause, “then the portable hole must have really sucked for you.”

Arrie nodded. “I… almost didn’t make it. But then Aran visited me, and helped me realize the truth and awaken my potential. For a wilder like myself, our experiences shape our developing abilities.”

“What truth are you talking about?” Autumn asked.

“I’ve always known I was different,” she said. “You know my Talent to detect poisons?” Arrie held up a beaded bracelet. “Our father gave me this when I was young to simulate that. I actually don’t have a Talent.”

“Sure you do,” Lanara said, “you have a talent for putting sharp things in soft things.”

Arrie smiled. “Thanks, Lanara.”

“And you kept it a secret all this time?” Osborn asked her.

“Well, it’s not exactly something you want known. Tolly was still with us at the time, remember? And Haxtha’s never been fond of me, so giving him an excuse wasn’t something I wanted to do. So other than Aran and Kyle, no one knew until now.”

“Wait,” Autumn said, “Kyle?” She turned to look at her fiancé. “You knew?”

“I figured it out,” Kyle said sheepishly.

“Look, it’s not a big deal,” Arrie said. “You all know now, and I know you can all be trusted. We should be looking at what to do now. Raz and I were talking, and we think we should make an effort to kill as many undead as we can on the way out. You know, kind of help restore the life-death balance a little.”

“Or we could have Lanara go to the frost giants and play a few romantic ballads,” Kyle quipped, “You know, get the birth rate going again?”

“How long are we thinking about taking to kill undead?” Lanara asked apprehensively.

“Not long, just whatever we can find or attract on the way to the ship,” Arrie said. “We need to get back to Affon as soon as we can, because our enemies aren’t waiting for us to get home.”

“I agree,” Autumn said, casting one last look around the cavern. “Let’s go home.”



* * *



The stars shone brightly in a clear night sky. Only the lapping of waves against the Armadillo’s iron hull and the creak of rigging interrupted the stillness. Though still chilly, they were now well outside the area of deadly cold that marked the southern pole.

Kyle stood at the prow of the ship, watching the waves dance in the light of Aelfenn’s moons. There were only two out tonight, making it a relatively dark night. Kyle glanced up to see which two they were – Dathel and Shakar, the divine realms of Paccë and Tor. Peace and justice. Kyle had a sense of neither.

His gaze wandered back to the star he’d been staring at the whole time he’d been out here; the northern star, one of Silko’s Eyes. It wasn’t hard to find, considering it was setting their course home. For him, and for his friends, the significance of that star and its southern twin had been altered forever. Now, instead of comfort, it brought a sense of unease.

His head swam with the information he’d take from the Library, especially what his ancestor Justin Godscion had imparted to him. Some of it would take him months, maybe even years to fully sort out and understand. But none of it would ease the doubt that now gnawed at his mind and soul.

Kyle reached under the neck of his tunic, and withdrew a small silver pendant. He unhooked the clasp, and then held the pendant in his palm. The image of a raven in flight stood in stark contrast against the smooth silver circle. He remembered when he was given this by Kavan, after he’d chosen to name Erito as his patron deity rather than Bles. It had marked a transition for him, a time when he came to accept that we was no longer a simple farmer or carpenter, but a true wizard.

But now more change was on the horizon. Kavan was no longer Kavan, but Madrone (and now, as she told it, permanently so), and Kyle faced another transition, a new definition of his self that he found difficult to accept. But it was there, waiting for him.

Kyle let the pendant drop out of his palm, catching the chain with his thumb and forefinger so it dangled free, swaying and spinning. He slowly stretched his arm out until it was over the railing of the ship, and the pendant spun and flashed in empty air, with the cold ocean below, waiting hungrily for its prize.

He stood there like that, still as a corpse, for what seemed an eternity. Then, slowly, he brought his arm back in, dropped the pendant into the palm of his other hand, and after another long moment placed the pendant in a pocket.

The moment his hand left his pocket, he saw that Autumn was walking up behind him. She approached and encircled her arms around him as he turned to face her, pressing close to him. It was as much an expression of affection as it was an effort to ward off the night’s chill for both of them.

“What were you doing?” she asked.

“Nothing,” he lied, hating the words as soon as he said them. It wasn’t his intent to deceive her, but he simply wasn’t ready to explain his troubled thoughts to anyone. He could barely understand them himself.

“I’m worried about you,” she said, “you haven’t been sleeping well since the Library.”

“Too much on my mind,” he said; that much was true enough. “Hopefully with time it’ll go away.”

Autumn turned her head upward and began a row of soft kisses against Kyle’s neck, at the same time tightening her embrace.

“You’re affectionate tonight,” he said. “Not that I’m complaining.” Autumn’s sense of decorum usually made her leery of any displays of affection outside of the bedchamber; Kyle didn’t think he’d been that successful in breaking her of that trait.

“I don’t know,” she sighed, “maybe it’s just that I feel like we’re running out of time to just be us. Out here, I’m still just Autumn, and you’re still just Kyle. When we make port, I’m going to be Duchess Autumn, and you’ll be the Scion Reborn.”

“Autumn, please stop calling me that.” It was a title that Lanara had made up as a joke while they were walking back to the ship from the Library. Unfortunately, it seemed to keep popping up despite his efforts to squash it.

“Sorry,” she said, “but you know what I mean.” She reached up and placed one hand behind his head, and pressed her lips to his. It was a soft, yet passionate kiss, far more intense than Kyle had expected. He was suddenly acutely aware of her warmth, of the tantalizing feel of her even through the layers of heavy clothes they both wore. For the first time in days, the maelstrom in Kyle’s mind subsided.

Slowly, gently, Autumn pulled away, then laid her head on Kyle’s chest, sighing. “I know I shouldn’t say this to you, but I do wish you could come with me when I go to Vargas.”

“I know,” he said, stroking her hair, “but I can’t put off finding my family any more, not with what I know about the Scion-Watchers. And you don’t need me to tell you how to run your city. Besides, these plans are all just ‘maybes’. Who knows what’s going to be waiting for us when we get back to Affon?”

“That’s what’s been keeping me up at night,” Autumn admitted.

Kyle smiled. “Well, if neither of us is sleeping anyway…”

Autumn jabbed him playfully in the ribs. “Kyle! You’re incorrigible!”

“What, you plant a kiss on me like that and expect otherwise?”

Autumn laughed. “All right, guilty as charged. Shall we retire, then?”

“An excellent suggestion, Your Grace,” Kyle said, stepping out of her arms and giving her a mock bow.

“Keep it up, Kyle, and you’ll sleep alone,” Autumn said as they walked back toward the stairs.

“You forget, I’m the captain. I can have you thrown overboard, you know.”

They laughed and joked their way down to their cabin, leaving the cold night behind.


END OF PART TWO
 
Last edited:

Delemental

First Post
Homecoming

There was a grand reception awaiting the Armadillo in Praxos as they sailed into the harbor. Other ships of all sizes crowded the harbor, their crews waving and cheering as the ironclad ship lumbered toward port.

The response to their arrival back in Tlaxan, after being gone nearly four and a half months, was understandable. After all, they had recovered one of the country’s most important treasures – the ceremonial courtblade from Emperor Jhoxan’s coronation – from the clutches of a dragon.

As the members of the Legacy stood on the deck, watching the commotion, several of them had to suppress smiles. Finding the courtblade in Auxariel’s hoard had been a fluke, an unexpected twist of fate. But after a few sendings between Arrie and Herion, it quickly became public knowledge that recovering the sword had been the ‘real’ intent of their voyage. It not only helped Herion justify the money that the Court had put up for the expedition, but it gave the Legacy a safe story, so that they wouldn’t be pressed for details on why they had gone.

Of course, the real discovery in the dragon’s hoard was still safely tucked away in Autumn’s portable hole, waiting until the party could decide what to do with it. Some argued that it should be dismantled and the components sold off; others were just as firm in their opinion that it should be preserved whole. No one was sure who they should try and give it to – only that simply keeping it seemed foolish. They’d finally agreed to put that particular item aside, and take care of other business before picking up the discussion again.

After making port, securing the ship, and bidding farewell to their loyal crew, the party made their way to the Imperial Manor in Praxos, where they took a teleportation circle to the Palace in Noxolt. Here, again, a crowd of excited citizens awaited their arrival. The Legacy was escorted to the entrance to the main palace by an honor guard, where they were greeted by all three members of the Imperial Family. For weeks afterward, people in the crowd would talk about the reverent hush that fell over the courtyard, as the Princess Ariadne ascended the steps and formally presented Jhoxan’s coronation blade to his eldest son, the Emperor Haxtha.

The party spent another week in Noxolt, though very little of that time was actually spent at the Palace. There were treasures to appraise, preserved portions of draconic anatomy to sell to eager collectors and arcanists, and a few generous donations make to the churches of Krûsh, Dakotha, and Rovenor by Lanara in gratitude for not being capsized in a storm or lost at sea. But for some of them, the activity was more a way to postpone the day that came all too soon – the day they had to go their separate ways.

Autumn could no longer put off officially visiting her new duchy in the city of Vargas, in order to cement her rule there. Arrie went with her, of course, not only for moral support but to lend the weight of the Crown to her arrival. Autumn had also asked Osborn to accompany her.

“I may not be experienced at governing,” she told him, “but I know that the centers of power in any city are not always the obvious ones. Since I won’t be able to personally oversee Vargas most of the time, I’d like to at least have a sense of the… well, the…”

“The ‘less savory’ part of town?” Osborn finished for her, cracking a smile.

“Yes. Not only to find out who I should be watching, but also to make sure that whatever balance of power has been reached between the law and the underworld is maintained for now. The last thing I need is for my reign to herald in a sharp rise in the crime rate.”

“Some of that’s unavoidable,” Osborn said. “Change is always an uncertain time, and some will always take advantage of that. But I get your point; make sure they know not to push it too far, so you won’t have to push back harder.”

“Exactly.”

“Of course,” Osborn said, affecting an innocent look, “one thing that could help ease the transition would be some sort of big celebration. You know, like a wedding or something.”

Autumn sighed heavily, clearly aware of the hin’s hidden message. “I know, Osborn. I wish it was that simple. But I haven’t even been able to sit down with Kyle and discuss wedding plans, ever since the Library.”

“Eh, he just needs time for things to settle down a bit,” Osbon said. “We all do.”

“You’re probably right.”

Osborn looked up at Autumn, his head cocked to one side. “You mad at him for not going with you?”

“No… yes, a little. But I can’t ask him to put off trying to find his family. Besides, if he goes to Vargas with me he’ll feel useless. It’s going to be nothing but meetings, official receptions, formal dinners…”

“Am I invited to the dinners?” Osborn asked.

“Of course,” Autumn laughed. “I have to have my advisors close at hand, don’t I?”

There was a pause in the conversation as Autumn finished signing a letter she’d been writing while talking to Osborn. When she put the pen down, Osborn cleared his throat to get her attention.

“There will be bacon at these dinners, right?”



* * *



Kyle, Lanara, Razael and Xu sped southwest from Noxolt, heading for Aleppi and the gateway through Targeth’s magical barrier. Indistinct, gray landscape flitted by them as they walked in the Shadow Plane, occasionally interrupted by a wandering undead spirit that they quickly left behind under the spell’s power.

Razael couldn’t help but feel nervous. Not only because they were now technically walking through the land of lost souls, but because Madrone was now hundreds of miles behind him. Whatever else was said about him, he took his job seriously, especially when the orders came from Erito’s church. To be so far away from the woman he was supposed to be guarding was unsettling. He had to remind himself that Maddie was staying at the main temple of Erito in Noxolt, undergoing a spiritual exercise, and that he’d been directed by the high priestess of the temple that he could stand down from his duties while she was there. As to his secondary mission of watching over the Crown Princess and the Duchess, well, when Arrie gave him a direct order to accompany Kyle to Targeth rather than follow them to Vargas, he decided he’d let her hash it out with Herion. In truth, he was glad; Vargas was going to be nothing but politics and courtly nonsense; this promised to be much more entertaining.

As his mind drifted into the subject of entertainment, Razael’s gaze wandered over to Lanara, who walked next to him, also eyeing the surroundings with a mix of curiosity, awe, and apprehension. He took a few moments to study her curves, which he found helped distract him from everything else around him; he imagined that the bard had that effect on most men. Though he’d not expected to be spending his nights with the bard (his tastes were usually for his own race, though this wasn’t the first time he’d sampled the delicacies of other cultures), he found it an enjoyable pastime. The cansin was youthful enough to appeal to his attraction to that kind of innocent energy (though truthfully, from his perspective all humans and human-bloods were ‘youthful’) but seasoned enough to be able to give as good as she got.

Lanara caught Razael staring at her, and grinned, shimmying her hips a little as they walked. His lips curled into a return smile. Given her capriciousness and his cynicism, he wondered which of them would tire of the other first. Given that he expected to be around her for a long time afterward thanks to his assignment, Razael reminded himself to try and make the split amicable.

“Slow down,” Kyle called out suddenly. “We’re getting close to Aleppi.”

“Can’t we just walk through the gateway like this?” Lanara asked. “It’s only been about six hours since we left Noxolt.”

“No,” he replied. “The barrier extends into the Shadow as well. And this spell may be fast, but it isn’t terribly accurate, because it’s too hard to tell where you really are in relation to the real world. I’ll need to end the spell well outside of Aleppi so that we don’t risk slamming into the barrier.”

Lanara nodded, swallowing at the thought. Contact with Targeth’s barrier from the outside meant instant disintegration.

“Besides,” Kyle said, “I want to stop in Fingol for a day or two once we cross the river. Once we’re inside the barrier, I can try scrying my family again.”

A few minutes later the four travelers seemed to step out of nowhere, in an empty field just east of Aleppi. They walked the rest of the way in, and after reporting to the border guards, booked passage on one of the many ferries going across the Lassh River to Aleppi’s sister city in Targeth, Fingol. It was early evening by the time they found an inn, so they retired early in order to get an early start in the morning.

Kyle was already up by the time Lanara and Razael came to his room; Xu was also awake, but going through her morning exercises. Kyle sat cross-legged on the floor, sitting in front of a large silver mirror.

“What’s the story?” Razael asked.

“I’m trying to find my father, Rufus,” Kyle said, speaking slowly so as not to break his concentration.

“Any luck?” Lanara asked.

He shook his head. “It takes an hour to invoke this spell, I’m only about half finished. But I expect this to fail anyway.”

“Why?” Razael asked.

“Because my father is one generation before me,” he said. “If my generation is the first to be free of Erito’s curse, then he should still be under it, which means magic can’t touch him. But I need to confirm that. After this I’ll try my brothers and sisters.”

“Well, we can start asking questions around here, to see if there are any Goodsons in the area,” Lanara offered.

“You and Xu go ahead without me,” said Razael. “Someone should stay and keep an eye on Kyle, just in case any of those Scion-Watchers are close by.”

‘Thanks,” Kyle said, “but it’s going to be pretty dull here.”

“No worse than having to watch Madrone watch you work on the ship,” he replied.

Lanara left the room, leaving Kyle and Razael alone. About twenty minutes later, just as he predicted, Kyle finished the spell to locate his father, and nothing happened. Sighing, he reset his components and began the long ritual again, this time focused on his oldest brother Angar.

An hour later, the image in the mirror shifted and wavered. Razael glanced over and saw the image of a large man, with black hair and olive-colored skin like Kyle’s, but with a full beard and wearing dirty laborer’s clothing. The man was holding a wood rasp, carving a few simple details into a cabinet.

“That your brother?” Razael asked.

“Yes,” Kyle said, very quietly. “That’s Angar.”

It was several minutes before Kyle could speak again. Razael knelt down to watch Angar working. “So, can you tell where he is?”

“Not really. The spell only lets me see a person and their immediate surroundings. If I were going to try and find him, I’d have to cast this spell over and over again, hoping that he’d walk close to something I’d recognize. I’m just doing this to see if they’re still alive.”

“Well, could you send him a message? Or just do one of your teleports?”

“I don’t know the teleport spell, remember? I was going to buy it in M’ioch to get us through the pass, but no one seemed very keen on the idea, so I never did. As for a message… well, I have something that might work, but it’s only a fifty-fifty shot. Besides, Angar hasn’t seen me since I was eleven, and he has no idea that I’m a wizard. How would you feel if you were going about your day when all of a sudden a strange voice whispered to you, saying it know your name, that it was looking for you, and asking you to tell it where you lived?”

“I’d likely think I was either crazy or haunted,” Razael said.

“Exactly. Besides, from everything I can tell, Angar’s safe for now. Better to check on the other three first.”

Kyle sat watching his brother work until the spell ended, and then began casting a third scrying. Lanara and Xu came back to check in as he was casting, and decided to wait around for a while. Kyle finished his spell, paused, and then scowled.

“What’s wrong?” Lanara asked.

“Nothing,” he said. “When I try to find my older sister Varda, I get nothing.”

“What does that mean?” the bard asked, though she had some idea already.

“The most likely explanation is that she’s dead,” he said. “You can’t scry a corpse. But it doesn’t tell me how she died. She could have been killed by the Scion-Watchers…”

“…or been run over by a hay wagon six years ago,” Razael finished for him.

“Right. The other possibility is that she’s in an anti-magic area, but that seems unlikely.”

“Is it possible she simply resisted your spell?” Lanara asked.

“It’s possible, but not likely. Given that she’s my sister, it’d be pretty hard for me not to find her. And I’d be able to tell the difference if she’d just willed away the sensor.”

Kyle abruptly scooped up his materials and stood up. “I need a break,” he announced. “I’ll start again in a while.”

It had started to snow lightly by the time Kyle resumed his efforts that afternoon. Lanara resumed her efforts, knowing that the snow would drive people indoors. This time Xu stayed with Kyle, sitting patiently and quietly.

Her meditation was broken by the sound of Kyle cursing. The monk opened her eyes, and saw Kyle staring at the mirror.

“What is wrong?” she asked.

“Stupid. I’m an idiot.” He waved his hand at the mirror.

“I see nothing. Has this attempt failed as well?”

“No, it’s working,” Kyle snapped. “But wherever by little brother Bryant is, it’s dark – too dark to see him. I forgot to prepare a vision-enhancing spell before I started this.”

“I could try and locate Lanara for you,” Xu offered, “she can see even in total darkness.”

“It won’t work,” Kyle said. “The sensor operates based on my sensory abilities, not on whoever’s looking in the mirror.”

“Perhaps he is resting in a darkened room?” Xu offered.

Kyle shook his head. “Goodson’s don’t nap in the middle of the afternoon. Besides, even if he were, there’d be enough light around him that I could see him. When was the last time you were in a truly pitch-dark room?”

“I see. Then you fear something more sinister?”

“I don’t know what to think yet. Let me try Bryant’s twin sister Pella now.”

Kyle’s final attempt at the spell produced results similar to what he’d seen with Bryant; wherever Pella was, it was too dark to see. He explained the results to everyone over dinner.

“Now I’m worried,” he said. “Both of them in lightless rooms?”

“Could they be in prison?” Razael asked. “In an oubliette?”

“Both of them at the same time? What are the odds? And what could they have done to deserve that? Goodsons aren’t criminals.”

“Goodsons aren’t wizards, either,” Lanara pointed out, jabbing him with a finger to emphasize her point.

“Well, there’s nothing I can do until tomorrow, when I can cast a darkvision spell before scrying,” he said.

“Well, nothing promising turned up here,” Lanara said. “No one in Fingol knows any Goodsons, so it seems none of your family settled here.”

Kyle sighed. “Tomorrow we can start heading up to Farmer’s Circle, where we were born. It might be easier to track my family down from there. My spells can wait until the afternoon.”

“You sure about that?” Razael asked. “If they’re in trouble…”

“Then I can’t do anything about it, because I still don’t know where they are,” he snapped. Kyle pushed himself away from the table and left, his meal hardly touched.

They set out the next day, walking north. Kyle decided to forgo the shadow walk spell, trading speed of travel for the chance to stop at smaller towns along the way to ask about his family. They made camp early to give Kyle a chance to set up his scrying mirror.

Kyle cast the spell, this time under the effects of darkvision. As he completed the ritual, and the image in the mirror wavered and changed, he let out a cry of shock and anger.

“What is it?” Lanara asked, coming over next to him. Looking into the mirror’s surface, she saw an image of a stone room with no windows. A heavy wooden door, banded with iron, was on the far wall. Lying in the middle of the room was a man, who had obviously been severely beaten and tortured. His arms and legs were bound tightly behind him, the ropes cutting deeply into his flesh. A gag made of a thick piece of wood and leather cord was jammed into his mouth, and a heavy blindfold covered his eyes. The scene brought back painful memories for her of the time she spent as a captive of her sister Aranal, and she gasped.

Xu and Razael, who had also come over to see what was happening, saw the same image. Lanara turned and buried her face in Razael’s tunic, not really thinking about what she was doing.

“Can you tell where he is?” Razael asked.

“In a dark stone room somewhere in Targeth,” Kyle snapped. “I told you, the spell doesn’t reveal where they are unless I see something I recognize.”

Lanara looked down at Kyle, having composed herself. “What kind of stone is it? Maybe that will give you a clue as to what part of Targeth they’re in.”

In response, Kyle gestured at the image. The scene was filtered through Kyle’s darkvision, which only allowed viewing in shades of gray. It would be impossible to get the detail they would need to identify the type of stone.

“Can you send him a message?” Razael said, “Maybe rouse him into telling you where he is?”

Kyle shook his head, clearly frustrated at his helplessness. “There’s only one communication spell that will work through the scrying, and he has to be able to speak to respond. He’s gagged.”

“What about that teleport?” Razael asked.

“I don’t know that spell!” Kyle shouted. “If I did, I’d go now!”

Razael remained calm. “What if we went back to Fingol and got the spell for you?”

Kyle paused. “Yes, that would work.”

“Now, I don’t much care for the idea of teleportation,” Razael said, “but if it’s going to get your family out of there, then we’ll do it. I’ll take Lanara and go back to town, and get the spell for you. You should stay here with Xu, and use your mirror to check up on your sister.”

Kyle nodded. “I should spend more time scrying the room. The better I know where I’m going, the better chance the teleport has of working right.”

“You do that.” Razael turned to Lanara. “You ready?”

“But we just stopped for the night!” she complained. “I want to help, but I’m not going to make it all night without sleep! And I’m not exactly in the habit of long-distance running.”

The old elf sighed, and pulled out some rope. “You got them levitating boots, right? Well, tie this around your waist and turn those boots on.”

After Razael and Lanara had packed up their belongings and left, Kyle cast his spell again to find Pella. He found her in much the same state as her twin brother Bryant. Pella’s room was slightly lower, and about three inches of fetid water sat on the floor, presumably to keep her from sleeping. After studying the image in the mirror for several minutes, she rolled over, and Kyle saw that Pella was not gagged. He quickly cast another spell.

“Pella,” he whispered, “please, listen to me.”

The young woman in the mirror jerked and splashed around, as if she were looking for the source of the voice. “Leave me alone!” she cried out. “I don’t know anything about magic!”

Kyle’s jaw set. His worst fear was coming true.

“Pella, please. This is your brother, Kyle. There’s too much to explain right now. Please, just tell me where you are.”

Pella continued to thrash around weakly, clearly terrified. “I already told you everything I know! I don’t know what you want!”

Kyle swore, and for the millionth time in his life cursed his clumsy, wooden tongue. He wasn’t getting through to her, and time was running out. “Pella, just tell me anything you can, please.”

“All right! Just don’t beat me! You came and took me in the night from the farm. When I woke up, I was here.”

“Where, Pella? Where’s your farm?”

“Our farm outside of Delgan!”

Kyle swore again. Delgan was a city in western Targeth, on the other side of the country. Forcing himself to calm down, Kyle tried to think of how he could calm Pella down. An idea hit him.

“Pella,” he whispered softly, “do you remember when you were seven, during that really hot summer? We were swimming in the creek one day, just after Midsummer, and I dumped those leeches down your shirt? Remember how Pa was supposed to punish me, but he got to laughing so hard over it that Ma got mad at him too, and we both had to sleep in the barn?”

Pella’s panicked thrashing stopped. “Kyle?” she whispered, “is that really you? But… how?”

“I’ll explain later,” he said. “But I’m coming to get you soon.”

“Please hurry,” she pleaded.

“Don’t worry,” Kyle said, “I’ll be there as fast as I can. What can you tell me about…”

Kyle’s question was cut off as the scrying ended.

:):):):)! Son of a bitch!” Kyle stood up, and turned to talk to Xu. He saw the monk standing patiently, the campsite already packed up.

“I assumed after hearing your interaction with your sister that you might wish to catch up to Razael and Lanara rather than wait for them here,” she said.

“I do,” Kyle admitted, “but Razael runs faster than I do. I know you could catch him easily, but I can’t, and I don’t have any spells prepared that would make me faster.”

Xu picked up her pack, which was sitting on the ground next to her, and held it out by the strap. “Put this on,” she said, “and I will carry you.”

“Carry me? That’s ridiculous. I’m twice your size, Xu.”

The monk only smiled. “I am stronger than I appear.”



* * *



The four of them reached Fingol at the crack of dawn. Kyle paid for the first room he could find, allowing an exhausted Razael and Xu to rest, and then went with Lanara to ask about scroll-makers. There were several in town, but most people suggested Magrum, who was a mage of advanced years that tended to open earlier than most of the others.

Kyle and Lanara entered Magrum’s shop, which appeared little more than four walls and a desk. A row of pull-strings hung from the ceiling behind the desk, seemingly attached to nothing. Magrum sat at the desk, wrinkled and stooped. He peered at his two customers through spectacles.

“Oh, my,” he said, standing slowly. “Don’t usually get customers this early.”

“We’re in a bit of a rush,” Lanara explained.

“I’m looking for a teleport scroll,” Kyle said.

“Ah, teleport, yes. Well, let me see if I have that spell on hand.” The old man shuffled to the back of the shop, and contemplated the pull-strings for a while before grabbing one and tugging. From an extradimensional space in the ceiling, a long strip of cloth dropped down, with several dozen pockets sewn into it. Parchment rolls were stuffed into each pocket.

“Let’s see here,” Magrum said to himself. “T… T… Tenser? No…”

The wizard poked through the scrolls at what seemed a snail’s pace, occasionally pulling one out, reading it, then putting it back. Kyle paced back and forth in the tiny shop as Magrum pulled down another row of scrolls.

“Can we help you look?” Lanara offered.

“No, no, I have a system,” Magrum said. “I look until I find it. Was it Terra Cotta Warrior?”

“No,” Kyle said through clenched teeth, “teleport.”

“Aha!” Magrum said, pulling out a roll of parchment, “here it is!” He shuffled back to the desk, unrolling the scroll and laying it down long enough for Kyle to confirm it was the correct spell. He then rolled it back up and dropped it into a simple bamboo tube.

“I don’t suppose you’re having a sale?” Lanara asked. “We’re rather short on funds, you see.” She had launched into her usual routine out of habit, unaware that Kyle was looking impatiently at the back of her head, not wanting to waste time haggling.

“Well, I do charge the standard fees, plus a little to make a living on,” crooned Magrum. “After all, making scrolls does take more than my time. I’m willing to discuss a price, if you like.”

“Look,” Kyle said, “if it helps, we’re going to be using the spell to go eradicate a bunch of magic-hating cultists.”

“Really?” Magrum asked, peering at Kyle over his spectacles. “Well, in that case, I can offer it to you for one thousand gold.”

“Done.” Kyle reached into his belt, pulled out a sack, and slapped a handful of coins onto the desk. Kyle snatched up the scroll as Magrum scooped the coins into his robes. “Thank you.”

“Pleasure doing business with you,” Magrum said as they went out the door.

They met up with Razael and Xu a few minutes later. “So, we need to do anything special to get ready?” Razael asked.

“Just stay close,” Kyle said, as he started to unroll the scroll. Then he paused, looked around, and let the parchment close. “This isn’t right,” he said. “I’m letting my feelings run away with me.”

“But you saw your sister in the hands of those Scion-Watchers,” Razael said. “Now you don’t want to go?”

“Of course I do! But I have no idea what to expect once we’re there. And we’ve all been up all night, and you two have been running that whole time. Are you seriously telling me you’re ready to jump into battle? And all I have prepared for spells are divinations and such. I loaded up all my higher valances with scrying spells. Not to mention that I haven’t even used most of them, which means I don’t have a good sense of where to teleport us to.”

“All right, Kyle,” Lanara said, “so now what?”

“Now, we rest for a day,” he said. “I finish using up my scrying spells on Pella, to study our arrival point. I can also use the time to actually learn teleport rather than just use the scroll, so that I don’t have to lay out another thousand gold the next time I want to do this. Then I can sleep, prepare new spells, and then we go. If the Scion-Watchers try anything with Pella before then, I’ll know about it, and we can go early if we have to.”
“That’s fine, Kyle,” Lanara said. “It’s your decision. We’ll go tomorrow.”

The four of them spent the day resting and making other preparations while Kyle studied spells and cast scryings. After a night of fitful sleep, he awoke, spent an hour going over his spellbook, and then joined his companions, who were armed and ready.

“Look, before we go,” Kyle said. “I want you all to know that I appreciate your help.”

“Think nothing of it, Kyle,” Razael said. “Like I said back at the Library, the only way to deal with fanatics is to eradicate them.”

Kyle nodded his understanding. “I still hope that I can find another way, but I understand where you’re coming from. Now, everyone hold hands and get ready.”

Kyle summoned up arcane energy as the others linked hands. “And I’m sorry if I end up killing us all in a horrible Ethereal Plane accident,” Kyle said.

A look of alarm crossed Razael’s face. Now wait just a…”



* * *

They appeared in darkness. Lanara, who could still see, looked around and quickly spotted the bound form of Pella, huddled against a wall laying in fetid water. She moved quickly to her side and started untying her even as Kyle summoned up a faint light. Pella squirmed against the wall at first, startled by the strange noise of the teleportation and then the sounds of people approaching. The sight of a strange, pink-haired woman hovering over her didn’t help. It wasn’t until Kyle came over and knelt down next to Lanara that she stopped struggling.

“Kyle?” she gasped, “is it really you?” Her eyes went wide at the sight of a brother she hadn’t seen in fifteen years. A mix of emotions played across her face, as she took in the sight of Kyle, his strange companions, the expensive-looking robes he wore, the glimmering ball of light in his hand…

Pella’s hands, now freed from their bonds, clutched protectively across her chest. Her clothing was ripped and soiled, barely covering her. Razael quickly produced one of his spare camouflage outfits and draped it across her shoulders.

“Who… how…”

Kyle took Pella’s hand and squeezed it tightly. “I’ll explain, Pella, I promise. But not now. We have to find out way out of here. Have you seen Bryant?”

“Bryant?” Pella looked around at everyone. “No, I haven’t. Is he here? Oh, dear Bles, I hope they don’t have him too.”

“We’ll get him out, I promise,” Kyle said. “What about Angar or Varda? Do you know where they live? What about Pa?”

Pella shook her head. “Kyle, why are they doing this?”

Kyle opened his mouth to speak, but no words came out. He was unable to speak, not only because of the vow he’d taken at the Library, but because of the sheer enormity of what he would have to tell her. “I can’t explain it,” he said at last, “but it’s not because of anything you’ve done. If anything, it’s because of me.”

Kyle stood, helping Pella to her feet, as Razael came back from checking the door. “It’s unlocked,” he said. “Seems they weren’t too afraid of the little gal escaping.”

“I suggest we leave quietly, find Bryant, and get them out of here before dealing with the Scion-Watchers,” Kyle said.

Nodding, Razael went to the door and opened it, hoping to take a quick glance outside. Standing just outside the door were a pair of skeletons, one on each side. Razael had been listening for guard earlier, but hadn’t counted on undead guards. Nevertheless, his reactions were much faster than the undead guardians, and within seconds had smashed both into bone powder.

“I didn’t make a lot of noise,” he said. “I think we’re safe.”

The party moved out into the hallway, Kyle supporting Pella. They found themselves in a short corridor, with several doors and side passages in view. Torches flickered on the walls in sconces, providing dim light. Razael moved over to the left, and peered inside a doorway that looked similar to Pella’s cell. Inside, he saw stacks of supplies, perhaps enough to provide for a large family for a summer. He glanced at the piles of cloth, rope, and dry wood.

“Hey, Kyle,” the tracker whispered, “want a distraction?”

Kyle came over and looked at the supplies. “Good idea,” he said, “but wait until we have Bryant and are on our way out. No sense ‘distracting’ them right to where we’re standing.”

Meanwhile, Lanara had gone to check another door to the right, set in the opposite wall. Opening it a crack, she saw light spilling out. The room beyond was relatively posh, with thick carpeting on the floor and a fire crackling in the fireplace. Though she couldn’t see anyone inside, she heard someone moving as though they were lying on a bed or couch, and she heard the sound of pages being turned.

The bard must have lingered for a moment too long, for suddenly a female voice called out, “Hello? Is someone there?”

Lanara froze. She hadn’t expected to attract attention. While she weighed her options, the voice called out again.

“Ixara, is that you?”

Lanara swallowed, said a quick prayer to Feesha and Ladta, and answered. “Yeah.” A lack of response now would have certainly given the woman cause to come to the door to investigate.

“Come in, come in.”

Biting her lower lip, Lanara stepped into the room. Laying on the bed, propped up, was a human woman reading a book. A suit of plate armor and a morningstar hung from a stand in the corner.

There was a brief pause. “You’re up early,”

“I was just heading to the kitchen.” It was a ridiculous thing to say, but so was anything else she might have uttered.

Another pause. “Come here.”

“You know, I have things I need to do,” Lanara said loudly, starting to inch toward the door. Outside, Kyle and Razael heard her.

“I think we need that distraction now, Raz,” Kyle said.

“I’m sure you do,” the woman on the bed said, “but you’re going to approach, instead.”

Lanara felt the energy of a spell try to seep into her mind at the word approach. She shook it off, and the urge to walk right up to the woman on the bed faded.

“No, really, I have to leave now.”

In response, the woman gestured, and a pillar of flame dropped on Lanara’s head.

Xu, who was in the hall near the door, jumped back as flames shot out of the doorway. Pella screamed, and Kyle pushed her back into the cell and told her to remain quiet, casting a displacement spell on her just to be safe. Razael emerged from the supply room, black smoke already starting to trickle out. He notched a trio of arrows and began scanning the hallways. A door opened, and a goblin head poked out. Razael fired, but the goblin was quick, and ducked back into the room, leaving Razael’s three arrows buried in the wooden doorframe. Then the goblin charged out as Razael reloaded, a rapier in hand. The goblin went after Razael with gusto, giving him a few minor cuts.

Meanwhile, Kyle and Xu waited outside the door as Lanara came running out, singed but not as badly hurt as she might have been. While the bard ducked back inside the cell with Pella to guard her, Xu and Kyle waited for whoever was inside to emerge. When no one came out, Kyle charged in. He saw the woman in the corner of the room, a robe draped over her shoulders and a helmet on her head, with a morningstar gripped in both hands.

“I hear you’re looking for Goodsons!” Kyle snarled, and launched a beam of negative energy at her. The ray hit her full in the chest, and the woman screamed as her life-force was ripped away. In response, the woman summoned up a beam of white light, which scorched Kyle’s stomach and hip. As the light from her spell faded away, Xu leapt into the room and began pounding on the woman, sending her off-balance and reeling.

“Back up!” Kyle shouted, unleashing a web spell as soon as the monk tumbled away. The sticky strands enveloped the cleric, trapping her. She struggled against the webbing, but it held fast.

“What should we do with her?” Xu asked.

“Watch her, make sure she doesn’t get out. I’m going after my brother.”

As Kyle dashed off, Xu watched as the woman thrashed against the web. The monk could see that she had a chance of breaking out, though a small one.

“Hold still,” Xu growled, but the cleric continued to struggle. Finally, Xu waded into the webbing, her magical ring keeping her from being entangled, and landed several solid blows into the woman’s ribs and stomach until she stopped struggling.

“You were warned,” Xu said.

“Why?” the woman said. “Why do you help him? Why do you aid that abomination, that foul practitioner of magic? Why not strike down one who would defy Erito’s will?”

Xu tried to respond, but felt the magic of her vow bind her words. There was nothing she could say to explain how wrong this woman was. Xu felt a cold fury well up inside her, anger at seeing such arrogance, such blindness be the cause of so much suffering. Willing her magical bracers to sheathe her hands in electricity, Xu allowed her anger to express itself.

Razael’s battle with the goblin was going well. Though the creature was nimble, and skilled with the rapier, he had yet to land a serious blow. Several arrows stuck out of the goblin’s body, and he was bleeding heavily. Lanara had also come out of hiding, and was using her whip to good effect, knocking the goblin off his feet to keep his rapier from opening more holes in Razael. Finally, with a yelp, the goblin dashed off down the hall.

“We’ve got a runner!” he shouted. At first he was content to let the little cretin go, so he could help with whoever was behind the other door, but then a thought struck him; the goblin might be going to kill the prisoners. Cursing, Razael ran off after him. Rounding the corner, he barely caught sight of the goblin, well ahead and running for all he was worth.

Kyle emerged from the room, and gave a nod to Lanara, who was helping Pella out of her cell again. He turned and began heading the opposite direction that he had last seen Razael, assuming the elf could account for himself, and still needing to find his brother and deal with any other Scion-Watchers. Lanara and Pella followed right behind; Pella somewhat disoriented by the fact that the pink-haired woman kept talking to her as if she was four feet away from where she was actually standing.

Kyle came to an intersection, and looked around, trying to decide which of the several doors to try first. Then he caught movement out of the corner of his eye, and turned to see a goblin run into another intersection at the far end of the hallway. The goblin had several of Razael’s arrows sticking out of it, and as he watched another one landed in the goblin’s shoulder. Ignoring the injuries, the goblin opened a nearby door and dashed inside. Kyle wondered for a moment why the goblin would choose to trap itself in a room, but then had the same shocking flash of realization as Razael had. Kyle turned and bolted down the corridor, slamming his shoulder into the door just before it closed. The room inside was dark, and the goblin stood in one corner. In the other was a bound form, gagged and blindfolded. Kyle quickly interposed himself between the two.

The goblin sneered at him, still bleeding heavily. Suddenly, the door burst open again, and Razael came through, bow drawn. Several things happened at once. The goblin launched himself forward, spinning close past Razael. The move forced the elf to take a step back to fire, which caused his arm to slam into the frame of the door. The arrows skittered uselessly off the far wall. Then the goblin changed direction suddenly and launched himself at Kyle. The wizard grabbed for him, but at the last second he shoulder-rolled out of his grasp and came up next to the bound form on the floor. Drawing his rapier, the goblin screeched triumphantly, a gleam of religious fervor in his eye.

“For the Cleansing!”

The point of the rapier came down, piercing Bryant Goodson’s heart. He stiffened, then went limp.

For Kyle, it was as if the world stopped for the space of a heartbeat. All reason was shattered. The goblin could have escaped. He could have fled. Instead, he chose… this. All the doubt and uncertainties that had been plaguing Kyle for weeks suddenly melted away into insignificance, replaced by a red haze.

Screaming, Kyle pointed at the goblin and spat words of power. The goblin’s form vanished, reduced to a fine powder. Kyle was unaware that Lanara and Pella had come into the room right behind him. Pella gave out a cry as she saw her twin’s body on the floor. Lanara began to move to comfort Kyle, but then heard a noise coming from the hallway behind her. Turning, she saw a goblin trying to sneak up on them, a pair of daggers in his hands. Lanara dashed out of the room and struck at the goblin with her rapier.

“I need some help!” she called out, as the goblin slashed back at her.

Razael heard the call, and looked at Kyle, who was still staring at the spot where the goblin once stood.

“Help her,” Kyle said in a low voice. “I will deal with the rest.”

Razael nodded, and ran out of the room. Kyle looked at his sister, who was still just inside the door. He walked up to her, and pressed a dagger into her hand.

“Stay here,” he said. “Cut him loose.” With that, he stalked off, turning down another hallway.

Between Razael and Lanara, they made short work of the goblin, who was nowhere near as skilled a combatant as the first. Razael turned to the bard.

“Go back and get Pella, take her back to where Xu is. I’ll find Kyle.”

The tracker went off, backtracking to the room where Kyle’s brother had been killed. He glanced in quickly to see Lanara helping Pella cut the ropes on the body. Then he went down the other hall, knowing it was the only way Kyle could have gone.

He came across the first goblin just around the corner, burned until it was nearly unrecognizable. The second was only a few yards further on. The pitiful creature was writhing on the floor as if its blood were on fire.

“Help me,” the goblin screeched. “Please, make it stop!”

Razael stepped past the goblin and moved on. He turned two more corners before he finally saw Kyle. He was about to call out to the wizard when he saw another goblin charge out of a door behind Kyle, a curved dagger in his hand. Kyle turned toward the screaming goblin, but made no move to avoid its attack. Instead, he caught the goblin by the throat as it charged in, slamming it against the wall. The goblin’s blade sliced into Kyle’s arm, but he seemed not to notice. Razael heard Kyle intoning a spell, and suddenly the hand around the goblin’s throat was limned in an electrical field. The goblin screeched and began twitching, but Kyle’s grip never wavered.

Razael decided to backtrack and rejoin the others about the time that smoke started to seep out of the goblin’s ears. He found everyone in the room where Lanara had been hit with the flame strike. A woman trapped in a web was slumped over, unconscious, and Xu stood nearby. Lanara was helping Pella lay Bryant’s body on the bed.

“What happened to her?” Razael asked, nodding toward the woman.

“She was warned to remain quiet,” was all Xu said.

“Too bad,” snorted Lanara. “She owes me.”

“No,” Razael said, “she owes Kyle.”



* * *



The interrogation of the woman was brief. Lanara led the questioning, with Kyle watching. They’d already pulled everything valuable or useful they could out of the complex, which turned out to be an abandoned Targethian military outpost. Among the items rescued were several carrier pigeons, which were apparently used to send messages to other cells of the Scion-Watchers.

The leader of this particular cell gave them useful information. She revealed that she was one of several cells of the order, and that they operated independently, sending reports to each other. She didn’t know where any of the other cells were, nor did she know the location or identity of the Arcanamach. She also revealed that to her knowledge, none of the other Goodsons had been found. She was also completely unremorseful over the death of Bryant, and made it clear she would gladly see both Pella and Kyle dead as well. No one asked the priestess her name; it was deemed an irrelevant detail.

“Well,” Razael said, when they had asked their last questions, “the only thing left to decide, Kyle, is how slow do you want her to die, and do you want to watch?”

Kyle stood silently, glaring down at the woman. He was torn, but not in the way he expected. There was no question that he wanted her dead, that he wanted her to suffer. But alive, she could serve a greater use. Kyle contemplated the dilemma while his mind regarded one of the spells he had prepared. A dark spell, gleaned from the spellbook of the necromancer Neville. One that would bring death to this woman, certainly, but would also carry that death to others of her sect.

Razael interpreted Kyle’s silence as uncertainty. “I’ve skinned people before, you know,” he said. “It’s quick… but it doesn’t have to be.” He was about to say more, when he felt a tugging at his back. He turned in time to see Pella running toward the woman, one of his arrows in her hand. Razael caught her and held her back as she screamed.

“Let me go! I want to kill her! I want to hurt her!”

“Easy now, girl,” Razael said, pulling the arrow gently out of her grasp. “You don’t want to do it like that.” Glancing at the arrow, and noticing the dark stain on the head, he added, “especially not with that arrow.”

Razael knelt down, helping Pella down as well. He pulled out a very thin blade. “Now, if’n you want her to suffer, you want to start here.” Razael grabbed the cleric’s bare foot, and slid the blade under her large toenail. Blood poured out of the wound, and the woman screamed. Lanara just looked Razael, and Xu observed the woman, both of their expressions unreadable.

Kyle heard the woman’s agony. He saw as Razael began to slowly twist the blade. He saw the eager gleam in Pella’s eyes.

Kyle reached into a pocket and pulled out a wand, blasting the priestess with magic missiles. Razael and Pella jumped back as the woman tried to rise, then slumped to the earth.

“Why?” she said weakly, looking up at Kyle. “Why do you defy Her will?”

“Ask Her yourself,” Kyle said, and then unleashed another barrage of missiles, until she stopped moving.

“Aw,” Razael said, standing up and putting away his blade. “What fun was that?”

Kyle grabbed Razael’s arm. “I will not have my sister turned into a monster,” he hissed, then loosened his grip and stalked off.

Razael was about to call after him, to tell him he was being naïve, that a cruel world demanded cruel choices. But then he felt another hand on his arm.

“Don’t,” Lanara said, her eyes unusually hard and insistent. “Don’t even try it.”



* * *



Lanara woke up the next day, far too early for her tastes. Of course, by her tastes, waking up any time before the sun crossed the midpoint of the sky was ‘too early’.

She lay huddled under heavy blankets, warding off the cold air of winter. After their trek to the south pole, she never wanted to be cold again. Despite the fact that a Targethian winter was no comparison to the frigid polar environment, Lanara still felt like she couldn’t stop shivering.

She heard the tent flap open, and felt a cold wind creep inside the tent and shoot straight under her blankets.

“Shut the door!” she shouted.

She heard the flap close, and felt someone lay down next to her. “Are you cold this morning, lass?”

“Freezing,” she said, “shouldn’t you be doing something about that?”

“Might be I could help,” Razael said, “with the proper persuasion.”

Lanara normally would have instantly risen to the bait and matched his banter, but this morning didn’t feel like wasting the time. She decided to go straight for his weakness.

Lanara rolled over in her bedding, while concentrating on her Talent. When she looked up at Razael, she looked like a very youthful, golden-haired elven maiden. She noticed that Razael had already disrobed before laying next to her. So much for hard-to-get.

“Persuasive enough?” she asked.

“Aye, lass,” he said with a grin, “you drive a hard bargain.”

Lanara looked Razael up and down, and couldn’t resist one bit of hackneyed banter. “Looks like you do, too.”

Afterward, as they lay together, blankets pushed off into the far corner of the tent, Lanara rolled over next to Razael. His presence was reassuring, in a way. Pushing strands of pink hair out of her face (her ‘nubile elf maiden’ guise having faded long before), she raised herself up on one elbow to look at him.

“So, I take it Kyle’s gone, then?”

Razael laughed. “Well, if it was Kyle you wanted warming your bed this morning, you should have said something earlier.”

“Hmm, tempting,” Lanara said, “but I don’t want the last thing I see in this world to be the head of a greataxe, if you catch my drift.”

“Aye, lass.”

“Besides, you know what I mean.”

“He left with Xu and Pella this morning before sunrise,” Razael said. “They took Bryant’s body, too. He’ll try to get their families to go with him back to Vargas, to protect them from the Scion-Watchers.”

“Think he’ll have any luck?” Lanara asked.

“Maybe,” the elf said, “but it’s a rough trail, to be sure. Kyle’s family, but family they’ve not seen in fifteen years. And farm folk can be plenty stubborn when it comes to leaving their homes.”

“Maybe I should have gone with him,” Lanara mused.

“I think it was something he was wanting to do on his own,” Razael said. “At any rate, no matter what he’ll take his brother’s body back to Vargas to try and get him raised there, and to get the others to come here to help.”

“And what do we do?” Lanara asked.

“Other than keep each other warm? We keep an eye on that outpost, see if any of the other cells come to see what happened here. We go through the papers we pulled out of the cell leader’s chambers, to see if they lead us anywhere. We intercept any messenger pigeons replying to Kyle’s message.”

Lanara reached over to her pile of belongings and snatched up a piece of parchment near the top. She unfolded it and read it again.



To the ignorant fanatics known as the Scion-Watchers;



This message contains three things – some helpful information, a request, and a warning. The information is that there is indeed a Goodson that practices arcane magic – me. I am the only one in my family so gifted. Of course, if any of you had the sense Erito granted a swamp rat, you would already know this. Clearly, the goblins are the intellect driving this little sect.

The request I ask is this: all cells of the Scion-Watchers are to immediately disband, and its members report to the nearest church of Erito to seek forgiveness for their deeds. The Arcanamach is to seek me out, and offer a personal apology on their knees for the pain and suffering they have caused my family. The Arcanamach is then to relinquish the title and spend the rest of their lives tending to diseased swine.

Finally, my warning. If you do not comply with my request, and continue to pursue those of my blood needlessly, then your fate will be the same as those who I found here.

- Kyle Goodson, Wizard



She smiled as she read it. “I still can’t believe he had it in him,” she said.

“You saw how he sealed them before he sent the pigeons off, right?” Razael asked.

“No, how?”

“He sealed each one with wax using that priestess’ signet ring, just like she probably did,” he said. “Then he put his own mark right over the top of that with magic.”

Lanara cackled with glee. “Beautiful,” she said, “nice touch. Think it’ll work?”

“Well, let’s see. He just told a fanatical cult that he’s destroyed one of their cells, that he has no respect for their beliefs, and basically told them to go :):):):) themselves. Yeah, I think it’ll work.”

Lanara’s tone became serious. “Think we can handle it?”

Razael paused before answering. “Yup.”

“Think he can handle it?”

This time, the pause was longer. “We’ll see.”

The cansin sighed, then shivered as she felt the cold winter air begin to creep back into the tent. “It’s going to be a cold winter,” she said.

“Aye, lass,” Razael said. “Colder for some than for others.”
 

Delemental

First Post
Uneasy Lies the Head

Okay, now that I'm all caught up from the crash, here's a brand-new update for you.

----------------------------

Xu Dhii Ngao sat outside the simple wattle and daub home, and sought a place of inner calm. A calm she knew did not exist inside.

Smoke curled from the chimney of the small building, wafting off into the sky on the wind. Occasionally, the cold winter wind would gust, sending the smoke flying off. Xu noted the cold, though it hardly seemed to bother her. At her feet, chickens scrabbled for tiny specks of grain and seed, and the smell of manure mingled with the smoke.

The sound and smells around her reminded Xu of her time at the monastery, back in Xhintai. Revered spirits, she thought, the monastery…I am so far from there now, in many ways.

The hardships of life at the monastery had been a far cry from the relative comfort she enjoyed before that, as the daughter of a prominent merchant. Not quite as opulent as what Ariadne and Autumn knew as children, but decadent as opposed to the humble farm where she was now.

Comfortable, yes, but a life that held its own troubles. She could attest to that personally – in a land where the power of the merchant class was rising, and where social advancement by marriage was still in practice, Xu was as much a commodity as the silks and spices her father traded in. But silks and spices never sneak out of the house the night before their wedding, never to be seen again.

Xu allowed her thoughts to wander as they wished – clearly obtaining a state of tranquil nothingness was eluding her. Her mind went briefly to Lord Hungai, the warlord who apparently was willing to pursue her to the ends of the earth. She wondered how his absence from their homeland would affect his reputation with the Emperor. Poorly enough, she hoped, that he might be persuaded to give up his search for her and return home. The thought brought her a measure of peace, but it was tempered by the knowledge that if Hungai had been persistent enough to follow her here, then it would never be safe for her to return to Xhintai. And her family’s fate…

A small tear trickled down Xu’s cheek. It would have been an unforgivable lapse in discipline had her companions been present, but she was currently alone; the only other member of their group was inside, trying to explain to people he had never met how their husband and father had died, and why they must now abandon what little they had in this world in order to protect their own lives.

The monk’s concentration was broken by the sound of hoofbeats in the distance. Focusing on the sound, she began to pick up details. A single rider, coming toward the farm. Riding fast, but not at a gallop. It was a large horse, bearing a heavy load.

Xu remained still. If it was an enemy, let them think she was oblivious to their approach. But it seemed unlikely – if they were to be attacked here, surely their enemies would have sent greater numbers, or made an effort to conceal their approach. Unless the one approaching was puissant enough to need neither numbers or stealth to defeat them.

The winter sun glinted off of heavy armor, reflecting cold light toward Xu. Studying the approaching figure, she noted that the rider’s shape was odd, yet familiar. When the rider reached the low fence surrounding the farmland, he spurred his steed to jump over it. As they came down, the metal plates in the armor flared and bounced, and Xu realized why she’d had the impression she did – the armor was styled like that of her homeland. Once the rider came close enough that she could tell that the metal plates of the armor were forged from adamantium, she identified the rider.

The armored man slowed his horse to a walk as he came close to the house. Seeing Xu, he directed the mount toward her, stopping a few feet away. He pulled the helmet off his head, and they looked at each other for a few moments silently.

“Greetings, Xu Dhii Ngao,” the man said in Xhintai.

Xu nodded. “Greetings, Togusa.”

* * *​

Kyle sat in the far corner of the single-room home, trying to give the others in the room space to talk quietly. His sister-in-law, a red-haired woman named Felia, sat stone-faced, the dried tracks of tears running like scars down her dirt-stained cheeks. Across from her was Pella Goodson, (Stovich, Kyle reminded himself, it’s Pella Stovich now. She’s been married five years.) who spoke quietly with Felia, her burned and scarred hands resting gently on top of Felia’s calloused ones. At their feet, two children played; Felia’s three year old son, Connor, and Pella’s two year old daughter, Anjele. Felia and Bryant’s other two children were outside, tending to their chores, while Pella and Vigo’s three older progeny waited with their father in the wagon outside. Pella talked to Felia, comforting her while at the same time urging her to come with them to safety. His sister had a gift with words he lacked, which almost seemed to defy the usual Goodson tendencies toward social awkwardness.

As he waited, Kyle reflected on the past few days. On meeting nephews and nieces that he hadn’t known he existed until then, except in the occasional story told by their parents about their own childhood. But those children didn’t look on him as ‘Uncle Kyle’. They didn’t see the familiar dark hair, the piercing blue-gray eyes that marked him as one of their kin. Instead they saw blue robes, expensive rings, a staff with a glowing crystal. They saw a wizard; someone to respect, and to fear. Even Pella’s eyes showed the same reverent caution when she looked at him. They hadn’t spoken much, since she had been rescued from the Scion-Watchers – Kyle hadn’t pressed the issue. What did you say to a sister you hadn’t seen since you were eleven, especially when you come back as something completely outside of her realm of understanding?

He was so deep in thought that at first he didn’t notice that Pella and Felia had stopped talking, and were looking at him. When he did see them, the first thing he noticed was that they were both waiting for him, not daring to disturb him. If it had been anyone else in the family, he reflected, they would’ve knocked them on the head with a wooden spoon for woolgathering.

“I’ve spoken with Felia, Kyle,” Pella said. “She sees the danger that this cult would bring on her children. She’s agreed to come with us to Tlaxan.”

Kyle smiled. “I’m glad to hear it.” He’d been worried that either Pella or Bryant’s families would refuse to leave. Farmers, especially farmers with their own land, could be defiantly stubborn when it came to abandoning that land. “We can leave as soon as you’re ready. Once we’re in Vargas, I’ll see to getting you somewhere to stay until something more permanent can be arranged. I’ll see that Bryant’s taken care of, too.”

Felia looked at Kyle, tears rimming her eyes again. “I still can’t believe… you really think you can bring him back?”

“Not me,” Kyle said. He’d tried to explain it before, but people like Felia were only exposed to the most minor of magics, and didn’t understand enough to differentiate between arcane and divine powers. “But I can arrange for someone else to try it. I can’t guarantee it’ll work, Felia, but the least I can do is make it possible. I’m sure that my fiancée will be able to have everything ready by the time we get there.”

“You mean Lady Autumn?” Pella asked. “You’re really marrying a duchess, Kyle?”

“Yes, well, as soon as I can, yes,” he stammered, “and she wasn’t a duchess when we met, you know.”

Pella just stared at him for a moment, as if she still couldn’t believe the idea of a Goodson marrying into nobility. “I’ll stay here and help Felia get her things together,” she said eventually. “why don’t you go tell Vigo and the kids what’s going on, and see if the kids will come in later to help us fix something for dinner?”

Kyle nodded, and stood up. He ducked his head as he walked out to avoid hitting the doorframe. He stood just inside the entry, adjusting to the cold outside, and took a long look around the farm.

This was no longer his world. It hadn’t been for some time, now.

Walking around toward the wagon, Kyle spotted two figures kneeling in the dirt, facing each other. He recognized both, but one surprised him.

“Togusa?”

The Xhintai warrior, nodded, and stood. “Greetings, Kyle Goodson,” he said. “Allow me to express my sorrow at the loss of your brother. Xu has been telling me of your unfortunate encounter with this cult. Know that should I encounter any of their cells elsewhere, I will be certain to investigate them thoroughly and administer justice if needed.”

“Thanks, Togusa,” Kyle said. “But what brings you way out here? If we were in a city, I’d chalk it up to coincidence, but Bryant’s farm isn’t even near the main road.”

“Indeed, my arrival here is with purpose,” Togusa announced. “I was given a missive to deliver a message to this place at this time. Though I was not told who the recipient of the message would be, when I saw Xu sitting in meditation here, I knew the message must be intended for The Legacy.”

“What message? Who sent you?”

Xu stood up and handed Kyle a scroll. “It’s from the Dreamlord,” she said.

“Aran,” Kyle said, naming the ever more mysterious psion that had taken an interest in them. He unrolled the scroll, and saw unfamiliar symbols on the page.

“It is written in Xhintai,” Xu said. “I believe that Aran uses our native language in his communications to us as a protection, knowing that I can read it, but that few who might intercept the message could do the same.”

“What’s it say?” Kyle asked.

Xu took the scroll from Kyle and scanned it. “Honorable Warriors and Sages of The Legacy, upon whom the Thousand Blessings of the Myriad Spirits Descend, from the Dreamlord, Master of All that is Unseen, I send…”

“Can you just sum it up for me?” Kyle said testily.

“Of course,” Xu said, “Understand that in Xhintai it is difficult to be ‘brief’.” She rolled up the scroll and tucked it in her belt. “It is a request from Aran, asking for our help. Apparently, there is a councilman in the nearby city of Delgan, a man by the name of Gil Mendes. Within the next week, without further intervention, it will be revealed by another party that Councilman Mendes is a…” she hesitated as she glanced at Togusa, who was not privy to their knowledge of psionics, and was also loyal to the church of Tor. “Very damaging information will be revealed that will unjustly place the councilman’s life in danger. Aran wishes to protect this man, but has no loyal operatives nearby in a position to intervene. He states that we are not under any obligation to help this man, but promises an exchange of favors at a later date should we accept.”

“I was informed,” Togusa said, “that I should remain here and see if you might require my assistance. If this councilman is a just man, and these accusations false, then it would be in Tor’s interest for me to aid you.”

Kyle looked back and forth at Xu and Togusa. “You know, this is really bad timing.”

“Trouble seldom waits until a convenient moment,” Xu said. “But perhaps there is an unseen benefit. This councilman may need to be relocated or hidden, and will certainly owe us an obligation. Perhaps your family could be hidden with him, or he could be persuaded to help protect your family from harm.”

Kyle sighed. “I need a minute to think.” He turned and walked a short distance away, leaning on the railing of the corral. He ended up taking several minutes before returning.

“All right,” Kyle said. “Let’s do it. I need to protect my family, but I also need a chance to talk to Aran again, and this might be the only way I can arrange it. We’ll have to find some place to keep Bryant’s body in the city until we can get to Vargas.”

“We may be able to contact a priest in the city who can attempt to raise your brother from the dead,” Xu offered.

“Maybe. At any rate, we’ll need to go get Lanara and Razael.” Kyle turned to Togusa. “You said you’re willing to help?”

“How may I be of service?” the samurai asked.

“Will you remain here and protect my family while Xu and I go get out other companions and bring them back?” he asked. “After that, we’d like you to come with us to Delgan.”

“I understand,” Togusa said. “I have never been to Delgan, but I understand it is a lawless city.”

“It’s the armpit of Targeth,” Kyle said.

* * *​

Xu and Kyle made it back to the old outpost that the Scion-Watchers had occupied within half a day. There had been no activity at the site, other than scavengers, and the records pulled out of the outpost had proven remarkably information-free. Xu explained the message from Aran, and that they’d decided to help. Though it took some effort to convince Razael why doing a favor for Aran was in their interest, soon all four were speeding back to Bryant’s farm.

Everyone was ready to go the next day. They were forced to travel at a normal speed, thanks to the wagon and the fact that Kyle didn’t think his younger nieces and nephews would appreciate a trip through the Shadow Plane. Fortunately, Bryant’s farm was close to the city. Kyle rented out an entire inn on the outskirts of town, the Stag and Boar, for his family to stay in, making sure everyone would stay warm and well fed. Lanara went straight to the town hall, and made an appointment to see Councilman Mendes later that afternoon (thanks to her considerable charms, she wasn’t even required to pay the standard ten silver bribe to the clerk). Togusa again offered to guard Kyle’s family, while the rest of the party went off in search of the local clergy.

A few inquiries told them that the only church in town large enough to have priests capable of meeting their needs was the Halls of Fortune, the temple of Ladta. The temple was near the center of town, and was unusually well kept and free of refuse compared to surrounding buildings.

An acolyte greeted the party at the entrance. “How may Ladta change your fortunes this day?” the young man said brightly.

Kyle sighed at the heavy dose of naïve religious enthusiasm, while Lanara stepped forward. “We’d like a chance to speak with your high priest,” she said. “It’s a most urgent matter requiring divine intercession at the highest levels.”

“Oh, I see,” said the acolyte. “Well, if you wish to speak with the Fatemaster, he’s over there, practicing his juggling.”

The acolyte pointed across the vestibule at a middle-aged cansin with a slight paunch and bright green skin, who was smiling as he juggled nine razor-sharp chakram for a small crowd. He did not break his rhythm as the party approached him, but smiled warmly.

“Welcome to the Halls of Fortune,” he said. “I am Fatemaster Zhul. How may Ladta change your fortunes?”

“Good morning, Fatemaster,” Lanara said. “My name is Lanara Rahila, and this is…”

“You’re The Legacy, I know,” Zhul said. “Rumors that you were looking for a priest to perform a raising reached us about half an hour ago.”

“Oh, I see,” Lanara said. “So, can you do it?”

“Well, tell me about the person you need raised,” the Fatemaster asked. He caught the chakram he was juggling and put them away, them clasped his hands in front of him reverently. “One of your group?”

“No,” Kyle said, “my brother.”

“Is he an adventurer, too?”

“He’s a farmer, actually,” Kyle admitted.

“Oh, I see. That does complicate things a bit. You see, normally I don’t question too much when adventurers come to us requesting one of their companions be brought back – as long as they can make a suitable donation, of course. You see, I do have to keep the interests of my goddess in mind. But I figure that anyone who makes a living as an adventurer has to rely on luck quite a bit, so I don’t think Ladta would object to intervening on their behalf. But a farmer? Well, not much luck in their lives, wouldn’t you agree?”

Kyle’s jaw clenched. “Are you saying you won’t do it?”

“No, no,” Zhul said, holding up his hands. “It’s not that I’m unwilling. But it’s Ladta that has to agree to intervene with Erito on your brother’s behalf. And she has her own interests to look out for. One could say that by bringing your brother back from the dead, he would be denying fate. It would go against everything she represents. I wouldn’t want to take your hard-won gold to perform the ceremony, only to have Ladta deny you.

“Now, if your brother died due to some occurrence of gross misfortune, then it could be said that he died due to an imbalance of fortune, which would need to be corrected. How did your brother die? Was he struck by lightning? Hit by a meteor?”

“He was stabbed in the heart with a rapier,” Kyle said grimly. He was beginning to get tired of dealing with priests.

“Hmm. Certainly not an ordinary thing for a farmer, but sadly, getting killed with a sword isn’t all that unusual in this world.”

Lanara chimed in. “Would it help to know that he was unjustly killed by fanatical cultists who mistook him for something he wasn’t?”

Zhul thought for a moment, then shook his head. “Slightly more unusual, I admit, but cults do spring up from time to time. And whether his death was just or not isn’t my domain – you want to seek out Tor to settle that question.”

Lanara thought for a moment. “Isn’t there any other way to appease Ladta? Perhaps with a more generous donation…”

Zhul scratched at his chin, contemplating the request. “I have an idea,” he said. “Perhaps there is a way. If you’re willing, we can let Ladta decide how much will appease her. Do you play dice?”

“Occasionally,” Lanara said. “Would I get to use my own dice?”

The Fatemaster smiled. “No.”

“What about his?” Lanara asked, pointing at Razael. Again the Fatemaster shook his head.

“Hmm, then we’re at an impasse,” Lanara said. “Because I’m not sure I trust you to use your own dice, either.”

Zhul frowned. “Maybe you’re not familiar with our faith,” he said, “but it’s considered a serious sin for us to cheat. Cheating is denying fate.”

Lanara thought about it, then nodded. It did make sense. “Okay, then,” she said, “your dice, then. What’s the game?”

“Follow me.” Zhul led them into the temple, and had them wait in a small room with a long table. While he was gone, Kyle turned to Lanara.

“I’m not comfortable with the idea of gambling for my brother’s life,” Kyle said.

“Relax, Kyle. We’ll bring him back, one way or another. Let’s at least hear this guy out.”

Fatemaster Zhul returned a few minutes later with another priest, a coffer, and a small bag. He opened the bag and spilled out several dice carved from ivory, and then opened the chest, revealing a large number of platinum coins.

“You’ll need two players,” Zhul said, “who will dice for you?”

Lanara and Xu volunteered, and sat down opposite the two priests, who were dividing up the coins and the dice. “I usually request a donation of at least six thousand gold for raising the dead,” the Fatemaster explained. “Most of that to cover the cost of the diamonds you need, plus extra for the church itself. But we’re going to game to see how much Ladta wishes you to pay for this privilege. If she favors you, then your brother returns for a much lower donation. If she doesn’t, then you will pay more. Before we begin, I must ask you to swear an oath to Ladta that no matter the results of this contest, you will pay what is asked for the ritual. You aren’t truly submitting to fate if you simply choose to walk away from the table if things go badly for you.”

Kyle leaned over to Lanara. “Are you sure about this?”

“No,” she admitted, “but Zhul’s the only priest in town that can bring Bryant back. Otherwise you have to wait gods-knows how long to get to another city.” She smiled and patted Kyle on the cheek. “Don’t worry. If it goes bad for us, I’ll help pay for it.”

Kyle sighed. “All right.”

Each player was given three hundred platinum pieces to gamble with. The game ended up being somewhat similar to a card game, but with dice. Each player bid on who would roll the highest total, with each hand using increasing numbers of dice. There was also a side pool that players could add to, that would be won at the end of the game by the person with the highest overall total. Kyle paid rapt attention to the game even though he wasn’t playing, nervously watching. Razael leaned his chair in a corner and napped. The dicing and betting went back and forth, but late in the game Xu seemed to pull ahead. By the time the last hand was played and the totals calculated, the party ended up ahead over two thousand gold.

“Well,” Fatemaster Zhul said, as his priest scooped all the platinum coins back into the coffer, “it seems that you have enough luck on your side to spill over to your brother’s benefit. Very well. Return tomorrow with his body, and I will perform the ceremony. Thank you for allowing us this time of worship.” Bowing, the Fatemaster left the room with the coffer, instructing the lesser priest to escort the party out when they were ready.

A very happy group of adventurers left the Halls of Fortune and returned to the Stag and Boar. A couple of hours later, Lanara went for her appointment with Councilman Gil Mendes.

The councilman turned out to be a rather unassuming, plain-looking human, with a thin nose and a balding pate. He met with Lanara in an equally unremarkable office with a tiny window too far up on one wall to be useful, a complement to the tiny wood stove in the corner that was too old and decrepit to give off much heat.

“What is it I can do for you, Miss… Rahila? I see you’re new in town.”

“Well, my companions and I have business to attend to here in Delgan,” she began. “Your name was given to us as someone to talk to, someone who could understand when a person has a dream.”

“I see,” Gil said. “Well, if you’re looking to open a business here, I could assist you in finding suitable properties, and guide you through the various licenses and permits you’ll need.”

Lanara chewed her lower lip. He hadn’t picked up the subtle hints she dropped. She’d have to try again. “Well, that does sound like a good start. But I hope I’m not asking too much of you, I wouldn’t want you to be… exposed to any danger of losing your position. Surely a man of your… talents would want to remain here at his job.”

“I assure you that I’m not overstepping my bounds here,” the councilman said. “Attracting new business to Delgan is part of my responsibility.”

Lanara almost sighed aloud. Aren’t politicians supposed to be better at innuendo than this? Or maybe that’s only with their mistresses. “I would like to know one thing. If my friends and I needed to discuss something privately with someone in town, perhaps that we don’t want to get out into public, would you recommend arranging a meeting here at the town hall?”

The light of comprehension finally seemed to dawn in Gil’s eyes. “Well, I don’t think I could recommend a government building for any private discussions. I’m afraid you’ll have to find another place to hold your meetings.” While he talked, Gil pulled a scrap of parchment from a pile on his desk and quickly scrawled a message: Crocodile’s Eyeball – Nine bells.

Lanara nodded slightly, acknowledging his note. “Well, every town has it’s own rules. I’ll arrange another meeting with you when we have our plans ready.”

“I look forward to it, Miss Rahila,” Gil said, extending his hand to her. They shook hands, and as Lanara left she saw Gil toss the scrap of parchment into the stove.

Lanara returned to the Boar and Stag to report her progress. The party agreed to go together to the Crocodile’s Eyeball, in case there was trouble. Upon arrival, they were glad they had. The tavern in question was deep inside the worst part of Delgan. Most of the people surrounding them in the streets were orcs or orc-touched, the descendants of refugees from the last war between Targeth and the tribes of the Haran Desert. The party made their way to a dark table (one of several in the tavern) and glowered until its occupants left. While Xu kept an eye on the clientele, the others waited for the councilman to arrive.

Shortly after nine bells, a man with shaggy blonde hair and moustache approached their table, and asked if he could share the space.

Razael looked up at the man. “Nice disguise,” he muttered. He was elbowed by Lanara.

Gil sat down nervously. “Thank you for meeting with me here,” he said. “The council hall’s not safe. Now, what were you trying to talk to me about earlier?”

“It’s been brought to our attention that you’re in a… special group of people that would prefer that your presence not be known about,” Lanara said, “and it’s also been brought to our attention that you are about to be revealed.”

“How did you get this information?” Gil asked.

“Through a mutual friend,” she replied, “or at least someone with an interest in keeping you safe.”

Gil regarded the party, as if he were sizing them up. Though it was obvious he was worried, Razael and Lanara could tell that he’d been under a great deal of stress for some time. The droop of his shoulders and the dark circles under his eyes spoke of many sleepless nights.

“Do you know,” Gil said at last, “the name Barrai?” Everyone shook their head. Xu thought the name was vaguely familiar, as if someone had mentioned it in conversation during their schooling at The Tower, but she couldn’t place it.

“He is a… person of influence in the region,” Gil said, his tone indicating that his ‘influence’ was of the illicit variety. “In regard to the… personal information of which you speak, Barrai has somehow learned about it, and has been blackmailing me for some time. I’ve had to cast votes in his favor, restructure guard patrols around his schedule, things like that. And, of course, plenty of bribes. At this point, I’m out of money, and I have no more political favors I can do for him. His next payment is due in a week.”

Everyone looked at each other, nodding silent approval. “We have several routes we could take,” Lanara explained. “We could eliminate him. We could pay him for you and hold you in our debt. Or, we could remove you from the situation.”

“Or we could just kill this one and be done with the whole thing,” muttered Razael.

Gil’s eyes started to widen upon hearing the comment, but Lanara put a reassuring hand on his arm. “Pay no attention to him,” Lanara said.

Kyle leaned over to Razael. “You’re going to have to accept it, Raz,” he whispered in an unfriendly tone, “we’re always going to do the opposite of what you want.”

Councilman Mendes looked around the table. “Is this all of you, or are there others?”

“We have one more waiting for us back at our inn,” Kyle said.

Gil shook his head. “Then I doubt you have the numbers you’d need to eliminate Barrai. He’s well established in Delgan, and in a city ruled by criminals, one has to be careful to be successful. You’d have to go through his entire organization to get to him, and the collateral damage would destroy several legitimate businesses and likely decimate the economy. Besides, Barrai’s death would leave a power vacuum in the region, and I shudder at the thought of those who would be most likely to fill that vacuum. Barrai is a vile man, but not the most vile.”

“Okay, so elimination seems the least attractive option,” Lanara said. “Though if necessary, I think we can do it without all the devastation you fear.”

“What are your preferences in this matter?” Xu asked.

“If I had my choice,” the councilman said, “I’d prefer to have my own status in the community unchanged. I recognize that may not be possible. If you’re here to help me, then the choice of how to do that is yours, as it’ll be your lives on the line. While I enjoy the power I have in this city, power is meaningless to the dead.”

Lanara nodded. “Well, paying the bribe for you is only a temporary fix, and doesn’t solve the problem. And even though we’re probably more forgiving than Barrai, all that would do is shift the burden of your debt from him to us.”

“Let me ask you this,” Kyle said suddenly. “You’re in this position because Barrai has information about you. What if we could render this information useless?”

“How do you mean?” Gil asked.

“Either by providing you with equally damaging information on him, or by making the truth of his words seem questionable,” the wizard replied.

Gil sighed. “Barrai’s followers wouldn’t doubt his word,” he said, “and from there they could easily incite the populace. A mob doesn’t have to be right to be effective.”

“You underestimate our bard here,” Razael said, patting Lanara on the shoulder. “I reckon she could convince Barrai’s men that he was their own mother.”

Lanara smiled wickedly. “I’d be willing to bet your next payment to Barrai that I can out-rumor him.”

“Gold is one thing,” Gil said, “being burned at the stake is quite another.”

“How credible do you think the populace would find Barrai if they thought he’d gone mad?” Lanara asked. “If they believed him to be unhinged?”

Gil considered the idea for a moment. “If that’s the sort of thing you can manufacture,” he said slowly, “that could work quite nicely. It’s one thing to try and convince people that Barrai is lying. But if they thought him insane… his lieutenants would probably start carving up his empire for themselves. As far as I know, Barrai is the only one who knows about me. He might have told his lieutenants, though.”

“Do you know where his base of operations is?” Lanara asked.

“I can tell you it’s in the southwest section of town, but that’s it,” Gil said. “No one outside of Barrai’s inner circle knows where he is. I do know what his guild’s tattoo looks like, though.”

“Useful information,” Lanara said. “Can you copy the symbol for us?” She pulled a page out of her journal and laid it on the table. She was about to retrieve a pen when Gil pointed a finger and concentrated, and a drop of his own blood extruded from the fingertip. He calmly inscribed a V with a dot at the base. “It’s usually tattooed on the back of the left hand, in gray ink. They usually keep their hands dirty, so that the mark blends in.”

“Thank you,” Lanara said, tucking the paper away. “We should probably go and make plans for how to approach your problem. We’ll be in touch.”

“Thank you,” Gil said, standing up. “If you succeed, I’ll be in your debt.” With that, he left the table and walked out of the tavern.

The party followed suit several minutes later, and briefed Togusa on the meeting, careful to filter out any information about psionics. Togusa agreed to help, though he admitted his skills lent themselves more toward open confrontation than to spreading rumors questioning a person’s sanity. But when Razael suggested that they enhance their ruse by trying to increase Barrai’s paranoia, Togusa offered to start spreading information that the church of Tor was ‘interested’ in him.

“We also shouldn’t discount the possibility of driving Barrai into the open with all this,” Lanara said, “in which case you might get to deal with him in your more traditional way, Togusa. I can go see if he has any official warrants that you could enforce.”

“Well, we have the tools at our disposal to pull this off,” Kyle said. “All we have to do it put it together.”

“Excellent,” Lanara said. “This is my kind of operation. No monsters, no blood.”

“The week is young,” Razael quipped.

* * *​

Autumn stood in the courtyard for quite a while after Kyle and the others had left, even though there was nothing to see; no shrinking figures on horseback riding toward the horizon, no vaporous after-image. There had been only a moment of darkness, then nothing. She wished she had gone with them, too.

“Be safe,” she whispered.

A young page walked up to Autumn as she stood in the courtyard, and bowed. “Your Grace?”

Slowly, Autumn turned, knowing what the page would say but dreading it nonetheless. “Yes?”

“The Emperor requests your presence in the main audience chamber.”

The sentinel sighed. “Very well. I will be there shortly.”

The page bowed again and departed. A minute later, Autumn followed the same path out of the courtyard and began the long walk to the main palace.

Why, Bail? she asked, the same question she’d been asking for months now without an answer. Why did he choose me for this? When she’d been made a duchess, Autumn knew the title would come with lands and responsibilities. But she’d assumed she would be granted some small, unimportant domain where her presence or absence would not make much of a difference. Haxtha’s dislike of her sister Arrie was no great secret, and Autumn had assumed that fact, combined with her own obvious complete disinterest in worldly power, would result in a ‘dead-end’ vassalage that would keep everyone happy.

Instead, she’d been given dominion over Vargex, one of the empire’s largest duchies.

Autumn dreaded to think what rulership of Vargex would entail. Would she be forced to give up her adventuring career, and take over the city full-time? No, it couldn’t be that way. Her role with the Legacy was too important, especially now that they knew the psions could be plotting to destroy more of the gods. Beyond even that, sitting in permanent dominion of a city was a violation of her vows as a Sentinel; her pledge was to seek out the workings of devils wherever they surfaced, not to sit in one place and hope the workings of devils might happen to show up in her own town, preferably within her estate, and could you make an appointment so the Duchess could smite you between meetings, please?

But voicing her concerns to the Emperor now was pointless. He knew full well what her obligations were. Whether he had chosen to honor them or ignore them, she could not change his mind now. She would simply have to act as she saw fit, and deal with the consequences of her choice. She’d known she couldn’t delay the moment of truth any longer – it was the reason she’d asked Arrie and Osborn to stay with her.

Halfway to the audience chamber, Autumn was joined by the very two people she’d been thinking of. “Have you been summoned, too?” she asked them.

“Of course,” Arrie said, “Haxtha wouldn’t pass up a chance to flaunt his superiority in front of me.”

“I’m just glad Razael’s not around,” Osborn said. “You may not like the Emperor either, Arrie, but at least you have the sense to keep your mouth shut about it when you’re in the same room with him.”

“Maddie is still at the temple, I take it?” Autumn said, on the mention of her divinely-mandated bodyguard.

“Yes, they’ve got her locked up tight,” Arrie said. “Seems they’re unwilling to risk her outside their grounds without Razael present. Besides, they’re not done ‘communing with the goddess’ yet.” The warrior smiled. “As you can imagine, I haven’t exactly been eager to walk into the middle of Erito’s temple to see how she’s doing.”

At last they arrived at the main audience chamber. The large, gilded mahogany doors were pulled open by two Imperial Guardsmen, and they walked up a plush crimson carpet toward the throne. It was placed on a raised marble dais, with a skylight above bringing a column of sunlight straight down on it (Osborn, from earlier explorations, knew that there were a series of mirrors and focusing lenses on the roof to make sure the sunlight was properly reflected). The throne itself looked as though it were carved from one solid piece of clear crystal. It was a widely held belief that the throne was carved from the same stone that the palace’s Crystal Chime was made from, the bell that sounded only upon the birth or death of a member of the Imperial Family. Legend stated that the original crystal had been a sliver chipped from Erito’s own weapon, the Staff of Measuring, and given to the elves as a sign of her favor when the race first appeared on Aelfenn. Sunlight from above refracted through the throne’s crystal facets, causing it to flash and sparkle like a brilliant diamond. Seated on a cushion of deep purple velvet, regarding their approach, Haxtha sat in his full imperial regalia. Courtiers and advisors were gathered around the edges of the room, observing.

The three adventurers stopped at the proscribed place before the throne, and bowed deeply, Autumn kneeling in front of Arrie and Osborn.

“You may rise, Autumn Verahannen, Duchess of Vargex, Lady Mayor of Vargas, and associates,” Haxtha said, making a slight gesture. The Emperor’s gaze flicked over to Arrie as he said the word associates.

They stood and looked up at the Emperor. “What is your bidding, Your Imperial Majesty?” Autumn asked.

“On the morrow,” Haxtha said, “you will go to Vargas and assume your rightful place in your appointed domain. We have been hearing troubling reports from the city, and we wish for you to restore order, now that you are available to do your duty to your Emperor.”

If you hadn’t been off gallivanting gods-knows-where for the past five months in a ship my brother helped you acquire, Autumn heard the unspoken rebuke in Haxtha’s tone. She bowed again. “I will serve as best I may, Majesty.”

“We will provide you an escort of Imperial Guardsman, as well as an advisor,” Haxtha said, “My Guardsmen’s orders will be simple; protect the Duchess of Vargex, restore order to the Emperor’s city, and protect the Imperial Princess of Tlaxan.” Haxtha nodded toward Arrie. “We would not wish to insult Princess Ariadne by suggesting she could not adequately defend herself in a base physical altercation.”

Both sisters did well to hide any trace of scorn or insult as they nodded; Arrie for the obvious slight at her martial temperament, Autumn at the implication that she was somehow less capable of defending herself.

“If I may, Your Majesty,” Autumn said, “what reports have you received from Vargas?”

“For some time now, there seems to have been a marked increase in the crime rate. There are even reports of an assassin’s guild in the city. We have not had word from the former Lord Mayor, Count Robar, in several months. The city requires strong leadership; that is what we require of you. You are dismissed.”

Autumn, Arrie, and Osborn bowed again, then turned and walked out of the audience chamber. As the doors closed, Osborn hurried to keep up; both Arrie and Autumn were walking unusually fast. He looked up at them, ready to complain, but then he saw the hard look in their eyes.

“Um, I think I need to be somewhere else right now,” he said, and quietly slipped off.

The next morning, Autumn emerged from her chambers, dressed in a simple but elegant riding dress in the Verahannen colors. She wore the tiara that Herion had presented to her when she was first informed that she would granted the title of duchess. Waiting outside her door were four elves; three males in the uniforms of the Imperial Guard, and one female elf in less assuming garb.

“Good morning, Your Grace,” the woman said. “I am Shoshone, and I have been appointed to act as your advisor and liaison to the Emperor. This is Captain Doriam, Captain Imrahil, and Captain Shirazal.”

Each of the Guardsmen nodded as they were introduced.

“A pleasure to meet you,” Autumn said.

“We are ready to depart, if it pleases you, Your Grace,” Shirazal said. “Your companions, Princess Ariadne and Master Greenbottle are already in the courtyard, with the rest of your entourage.”

“Entourage?” Autumn asked. “The Emperor told me only of an escort and an advisor.”

“Indeed, the four of us are the only notable additions to the typical retinue of a lady of your standing,” Doriam said.

Flummoxed, Autumn went to a nearby window that overlooked the courtyard. Below, she saw dozens of people waiting in the courtyard. There were two dozen regular soldiers in formation, and perhaps forty liveried servants milling about. Several wagons were lined up near the rear; Autumn saw that most were for supplies, but noted a passenger carriage where about a half-dozen ladies-in-waiting stood, giggling and laughing with a small figure that she first assumed was a young page or squire, but on closer inspection realized was Osborn. She spotted Arrie up toward the front of the line, mounted on her horse Ghost, looking very bored. Scattered throughout the crowd were elves carrying Verahannen and Imperial banners. Autumn just gaped.

Shoshone leaned out the window, looked down at the sea of people below, then grinned at Autumn, slapping her on the back.

“Welcome to the Empire,” she said.

* * *​

Had they been traveling alone, the Legacy could have made the trip from Noxolt to Vargas in a little over a week. As it was, the trip took about two weeks. Doriam, Imrahil, and Shirazal did their best to remain inconspicuous, but their sheer devotion to duty made that impossible. Shoshone was much better at it, and only appeared when Autumn wanted to know something about Vargas or other events in Tlaxan. Osborn spent much of the first few days with Autumn’s ladies-in-waiting, while Arrie stayed with Autumn to help keep her from going insane from all the pomp and circumstance.

After their first night away from the capital, Autumn and Osborn awoke to find that Arrie was already up and dressed, quietly poking at one of the cooking fires. As servants moved to secure their belongings and collapse the tents, and the Guardsmen were ordering the regular soldiers to their patrol assignments, Arrie motioned the other two over.

“I’ve been contacted by Aran,” she said quietly. “Last night. He would like to speak with us… all of us.”

“When and where?” Osborne asked.

“When it’s convenient.”

“Convenient for us, or for him?” Autumn asked.

Arrie shrugged. “I don’t control these things. He only seems to come to me when I’m having nightmares, so I’m kind of hoping he doesn’t come back to clarify.”

Autumn frowned. “What kind of nightmares?”

Arrie grew a little more subdued. “I… dreamt I was trying to kill myself. Aran came and stopped me.”

A few days passed on the road. The entourage passed through several small towns and villages. Each time, loud trumpets and soldiers marching in formation around the Duchess heralded their arrival. After the fifth such event, Autumn gathered her Guardsmen and advisor into a meeting.

“When we arrive at Vargas,” she said, “I do not wish to enter the city with an entourage, at first. I wish to get my impression of the city before they know who I am.”

“Of course, Your Grace,” Doriam said, “we can surely accommodate your wishes.”

“Indeed,” Imrahil agreed, “we will maintain a distance of ten paces.”

Autumn scowled. “That is not what I meant. I want you fifty paces behind at minimum, and not make it obvious that you are Imperial Guardsmen.”

The three Guardmen looked at each other. “With all due respect, Your Grace,” Doriam said, “our orders from the Emperor are very clear, and we serve the Emperor. Vargas is mired in lawlessness. Ten paces, and we will be armed as befits our function.”

“Why can’t you defend me from a distance?” Autumn asked, her temper rising a bit.

“Because we are Imperial Guardsmen,” Imrahil said, “not the Imperial Order of the Bow. Had His Imperial Majesty wished to assign you a guard with those skills, he would have done so.”

Autumn was about to argue with the elf further, when Arrie put a hand on her forearm. “Let me play devil’s advocate for a moment… if you’ll pardon the expression, Autumn. These three men won’t leave your side until Haxtha calls them back. For all their skills, none of them are what I’d call ‘stealthy’. And they’re trained as close combatants, not as archers. Trying to force them to be something they’re not isn’t going to work, no matter how much you’d prefer it the other way.”

“And let’s face it, Your Grace,” Shoshone said, “you don’t exactly blend in to a crowd yourself. You’ve got what they call in my line of work ‘the curse of a famous face’.” She gestured over to Osborn, who was sitting on a cushion eating bacon. “If you desire information about the city, I’d suggest talking to your hin companion.”

“While you’re making your grand entrance into the city,” Arrie suggested, “why don’t Osborn, Shoshone and I enter Vargas ahead of you and scope things out? We can really get a sense of what the people think of you. People are most likely to show their true sentiments in a crowd.”

“That might work,” Shoshone said. “Easier than trying to keep these four inconspicuous.” She gestured at Autumn and the Guard again.

Autumn sighed, and looked at Arrie. “Sometimes I think Haxtha is punishing me to punish you,” she said.

“No,” Arrie replied, “He could be punishing you to punish you.”

“I don’t see how having an honor guard is a punishment, Your Highness.” Imrahil said. “And you did ask for the job.”

“No, I didn’t!” Autumn shouted, causing Osborn to slide off his cushion.

“Wow,” the hin said, picking himself up. “I think I’ll go see how the ladies are doing.”

After Osborn left, the three Guardsmen stood as well. “We will depart as well,” said Shirazal, “I’m sure that the Duchess wishes some time to prepare her speech before her arrival.”

As the Guard left, they stoically ignored Autumn’s scream.

“Speech?!?”

* * *​

The entourage drew closer to Vargas. Three days before they arrived, Arrie, Osborn and Shoshone rode ahead, approaching the city incognito. The three of them decided to don the guise of a merchant and her bodyguards.

Shoshone put the last touches on her disguise, and walked out of the inn they’d taken a room in. Her work with Imperial Intelligence had brought her into the city several times, though she hadn’t been in Vargas since the old Lord Mayor stopped sending messages. She hoped none of her contacts had been lost to the criminals that now seemed to run unchecked through the streets. On their way in, they’d seen bodies lying tucked away in alleys, pickpockets operating almost openly in the markets, and even watched a middle-aged gnome picking the lock on the back door of a shop without so much as a blink from the rogue. The few city watchmen they saw seemed oblivious to the crime all around them.

They walked into the market district, Arrie and Osborn walking behind Shoshone, who told them to address her as ‘Eslavez’. She went into a fishmonger’s shop, instructing her two ‘guards’ to wait outside.

A rotund water-touched man rose up from behind a display case lined with ice and large sturgeon. “Eslavez!” he exclaimed, smiling broadly. “It’s been a long time, old friend!”

“Indeed,” Shoshone said, “it’s good to see you again, Karn.” Shoshone knew that Karn was a smuggler as well as a fish merchant, and a useful source of information.

“Are you in the market for fish today? Or a deeper catch?” Karn asked.

“Well, I guess you could say I’m fishing,” Shoshone said. “But then again, isn’t that generally what we discuss?”

“Indeed, indeed. Come with me to my office. It smells of fish guts in here.”

Shoshone followed Karn back to a small office, littered with papers. Karn sat down in a large chair, that creaked under his weight. “Fishing in these parts has been odd recently,” he said to her, gesturing for her to take a seat at another chair. “A lot of muck has risen from the bottom.”

“Anything I should be cautious of when I’m casting my lines?” she asked.

“There’s a large barracuda swimming about that you might want to be careful of,” Karn said. “A slippery fellow, I’m told. The fishermen call him ‘The One That Got Away’ or ‘The Big Head’.”

“I see,” Shoshone nodded. Karn’s meaning was clear to her; the ‘barracuda’ was the former Lord Mayor. Apparently trying out a new line of work.

“I hear that there’s been some new species coming into the waters here,” she continued. “The kind you don’t normally see. I hear sometimes introducing new fish into the pond can be dangerous for the natives, and sometimes you have to clear out the new fish.”

“That’s true,” Karn agreed, “three or four new schools, from what I hear. But it’s a task easier said than done. You’ll need a big net.”

“Know of any fishermen looking for work?” she asked.

“No, they’re pretty much all in it for themselves,” Karn said. “Lots of boats on the river these days, Eslavez. Makes for a lot of accidents.”

“Any safe harbors out there?”

Karn shook his head.

“Well, I appreciate the advice,” Shoshone said, standing up and offering her hand. “Good luck.”

Karn grasped her hand, and there was a nearly inaudible clinking of coins. Shoshone left the office and emerged into the street.

“So?” Osborn asked, looking at Shoshone.

“Not good,” she said. “I’ll fill you in back at the inn. I suggest that we split up after this, though. Some of my other contacts in Vargas won’t appreciate onlookers, and I think that you, Master Greenbottle, may have some other connections you could pursue. Princess, I’d suggest you mingle with the populace, get to know their mind. I’ve discovered that word of the Duchess arriving has not yet reached the city – it may be in our interest to start preparing the populace.”

They spent the rest of the day and all of the next learning what they could. Osborn found that there were no less that three thieves’ guilds and two assassin’s guilds vying for control of Vargas’ underworld. His old guild, the Shadow Hand, had sent operatives to see if establishing control there would be viable, but the hin learned from them that the Hand saw Vargas as too unruly to be profitable. He was able to get the names of the guilds; the two assassin guilds were the Night Blade and the Poisoned Edge. The Silent Foot was an interloping thieves’ guild, comprised mostly of dwarves, gnomes, and hin, and the Night Whispers were the other new guild. The city’s previous resident guild, the Black Hand, was fighting to maintain control of their old territory.

Shoshone gathered a good deal of information about the former Lord Mayor, Count Robar. Robar had been appointed by the former Duke to administer the city a few years ago; the Duke’s own health was poor and he’d been unable to oversee it himself. She learned that last spring, Robar had started acting strangely; former servants reported that he was more irritable, and prone to angry outbursts. Around the same time, the watch started to become more lax in enforcing the laws, often outright ignoring crimes happening right under their noses. The Lord Mayor had vanished about five months ago, which coincided with the Night Blade guild suddenly coming into prominence (and, Shoshone noted, also coincided with the Emperor appointing Duchess Autumn to rule Vargas). The other new guilds came into Vargas about a month after that. After four months of guild wars, the police were too scared to be effective, and even if they wanted to intervene, no longer had the manpower or resources to make a dent in the crime waves.

The next morning, Duchess Autumn arrived in the city. Soldiers arranged in a phalanx marched through the streets, with banners waving and trumpets blaring. It was slow going, as the citizens of Vargas had only recently heard rumors of her arrival, and thus had not prepared for her entourage to enter the city. But after a while, a few city watchmen started clearing the streets, allowing the new Duchess to proceed unhampered toward her estate. Autumn noted that several people were pointing and smiling as she rode by. She looked over at Shoshone, who has slipped back into the entourage quietly just outside the city gates. Shoshone only smiled. There was no sign of Osborn or Arrie, though Shoshone assured her quietly that both were well, and would appear later.

The procession arrived at the gates of the mayoral mansion. The iron bars are overgrown with ivy, and graffiti marred the six-foot stone walls. The first thing Autumn noticed was that the servants, who she had sent ahead to prepare the house for her arrival, were still standing outside the gates.

“What’s going on?” Autumn asked the chamberlain, who had come running up. She had to think for a moment before recalling his name – Theodren.

“A thousand apologies, Your Grace,” Theodren said, bowing stiffly, “but the gates are locked. We’ve been trying to locate someone on the grounds, but no one is answering our calls.”

Autumn glared at the iron barrier. “Open the gate,” she said.

“Of course, Your Grace, as soon as a key can be…”

“Open the gate now,” she said, cutting the chamberlain off.

The three Guardsman looked at each other, nodded, and started moving toward the gate, drawing their enormous courtblades as they approached.

“There’s no need for that,” said a voice, and suddenly Osborn appeared standing in front of the bars. “I have a key right here.” With a wink to Autumn, Osborn turned and proceeded to unlock the gate. Servants pushed the doors open with a loud, grating screech, and the entourage moved forward.

Guardsman Imrahil turned to the crowd gathered behind Autumn’s entourage. “Her Grace, Duchess Autumn, Lady Mayor of Vargas, will address her subjects at sunset,” he said loudly. “Until then, the Duchess will not entertain any guests or city business.”

The outside of the mansion looked as run-down as the outer wall. Refuse was scattered everywhere, the grounds were wild and unkempt, and a few windows were cracked. The front doors were ajar, swing open in the breeze. Servants moved quickly to pick up what they could, as if they were somehow at fault. With rising ire, Autumn stormed into the mansion. Inside, dust and cobwebs covered every surface, though there was little for it to cling to. It seemed as though everything that wasn’t nailed down had been removed. The plants and flowers were dead and wilted, and a smell of sewage permeated the house.

“Search the house,” Autumn growled, “see if anything remains. Find whatever is left of the former Lord Mayor’s staff and bring them before me.”

The soldiers began searching the house, while the servants set to work cleaning up as best they could, under Theodren’s frantic orders. Autumn moved to a parlor to await the arrival of Lord Mayor Robar’s staff. Guardsman Imrahil stood sentry at the front door along with a pair of soldiers, while Doriam and Shirazal remained with Autumn. Shirazal posted another pair of guards at the servant’s entrance.

Within an hour, Autumn was looking over a motley group of about fifteen men and women, all quite terrified. Many of them were drunk, and several looked as though they had dressed very quickly. None of them wore their servant’s livery. Autumn noted fresh lipstick marks on the neck of one of the male servants that matched the shade being worn by a female maid. She also noted that he was casting a leering eye at her, apparently oblivious to the presence of two heavily armed Imperial Guardsmen on either side of her. She wished she’d chosen to ride into town in her armor instead of in a dress.

“Theodren,” Autumn said, “who is in charge of this rabble?”

Theodren glared at the assembled staff. “Who is in charge here? Where is your chamberlain?”

The servants exchanged awkward, uncertain glances. Finally, one of them, the young man with the lipstick on his neck, stepped forward. “Begging your pardon, but we’ve not seen the chamberlain for three months.”

“And yet you remained here?” Theodren asked.

“We were still receiving our wages,” the young man said. “Delivered to our homes every month, as usual. Even though we’d stopped caring for the house for some time.” He smiled and licked his lips. “Not many people get paid to do nothing.”

“What is your name?” Autumn asked, leaning forward.

“Rudy, ma’am. I was the doorman.”

“You will address the Duchess as ‘Your Grace’!” snapped Theodren.

“D…Duchess?” Rudy stammered.

“I see that despite receiving your wages for doing nothing, several of you felt in necessary to enhance your income by taking items from the Lord Mayor’s estate… my estate.”

“I… I don’t know anything about that,” Rudy said unconvincingly.

Autumn slowly stood, and walked to within a few paces of Rudy. He was white as a sheet now, trembling, and definitely no longer harboring illicit thoughts about her. “Did you know, Rudy, that in addition to being your new sovereign lord, I also belong to the Order of Sentinels? Do you know what the Sentinels do, Rudy? We root evil and corruption out of this world.” She began to circle him slowly. “They say that a sentinel can look into the heart of a man, see his very soul.” She stopped in front of him, and glared into his beady eyes. “I don’t appreciate being lied to, Rudy.”

Rudy nodded, unable to speak.

“Why did you lie to me, Rudy?”

“Because you terrify me, ma… Your Grace,” he said, “and I was afraid to say anything that would upset you.”

Autumn smiled. “Then I think our relationship is exactly where it needs to be.” She returned to her seat and let the silence settle in for a few moments. “Who sent your wages?” she asked.

“I don’t know,” Rudy said, “I assume that the chamberlain did, or perhaps Count Robar’s steward. All I know is that our pay arrives at our home on the first of the month, delivered by a bonded courier.”

“Your Grace, if I may,” Shoshone said. She looked at the crowd of servants. “Since it seems that you have received three months salary without having performed your assigned duties, the Duchess would not be remiss in requiring three months unpaid service from each of you.”

The servants shifted their feet uncomfortably.

“Or you could be fired now, and owe the estate three month’s salary, plus a suitable fine,” Shoshone continued.

“Or,” Osborn said, “we could just treat them as common criminals. What is the penalty for theft in Vargas?”

“I’m not certain, Master Greenbottle,” Shoshone said. “Of course, the new Lady Mayor may need to review the current laws, as they hardly seem to be a deterrent.” Shoshone looked over the servants again. “You may return here on the last day of the year and give us your decision – work for free, be indebted to the Duchess, or be arrested.”

“You are dismissed,” Theodren barked.

“Find out who is still paying these people,” Autumn said to Theodren as the room cleared, “make sure it stops, and that whoever is responsible doesn’t have any further access to my accounts.”

“At once, Your Grace,” Theodren said, bowing and quickly leaving the room.

Autumn looked at Shoshone. “I don’t want to have any of those people back in my house,” she said.

“Don’t worry,” Shoshone said, “not a one of them will still be in the city by tomorrow morning. I’m afraid you’re out some gold, Your Grace, but you never would have recovered it anyway, and right now I’m not sure I’d trust the city watch to enforce any sentences.”

Autumn sighed. “The money isn’t a problem, though I hadn’t expected to spend it cleaning my own estate. But I need reliable people working for me, Shoshone.”

“I understand, Your Grace. One problem at a time. First you have to curb the lawlessness.” Shoshone and Osborn gave Autumn a full report of everything they had learned about the city, including the suspiciously-timed disappearance of Count Robar.

“There are several theories,” Shoshone concluded. “Robar could have been blackmailed by one of the crime guilds, which might explain his sudden change in personality. Or he could have been in league with one of the guilds, and was under pressure because of the encroachment of rival guilds. We can’t rule out mind control, or poisoning, either. Robar could have fled, he could have been killed, or he could have gone underground. So far, I haven’t been able to find out what happened to him.”

“I have a feeling we’ll learn the truth quickly once we start trying to root out these guilds,” Autumn said. “Have someone bring the Captain of the Watch.”

“I will go, Your Grace,” Shirazal said, bowing as he took his leave.

“So, Shoshone, what do you advise?” Autumn said after he left.

“I’d suggest that you make it known quickly that now that you’re here, things like random disappearances of notable townspeople will no longer be tolerated. I’d advise contacting the local garrison of the Imperial Army and requisitioning troops to augment the city watch. I’d advise implementing a curfew as soon as those reinforcements arrive. I’d advise trusting no one.”

Autumn looked forlornly around the mansion. “I wish Arrie were here,” she said.

“She’ll be here soon, I’m sure,” Osborn said. “She said she wanted to wait until you were settled in.”

Meanwhile, Guardsman Shirazal found the barracks of the city watch, and strode in past the two sentries at the door. He stopped in front of a desk where another watchman sat. The watchman looked up, annoyed at first, but blanched when he saw the Imperial seal emblazoned on the visitor’s scabbard.

“Who’s in charge here?” Shirazal demanded.

The watchman at the desk pointed down the hall to a doorway. Shirazal turned and headed down the hall without another word. Behind him, he could hear the sound of several people bolting for the door.

Shirazal threw open the door and stepped in unannounced. An elf, perhaps middle-aged, was sitting behind a large desk, leaning back, with his eyes closed. At the sound of the door opening, the man opened his eyes.

“What the… oh, cr*p!” The man quickly say up straight, but remained in his chair pulling up close to the desk.

“You are the Captain of the Watch?” Shirazal asked.

“Yes… yes, I am.”

“You will attend the new Lady Mayor, Duchess Autumn, immediately,” he said.

“The new… oh, yes, of course.” The captain looked at Shirazal, then looked around the room. “I’ll need a few minutes to get ready.”

“Of course,” Shirazal said, not moving.

“Er, could I have a few moments of privacy?”

Shirazal caught a slight movement near the floor, and looked. A set of toes poked out from under the edge of the desk, twitching slightly. They were obviously not the captain’s toes.

Shirazal looked levelly at the captain. “No.”

The captain sighed, and pushed away from his desk, standing to fasten his trousers. As he did so, a young elven boy, no more than a hundred and twenty, peeked out from behind the desk. At the sight of the Imperial Guard, he ducked back down.

“Where are we going?” the captain asked as he strapped on his sword.

“The mayor’s estate,” Shirazal said, and escorted him back to where Autumn waited. By this time the servants had cleaned out an office enough to be usable, and so Autumn met with the Captain of the Watch there, sitting at a oak desk that had seen better days.

“Captain, please give me a report of the past several months,” Autumn said, once introductions were done.

The captain’s report was less than stellar. He confirmed that crime had increased sharply after the disappearance of the former Lord Mayor, and though he had tried to curb it, the watchmen that he sent out came back dead or worse. Eventually, he decided that rather than risk their lives in a futile effort, he would have his men wait out the chaos and hope for help from Noxolt.

“Do you have any idea what happened to the former Lord Mayor?” Autumn asked.

“His disappearance was investigated,” the captain said, “there are reports on file at the barracks. I’m not familiar with their conclusions.”

“Tell me, captain,” Autumn said, “you say your losses were too great trying to combat these new guilds. Why then do I hear reports that the watch is not acting to prevent any crime at all? Surely pickpocketing and vandalism can be dealt with without fear.”

“I don’t know,” the captain said. “they should be doing that, at least. If the watch isn’t doing their duty, I’ll have to have words with them.”

Guardsman Shirazal leaned down and whispered into Autumn’s ear. She nodded, then stared at the captain of the watch for a while.

“Captain,” she said slowly, “if you wish to keep your job, things are going to change. The whore under your desk will no longer be tolerated. That applies to all your men. I expect to see the crimes that the Watch is supposed to be dealing with be dealt with. If I don’t see this happening, you will be replaced. Do you understand?”

“I understand,” he said, “and it’s not something I’m willing to risk my life over.” He unbuckled his sword and scabbard and laid it on the desk in front of Autumn. “It’s on your head, not mine.” Bowing, he turned and left.

“Follow him,” Shoshone whispered to Osborn. “See where he goes, and who he talks to.”

Osborn nodded, turned invisible, and left the room.

“If it pleases Your Grace,” Guardsman Shirazal said, stepping forward and bowing, “I would be willing to take on the duties of the Captain of the Watch until a suitable replacement can be found.”

“That would be most appreciated, Guardsman,” Autumn said. “I hereby name you Captain of the Watch of Vargas. Your first order is to find those files your predecessor mentioned on Count Robar and bring them to me. After that, I’m sure you know what needs to be done.”

Shirazal bowed and left the mansion to report back to the barracks. Later that afternoon, Osborn returned to report that the former captain had gone home, packed his things, and left the city without talking to anyone.

“Left behind a nice house,” Osborn said. “Nice furniture.”

“Well, at least we can start refurnishing the Duchess’ estate,” Guardsman Doriam said.

“Heck, no!” Osborn said, grinning. “It’s my house, now! Everything’s a bit big, but the bed’s perfect!”

Autumn waved at Doriam to indicate that everything was fine. “I suppose I should work on my speech,” she said. “Any advice?”

There was silence, and then Guardsman Doriam spoke. “There are still decent people in this city, Your Grace. They need to hear that their city can be safe again. They need to know they don’t have to live in fear. They need to be inspired by you, Your Grace.”

“Thank you, Guardsman,” Autumn said, “I appreciate the advice.”

Autumn secluded herself in her office for the next two hours, trying to come up with a speech. She wished that Lanara was there to help her, or Arrie, or even Kyle; he could at least help her decide what to say, even if he couldn’t say it himself. As she contemplated the task before her, the room seemed to get smaller.

About thirty minutes before sunset, a young elf-touched woman named Aleria knocked at the door. Aleria had been appointed as Autumn’s valet.

“It’s nearly time, Your Grace,” Aleria said, “is there anything you need?”

“No… yes. Have my armor brought to me, please, and someone to assist me with it.”

“I can help with the armor, Your Grace,” Aleria said, “I have received the proper instruction.”

“Very well, Aleria. Thank you.”

Once the armor was brought, and her valet began helping her strap in on, Autumn felt somewhat more comfortable. She was at least in more a more familiar outfit. It still didn’t change the fact that she had nothing prepared, but at least she wouldn’t have to try and speak wearing a corset.

At the appointed time, Autumn stepped out onto the terrace overlooking the courtyard. The gates had been opened, and the city folk allowed to gather around the mansion, though a wall of guards stood between the crowd and the door. Torch stands had been brought out and lit, illuminating the large crowd below. One of the other servants, a bard of moderate talent who’d been assign as the court entertainer, stepped up behind Autumn and discreetly cast a spell that would amplify her voice. At the same time, a few of the other staff whose Talents allowed them to create light focused their power on the terrace, illuminating Autumn in her shining suit of mithral. She took a deep breath, and let it out slowly.

Bail, help me.

“Good people, I stand here, newly arrived in your city, and I look upon troubled faces enduring troubled times. I see mothers afraid to let their children play in the streets, I see fathers whose businesses have endured unending difficulties, I see sons and daughters forced to make terrible choices to survive. I see a city torn apart by corruption, infected with rot both from within and from without. I see a city whose leaders have abandoned their people when they are most in need.

“I come before you now to tell you that your prayers have been heard, your whispered pleas for succor have been answered. For the Emperor knows that Vargas can still be a shining jewel in the Empire, that she can rise above the rabble which now infest her like a plague. I come before you now not as a noblewoman, here to suck the marrow from the bones of the city while vultures circle overhead. I come to you as a warrior, and I give to you a warrior’s vow; I will cut out the disease that has overtaken your city… our city.”

Autumn drew her greataxe from the scabbard on her back, and held it aloft for a moment. “For those who would oppose the dominion of peace and order, this will be the only law they will know. No mercy will be shown those who have given none, or who have allowed the corrupt to reign unchallenged. Those of you who believe in decency and truth – and I believe that there are a great many more of you in our city than you know – will have no reason to fear me. Indeed, it is through your will alone that I rule, not by the words of any document, or soldier, or even of the Emperor himself. You have lived here all your lives; you deserve to have your city ruled as you would wish your own homes to be ruled; with a firm but fair hand.”

Autumn pulled the gauntlet off her right hand, then held it aloft. “This is the hand with which I would rule Vargas.” She then dropped her right and held up her mailed left fist. “Not this. Order without justice is meaningless; stability without mercy an empty promise. Today you, the people of Vargas have none of these things. Tomorrow will bring change.”

Autumn slowly took a half step back, and waited. She heard a ripple of sound run through the crowd below, and then she heard a few people start to applaud. The applause spread quickly, and soon everyone in the crowd below was cheering and clapping madly. There were shouts of “Long live Duchess Autumn!” and “the Angel of Mercy has come to save us!”

Autumn smiled broadly at the crowd, and it took everything she had not to burst into tears. Kyle, I wish you could have been here to see this.

There was a sudden disturbance in the crowd, starting from the back. Autumn watched as the crowd began to part, allowing a single rider to approach. The rider was astride a magnificent gray-white horse, and the Imperial seal gleamed off the saddle. The rider wore an elegant gown, and was arrayed in fine jewelry. Her chestnut brown hair was arranged in the latest court fashion. Upon reaching the inner courtyard, the woman dismounted, and walked to within a few paces of the main doors. She looked up at Autumn, and bowed her head.

“Duchess Autumn, Lady Mayor of Vargas,” she called up, “I am Crown Princess Ariadne of Noxolt. I humbly request your permission to enter the city.”

A ripple went through the crowd as Arrie identified herself. Now tears really did start trickling down Autumn’s cheeks.

“Permission granted, Princess Ariadne,” she said, trying to keep her voice from wavering, “and welcome to my city.”
 

Delemental

First Post
“So, any idea how we’re going to pull this off?”

Lanara propped herself up on one elbow, looking at Razael as she asked her question. It was early in the morning still, though the noise from the rooms across the hall told her that Kyle and his family had been up for quite some time. The cansin had commented about the relative sanity of the Goodson family when she’d first heard them stirring just before dawn.

Razael turned and looked at her. “I’d reckoned you had that part figured out already, seeing as you’re the expert in getting people to believe what you want them to believe.”

“True,” Lanara said, “but I’ve never done it on this scale before. And with only a week.”

“Well, if’n you need more time, we can always pay off this Barrai for a couple of weeks. I reckon we can get it back from him, one way or another. All else fails, we take it off the man’s body.”

“Raz, we’re not supposed to kill him, remember? Gil said all that stuff about a power vacuum in the city being worse that leaving him alone… or were you too busy ogling that whore at the Crocodile’s Eyeball?”

Razael cocked an eyebrow. “Jealous?”
“Just questioning your taste.”

“Well, what that Gil said was that carving through his men to get to Barrai would be bad. If we could get a shot at just him…”

Lanara shook her head. “I don’t think we’ll get that chance, but we’ll see. Kyle and I are going to talk to Gil again to get a little more information.”

“I thought Kyle would be going back to the temple of Ladta today with his family.”

“He will, but they aren’t starting the ceremony until midday.”

“Ah. Well then, let me know what you need from me. I have a couple things I need to look into this morning.”

Now it was Lanara’s turn to raise a brow. “What kind of things?”

He grinned. “Let’s just say I’m glad Kyle’s going with you and not me.”

Lanara nodded. “Poisons.”

“Drugs,” he corrected. “If’n we’re wanting folks to think Barrai’s off his rocker, slipping something in his ale would do the trick. Best be prepared if’n we get the chance.”

“Whatever,” Lanara said, pushing strands of pink hair out of her eyes. “Just try not to get arrested, okay?”

There was a loud knock at their door. “Hurry up, you two,” Kyle shouted from the other side of the door. “We haven’t got all day. You can finish whatever you’re doing later.”

Razael sat up in bed. “Ah, you’re just jealous because your woman’s off sleeping between silk sheets while you’re stuck here wondering if she’s found someone else to warm your side of the bed!”

There was silence, then the sounds of Kyle’s heavy boots walking off. Lanara slugged Razael in the arm.

“Ow, woman! Watch the rings!”

“You don’t have to say every little thing that comes into your head, you know,” Lanara scolded.

“Ah, he knows I’m kidding with him. Autumn would probably burst into flames or something if she even thought about being unfaithful.”

“I know that, and so does he, but for Feesha’s sake, Raz…”

“All right, all right,” he said, holding up his hands in a pacifying gesture. “I get the point. Best we move along, then.”

Lanara, Kyle, and Xu ended up going to meet Gil again, first stopping into his office to drop hints about a meeting, then rendezvousing with a newly disguised councilman in a small park.

“First of all,” Lanara said, “we need to know how Barrai knows about you.”

Gil sighed. “A few weeks back, I made a vote in council that Barrai apparently wasn’t crazy about. He sent a couple of assassins after me. They caught me alone, and unarmed, so…” He looked around at each of them. “How… familiar are you with my abilities?”

“We’ve had more than our fair share of encounters with people like yourself,” Lanara said. “We’re very familiar.”

Gil looked quite surprised. “Well, then, I summoned a mindblade to dispatch the assassins. Unfortunately, one of Barrai’s lieutenants was apparently watching, making sure the job went all right.”

“So, at least one of his lieutenants knows,” Kyle said.

“I’m not sure. That particular lieutenant seems to have vanished soon after he learned my secret. So he’s either dead or in hiding.”

Kyle frowned. “Gil, are you sure that these blackmail threats are coming directly from Barrai?”

“Yes, I’m sure,” Gil said. “Barrai came to my office in person two days after the assassination attempt.”

“Oh, okay,” said Kyle, “I just wondered if maybe this lieutenant was just using Barrai’s name to scare you into paying him directly.”

“But you have seen Barrai,” Lanara said, “can you describe him?”

“Of course,” Gil said, “it’s well known what he looks like. But he rarely leaves his stronghold because his face is so familiar. When he does go out in public, people tend to give him a wide berth. He’s a dwarf, looks like he’s in his late forties to human eyes. Short hair, short beard, blond. Has a scar that runs from his left ear to just short of his left eye.”

“Anything else you can tell us about his organization?” Kyle asked.

“Not a lot,” Gil said. “I do know that his lieutenants tend to divide responsibility more along type of activity rather than geographically. One’s in charge of narcotics, one runs the prostitution rings, and so on. Barrai controls a lot of territory in Delgan, and even outside the walls. He even owns an iron mine west of here. Could be just a side business for him, or used as a hideout.”

“We could have someone check that mine out, just to see,” Lanara said. “Tell us what you can about Barrai.”

After getting what they could from Gil, the party returned to the Stag and Boar. Kyle left with his family to go to the Halls of Fortune for the raising, while Lanara asked Razael to go check out the iron mine. Then Lanara and Xu decided to get started on their plan. They’d agreed on the walk back to the inn to make their effort two-pronged; half their time would be spent spreading rumors to the general populace that Barrai was no longer sane, the other half would be spent learning about Barrai’s criminal empire in an attempt to infiltrate it. The two women donned disguises – Xu went as Lanara’s elven bodyguard, while Lanara went for a more generic ‘trollopy dancing girl’ ensemble – and went back to the Crocodile’s Eyeball. It was still early in the afternoon when they arrived; most of the patrons were only moderately drunk, and no one had been stabbed yet. They wandered around the tavern for a while, and spotted two men with Barrai’s guild tattoo on their left hands; a human and an orc-touched.

Lanara approached the barkeep, a large, sweaty human with a bald head and an eye patch. “I see you don’t have any entertainment here,” she said to him.

The barkeep leered. “The girls don’t start until nine bells,” he said, clearly not looking her in the eyes.

“I meant music.” Lanara wasn’t bothered by the direction of his gaze, and even leaned forward a bit more. The more people looked at her breasts instead of her face, the easier it would be to remain anonymous.

He shrugged, and spit into a mug. “Only music we get here is the sound of bar fights.”

“Well, would you mind if I sing a few songs? Maybe some good ‘take a wench to bed’ songs so they’re ready for the girls at nine bells?”

“Long as I get half the take.”

“Fine with me.” Lanara moved away from the bar, and pulled out her fiddle. She began to wander around the tables, mostly playing songs about drinking and carousing and deftly avoiding the hands of others. When she came near the tables of Barrai’s men, she invoked her bardic magic to infiltrate their minds, holding their attention rapt. She focused most of her power on the human, lacing her songs with a magical compulsion for him to want to speak with her openly and honestly about his work.

When she was done playing, the human kicked his companions out of the table and beckoned for Lanara to sit. She and Xu approached and sat down.

The human, named Udan, turned out to be one of Barrai’s drug sellers. Lanara posed as someone interested in getting into the business, and started asking questions. Though he did not know how to find Barrai or any of his lieutenants, Udan did tell Lanara how to find his supplier, who was working his normal area a few blocks away. Udan was more than eager to explain that his supplier most likely reported to either one of Barrai’s lieutenants or a sub-lieutenant.

“Can you tell us where to find him?” Lanara asked.

“Sure,” Udan said, and he proceeded to give directions. Then he looked both Xu and Lanara up and down. “A lot can happen to a couple of lovely women in a couple of blocks,” he said. “Would you like an escort?”

In response, Xu held up both of her empty hands, and clenched her fists tightly, causing her knuckles to crack loudly.

“So, that’s a maybe?” Udan said, with a crooked smile.

Xu stood up. “I find I need what passes for fresh air in this city.”

The two women left the Crocodile’s Eyeball, and after taking a moment to disparage men in general, followed the thug’s directions to his supplier. He wasn’t hard to find; as Udan had said, he spent his days posing as a beggar, and there was only one beggar on the street. Lanara and Xu observed the man from a safe distance, trying to learn what they could. Xu observed that occasionally passers-by would drop entire sacks of coins into the beggar’s bowl, rather than just individual coins, and the ‘beggar’ would stop the person to return their ‘purse’. Xu saw that the pouch handed back to the person was not the same one they had dropped. After several hours, the man stood up and collected his things, then began walking away. Xu and Lanara tried to follow, but lost him in the crowds in the market.

The two women returned to the Stag and Boar to a small celebration. Bryant Goodson, weak and bedridden but very much alive, was surrounded by his jubilant family. The room was crowded; Bryant’s four children sat on the edge of his bed, while their mother Felia sat nearby, holding his hand, unable to stop tears from running down her cheeks. Pella and Vigo’s three children ran around the room noisily, bursting with energy; had the party not rented out the entire inn, surely other patrons would have complained. What drew Lanara’s attention, however, was that Kyle was standing on the other side of the room, seeming quite alone, even though he was obviously very happy. A quick observation of body language told Lanara that it was the rest of the Goodson clan that was avoiding him, not the other way around. Kyle saw her looking in at them, and gave her a knowing nod. I see it too, the nod said, but now is not the time to worry about it.

Lanara came in to offer her congratulations to Bryant before retiring to her room. She found that Razael was there, and they enjoyed each other’s company for a while before Xu, Togusa and Kyle came by to discuss the day’s events. Lanara and Xu talked about their exploits at the Crocodile’s Eyeball.

“What’d you find, Raz?” Lanara asked.

“Not much,” he said. “The mine’s out there, like Gil said. Lots of guards, including some mages. There is mining going on, about half slave labor and half undead.”

“Slavery is illegal in Targeth,” Togusa said. “And undead labor must be licensed.”

“Well, I didn’t think to ask any of the zombies for their papers,” Razael said. “I couldn’t get very far in to see what else is going on, but something’s up down there. There’s way too many guards for just an iron mine. I stayed for a few hours to see if anything would happen, but it stayed quiet.”

“Maybe something we can check out later if we have time,” Kyle said. “In case we need some leverage.”

“What about this drug supplier fellow you watched this afternoon?” Razael asked. “You need him followed tomorrow?”

“Sure,” Lanara said, “it’d be good to know where he takes his profits.”

“If you get a location, I can try and scope it out magically,” Kyle said.

“I could also question him,” Togusa said.

“Thanks, Togusa, but remember we’re going for subtle,” Kyle said. “You’re… not.”

“I see. I am not accustomed to dealing with criminals in this fashion.”

“Patience,” Lanara said. “So, I think tomorrow I’ll hit the markets with Xu and start spreading rumors of insane dwarven crime lords.”

“I’ll check up on this fellow you saw today,” Razael said.

“I’ll wait here,” Kyle said. “I’ll load up on divinations, enchantments, and illusions. Let me know where you need me, and I can help, but probably better I don’t try to initiate anything on my own.”

“And you have a family to tend to,” Xu said.

“That’s true. One thing I’d suggest, Lanara, is make sure it’s known in vague terms that Barrai has some sort of grudge against Gil. That way, if we’re successful in the insanity campaign, people will ‘know’ why Barrai’s delusional rantings are directed at him.”

“Good plan,” Lanara said. “Well, that’s all for tomorrow. Let’s get some dinner and turn in. I have a feeling I have some late nights ahead.”

They ended up spending three weeks on the rumor spreading, paying Gil’s bribe to give themselves more time. Lanara went out every night, sometimes alone, sometimes with one of the others, working the crowds in markets, taverns, and festhalls. She was particularly busy during the New Year’s festival, working the crowds furiously. Razael focused most of his efforts on tracking people that Lanara identified as members of Barrai’s gang; they were able to scope out the outer layers of his guild, but the inner circle remained disturbingly out of their grasp. Kyle used magic where he could, scrying a particular thug or pimp here, creating an illusion to support one of Lanara’s rumors there. The efforts seemed to be paying off; Lanara reported she was hearing many of the tales she’d spread coming back to her. What really told them they were successful, however, was when they tried to kidnap Lanara.

Xu and Lanara came rushing back to the Stag and Boar one afternnon shortly before sunset, both flushed with exertion. Xu was carrying two unconscious forms. Kyle, Togusa, and Razael helped them back to their rooms. A quick examination of their left hands revealed a gray arrow-and-dot tattoo.

“There were six of them that jumped me,” Lanara said, sipping on a glass of wine as she tried to calm herself. The experience had been a little too reminiscent of her abduction by her sister Aranal and Hungai’s men. “Good thing Xu was there, watching my back. Four of them escaped, but not these two.”

“Wake them,” Togusa said. “I will find out what they know.”

Togusa was good to his word, getting the thugs to spill their guts without even threatening them. The men, named Grant and Turik, told the party that they had no idea why they’d been told to kidnap the woman; they got orders to kidnap someone when someone needed kidnapping. They revealed the source of their orders as someone named ‘Edwin’.

“How do you find Edwin?” Lanara asked.

“He finds us,” Turik squealed. “He tells us to meet him somewhere, then gives us our target and a rendezvous point. The others have probably gone back there already.”

“Where?” Togusa glowered.

“Corner of Back Street and Dwarftoss Alley,” Grant said.

The two thugs knew little more of value. After knocking them senseless again, Lanara and Kyle hit upon a plan to disguise themselves as the two men and meeting this Edwin, in the hopes of infiltrating the guild. Xu and Razael agreed to follow and watch them.

“I’ll leave it up to you two to decide what to do with those two scum,” Lanara said to Razael and Togusa.

“That’s easy,” Razael said, drawing his bow. As he reached for an arrow, though, Togusa’s sword was out of its scabbard in a flash, cutting the bowstring in two.

“Don’t,” Togusa said, leveling a stare at the tracker. “I will deal with them.”

“This is how we deal with thieves in the frontier,” Razael said, as he started to restring his bow.

“This is not the frontier, and you are not in Tlaxan, Huntsman,” Togusa said. “You have no authority to dispense justice here. I will deal with them.”

“My way’s better,” Razael argued.

“Try ‘your way’ again, and my sword will strike your bow, not the string.”

“Your loss,” Razael sighed. “Let’s go.”

Lanara and Kyle left in their disguises, followed in silence by Xu and Razael. They arrived at the street corner in question, and stood quietly in a shadowed area, assuming that real thugs would not stand in the open. Xu took up position above them on the rooftops, while Razael hid down an alley. As he got into position, Razael almost immediately noticed an unusual pile at the far end. Examining it, he blinked, then crept over and tugged on Lanara’s sleeve.

“Come here,” he whispered.

She followed him into the alley, where he showed her the bodies. “Any of them look familiar?”

“Yeah,” she said, “those are the other four who jumped me.”

“Thought so. They’ve been stabbed, I’ll bet by Edwin or people with him. Probably because they didn’t bring you back.”

“I’ll tell Kyle,” Lanara said quietly. “And we’ll be careful.”

As Lanara was returning, though, she saw Xu had come down from her position. “I saw someone signaling,” the monk said, “a few rooftops away. They stood against the setting sun to silhouette themselves, and made hand motions. At first I thought the person was casting a spell, but now it seems more likely to be some sort of silent code. The person ducked down after that.”

Lanara quickly relayed the news about the bodies, and asked Xu to tell Razael about the signals. Then she leaned in to talk to Kyle.

“You think this is still a good idea?”

“Not as much,” Kyle admitted, “but we need information, and we know to expect we might get attacked even if they think we’re these two thugs.”

Just then, a fairly large human with dirty blond hair and scars on his cheeks walked up to Lanara and Kyle. “Grant, Turik, you’re late,” he growled. “Let’s go.”

Kyle and Lanara looked at each other. “Right,” Lanara said, and they followed Edwin down the street.

Edwin led them to a decrepit warehouse on the far side of town. Opening up a surprisingly sturdy-looking door, Edwin motioned inside.

‘Grant’ and ‘Turik’ looked at each other, then walked inside. As the door swung closed behind them, Razael cursed silently, and began looking for a way down from the rooftop he’d been watching them from. They’d had little choice, of course; it was either go inside or blow their cover. But the whole setup stank of ambush.

Climbing down the side of a building, Razael approached the warehouse. Gently testing the door, he found it locked, which hardly surprised him. He was about to circle around when Xu stepped around the corner.

“The other doors are also secure,” she said, “and there are no windows.”

“I’ll try the roof,” Razael said quietly. “You go around back and wait for the signal, then bust in. This door here looks like it’d stop a charging stonebreather.”

“What is the signal?” Xu asked.

Razael smirked. “When Kyle gets going, he tends to be pretty loud.”

The tracker sprinted around the building and found an iron ladder up to the roof. At the top, he looked for any sign of a skylight or a rooftop hatch, but found none. Then, on a hunch, he pressed his ear to the wooden slats of the rooftop. It was silent for a while, but then he heard people talking.

“Please, no sudden moves, whoever you are,” said an unfamiliar male voice, “it would be a shame to have to perforate you with crossbow bolts.” The voice had an echo to it, suggesting the warehouse was mostly empty… no easy cover for Lanara and Kyle.

“Now,” the voice continued, “we know who you aren’t… you aren’t the people whose faces you now wear. What we want to know is who you are, and who you work for.”

“We work for ourselves.” The voice was male, but Razael knew it as the disguised voice of Lanara.

“If that’s so, what particular vendetta do you have against us and ours?”

“That depends on who you and yours are,” Lanara answered.

“Oh, please,” the man snapped. “We’re not ignorant.”

“I see no bodies,” Lanara said, “no bodies generally means no brains.”

“Well, it’s dark in here, isn’t it?” the man said, the condescension obvious in his voice.

“Then lighten things up a bit,” Lanara suggested.

“I think not.”

At that, Razael stood up and began searching again for another way into the building. Inside, Kyle and Lanara stood in the center of the warehouse, next to a small table. The only light was coming from a pair of candelabras on the table. The echoes of the empty warehouse made it difficult to tell which direction the speaker was from them.

“Well,” Kyle said, “we just don’t take it too kindly when good folks get jumped in the street.”

“We don’t take it too kindly,” the man shot back, “when people start a campaign of lies and slander against our leader.”

“And who would…” Lanara began, feigning ignorance, but she was quickly cut off.

“Don’t even try it,” the man snapped.

“Well, your leader seems to be doing that to a perfectly innocent council member,” Lanara said in response.

“Ah. So, you work for Gil Mendes.”

“No, we work for ourselves,” Lanara stated. “Gil did not hire us. After your blackmail, he has nothing to pay us with anyway.”

“Oh, of course he does,” the man said, chuckling. “He may not have money, but he’s an influential man with access to many resources and many friends. He’s got many ways to pay.”

Lanara shrugged. “Not anything around here we particularly want. Your taverns certainly leave much to be desired.”

“If there’s nothing you want here, then leave.”

Lanara glanced at Kyle. “Well, we’ve certainly dealt with braver people. They wouldn’t be hiding in the shadows otherwise.”

“In our line of work, brave equals dead.”

“So, Barrai runs a company of chickens?” Lanara’s heart was pounding a bit as she spoke, but she pressed on. Whoever was speaking to them seemed easy to rile with a few verbal jabs, and as long as he was trading barbs with her, he wasn’t ordering his men to shoot. It was a delicate game, though.

“He runs a company of intelligent, profitable people,” came the reply.

“I suppose intellect is in the eye of the beholder,” Lanara sighed. “You haven’t even figured out who we are.”

“We don’t know your names,” the man said, “but we know where you’re staying. We know you have ties with some of those lovely children I bet the orc tribes would love to get their hands on.”

Lanara glanced over at Kyle, unsure of how he would react. She saw his hands ball up into fists for a moment, then slowly relax. Good, Lanara thought, he knows getting angry now won’t get us out of here. Besides, they’d have to get through Togusa first.

“The orcs?” Kyle said, trying to keep the same casual tone in his voice. “We’ve been to the orcs. I’ll bet we could get those kids back without a problem. They’d probably give us parting gifts.”

When there was no reply, Kyle looked around in the darkness. “So, this is getting kind of boring.”

“Yeah,” Lanara interjected, “we have other things to do.”

“So, can we kind of get to the point?” Kyle concluded.

“Certainly. You have 24 hours to leave the city.”

“And if we don’t?” Lanara asked.

“The usual. Death, torture, slavery.”

“Assuming you could catch us, of course. Your first try didn’t work too well.”

Suddenly they heard someone pounding on the outside of the door through which they had entered. The noise continued on for several seconds.

“Someone’s at your door,” Lanara called out to the darkness, but there was no response. The knocking continued.

“Fine, I’ll get it.” Lanara walked to the door, followed by Kyle. She heard someone continue to knock on the outside. Examining the door, she saw it was solid, and secured with a double-locked bar – a key was required no matter which side you were on.

Lanara and Kyle looked at each other. If they hadn’t been shot at yet, they probably weren’t going to be. Kyle raised his arms, and tried to blast the door off its hinges, but it held fast. He sighed.

“I really wanted to break something before we left,” he said.

“We could carve our initials in the wood,” Lanara suggested.

“Nah, let’s just leave.” Kyle pulled out a scroll, and a second later he and Lanara appeared outside the door. They turned and saw Razael at the door, kicking at it with his boot while keeping an arrow notched.

“Hi!” Lanara said.

Razael whirled around, and almost put an arrow in Lanara’s eye. She pushed it away as soon as he relaxed his draw. “Nice reflexes.” She looked up at the warehouse. “Well, that was kind of fruitless.”

“It seems we’ve been discovered,” Kyle said.

“Yeah, I got that.”

Razael’s animal companion, the raven Kraw, circled down out of the night sky and landed on Razael’s shoulder.

“He was looking for signs of anyone leaving the building,” Razael explained, “since he’s not cawing his fool head off, he must not have seen anything.”

“Well, unfortunately,” Kyle said, “since they now know Gil’s involved,” Kyle glanced at Lanara, “we’ll need to go get him.”

“Is there a way to open the door?” Razael asked, pointing at the warehouse.

“Do we want to go in there and scare them, or try and save Gil’s butt?” Lanara asked.

“Go ahead and get Gil,” Razael said. “As far as I can tell, no one’s come out of here, which means the exit must be inside, unless they’re using magic. I want to look around.”

“Well, I’m not so good at kicking in walls,” Lanara sulked.

“Let’s find Xu,” Razael said.

They all moved around to the other side of the warehouse, looking for their monk companion. As they ran, Kyle looked at Razael.

“Well, Raz, I guess I owe you an apology. We should have just tried to kill them all from the start.”

Razael blinked, then nodded. “Accepted. You feeling all right?”

Kyle’s jaw clenched. “They know about the kids.”

They found Xu furiously punching a side door, splintering the wood. She looked up as the rest of the party rounded the corner. “I heard a commotion, and assumed it was ‘the signal’.”

“Keep going,” Razael said, as he pulled out his short sword to help.

They hacked at the door for a few moments, until they felt it giving way. Razael switched back to his bow and stood ready as Xu kicked the door into kindling. They went in quickly, ready for a fight, but no one opposed their entry. As Kyle summoned up light, they saw that the warehouse appeared empty.

“I’m going to see what I can find here,” Razael said. “Lanara, you run and fetch Gil, bring him back to the inn. Xu, head for the inn and let Togusa know what’s going on. Kyle, you stay here and watch in case any trouble comes.”

The party split up to their various tasks. About two minutes after Lanara and Xu had left, however, the heavily-armored figure of Togusa appeared in the smashed doorway.

“Kyle!”

“Togusa?” Kyle said, his heart skipping a beat. “What are you…”

The samurai ran forward, and bowed. “I bring unpleasant tidings,” he said. “I was searching for you when I encountered Xu Dhii Ngao, who told me where to find you. She has continued on to the Boar and Stag.”

“What is it?” Kyle asked, already fearing the answer.

“A large number of men assaulted the inn,” Togusa said. “Though many of them are now among the dead, there were far too many for me to protect your family.” He hung his head in shame. “I have failed you.”

“How many?” Razael asked.

“Many dozens,” Togusa said.

“Find Lanara,” Razael said to Kyle. “Get everyone back to the inn. I give it ten to one that they’re at the mine. If they are, I’ll send the raven.”

“Here, take Violet with you,” Kyle said. “She’ll be able to reach me faster than Kraw will.”

Razael nodded, and stepped outside. Pulling his magical cloak around himself, he transformed into a raven himself, and then he, Kraw, and Violet flew off into the night.

“Kyle,” Togusa said, “I apologize that I could not defend your family adequately.”

”It’s not your fault,” Kyle said. “We didn’t know that they knew what we were doing.”

“I did not expect that they would send so many,” Togusa said. “This Barrai appears to have a great many bodies to throw about. But the situation will be rectified.”
“Yes, it will,” Kyle said, his eyes flashing angrily. “But first I should find Lanara, and then Gil. And I’ll need time to prepare new spells – I’m now prepared for what I’ll need to do.”

“Will you allow me to make right my failure?” Togusa asked.

“Your help is definitely appreciated.” Kyle said. Looking over the samurai, Kyle saw a deep gash in his left arm. He pulled a potion out of his belt. “You’re wounded. Drink this, then return to the inn to help Xu and wait for us to get back.”

Togusa bowed, and then they split up. Kyle caught up to Lanara at Gil’s office at the town hall, where she was arguing with him over leaving with her.

“I’m a professional mistruster, you realize,” he was saying.

“I’m used to people not trusting me unless I’m making them,” Lanara said, “but this is not the time.” When she spotted Kyle, she pointed at him. “See? Would he have come to help me drag you off if it wasn’t serious?”

“They’ve hit the inn already,” Kyle said, “They took three of the kids.”

“Crap,” Lanara swore.

“Have you told him what happened?”

“Of course. I told him that Barrai knows about us, and threatened us and your family. I didn’t know they’d already attacked the inn.”

Kyle looked at Gil. “Does he know that Barrai knows about him, too?”

Gil’s eyes widened. “I see. That makes more sense. Wait one minute.” Gil went inside his office, and was heard blowing out candles and putting away papers.

“You didn’t tell him that you told Barrai’s men about him?” Kyle asked.

“I implied it. I thought he’d get the hint.”

Gil emerged a moment later wearing a long cloak. “Lead the way.”

The three returned to the inn several minutes later, and found a grisly sight. Blood stained the floor and walls in the inn, and broken furniture was everywhere. Going back to the rooms, they found Xu tending to the remainder of Kyle’s family, who were all unconscious. Togusa remained on guard just outside the door.

“The innkeeper fled when the attack started,” Togusa said. “I tried to get your family to leave with me, but I could not wake them.”

“Poison,” Xu said, pointing at the remains of the family’s dinner dishes. “They will sleep for several more hours, but will be fine. The children will sleep longer. I assume that Togusa was able to resist the poison’s effects.”

“Who’s missing, Kyle?” Lanara asked.

Kyle scanned the room. “Connor, Anjele, and Sariah,” he said, grimacing. “The three youngest.” He looked at everyone. “Everyone should get some rest. I’m going to use a scrying to make sure the kids are all right, then I’ll need to sleep so we can get the kids back.” Kyle looked at Xu. “When they wake up, come get me. I’ll need to tell them what happened.”
 

Delemental

First Post
Violet returned in the night to report that Razael was almost certain the children had been brought to the mine. There were recent tracks of people carrying burdens heading for the mine, and the guards had been greatly increased and were now more alert. Razael said he would wait there for the rest of them. Kyle’s spell revealed all three children, asleep in the same cell. In the morning, Kyle gathered the adult members of his family together and told them what had happened. He saw panic in their faces, but it was far less than he would have expected.

“I know you’ll get them back, Kyle,” his sister Pella said. “After all, you brought Bryant back from the dead, this will be easy.”

The others nodded their agreement with Pella’s sentiment. Kyle had to fight the urge to scream. Instead, he handed a large sack of coins to Pella.

“Take this,” he said. “Buy horses and wagons, and supplies. Don’t haggle, just get what you need quickly and leave town. Take the main road to Trageon. If we can, we’ll catch up to you. Otherwise, keep going east to Fingol, then cross to Aleppi, and go north from there to Vargas. Present yourselves at the home of Duchess Autumn Verahannen, tell them who you are, and what’s happened. She’ll take care of you.”

The party, along with Togusa and Gil, left shortly afterward, heading for the mine. When they were within a half-hour of the location, Xu ran ahead of the group to tell Razael they were coming.

The tracker spotted the monk approaching, and motioned her over. “How far behind are the others?”

“Twenty minutes,” Xu said.

Razael nodded toward the cave entrance, which Xu could barely see through the tall grass. “There’s ten sentries patrolling the area. Two stay near the entrance, the others stay within sight of each other in pairs. They don’t come out this far, so we’re safe here. You wait here for everyone else – I’m going to go clear out the guards before they get here.”

Razael crept around the perimeter of the patrol area, until he was crouched atop the entrance to the iron mine. Two of Barrai’s guards waited below, scanning the clearing around them. He pulled out a cluster of arrows, and examined the dark stain on the tips. Ten arrows, ten sentries. It’d be close, but then again, dragon bile was very effective. Too bad it would be difficult to find more to replace it.

Notching an arrow, Razael suddenly stood up, aiming for the back of one of the sentry’s neck. He let loose just as a cry went out from the other sentry, which was cut short by Razael’s second arrow. As the other guards began to rush back to the mine, Razael let his arrows fly.

By the time the rest of the group arrived, Razael was sitting outside the mine entrance, with ten dead sentries scattered at his feet, the broken stumps of arrows still protruding from their bodies, and their throats slit open.

“Thought I’d warm up a bit before you came along,” Razael said.

Everyone prepared spells and weapons for the upcoming assault. Razael went in first, taking about a thirty-second lead in order to scout the opposition. Gil seemed to fade out of view as soon as the group entered the mine, blending in with the surrounding stone.

The only opposition they encountered through the top levels of the mine was the undead workers Razael had described before, and the old elf dispatched most of them before the rest of the party even saw them. Those he didn’t kill, he slipped by quietly, leaving them for either Togusa or Xu to tear apart. The group caught up to Razael about five minutes in, waiting in a corridor just before a bend.

“This is about as far as I got the last time,” he whispered as the party gathered around. “Around the bend it opens up into a chamber – roundish, about fifty or sixty feet across, thirty foot ceiling at the center, with a big iron door on the other side. Last time there was an ogre guarding the door. I just checked, and the ogre’s been joined by a couple of thugs and a couple of mages.”

“We will want to take them out quickly,” Togusa said, “before they can raise an alarm or flee through the door.”

“It’s a big door,” Razael said. “I reckon it’d take that ogre to pull it open.”

Kyle turned to Lanara. “I know you can manipulate sound with magic. Could you mask the sound of the fight?”

“For one side or the other, but not both,” Lanara said. “Anyone on the other side of that door would hear something not right.”

“I can take care of the door problem, then,” Kyle said, “no one will go through it, and no one on the other side will hear what we’re doing.”

“Great,” Razael said, “then on three everyone pick something to kill.”
The party rushed around the corner, startling the guards in the chamber. Kyle put a wall of force across the door, sealing it off. Razael put a poisoned arrow into the ogre, while Togusa moved to the center of the room and took up a fighting stance, offering a silent challenge. Xu dashed around the room toward one of the thugs, stopping short to avoid overextending herself. The guards quickly overcame their surprise and responded; one of the mages tried to entrap Razael in a resilient sphere, but the elf was able to dive out of the way just in time. The other mage tried to inflict fear into Razael, Togusa, and Xu, but his spell was similarly ineffective. The ogre roared and began to lumber forward, but his charge was arrested when Kyle blasted it with a lightning bolt that also caught one of the mages. The stroke of lightning seemed to fill the room with a shockwave of force that threw the mage to the floor, a smoking hole in his chest, and caused the ogre to stagger back.

The thug closest to Xu moved in to attack the monk, but spent the rest of his life regretting that decision. Fortunately, it was only three or four seconds. The other thug fired arrows at Kyle, but they were deflected by his protective spells. Gil seemed to almost step out of the rough stone walls of the chamber and impale the second mage from across the room with a thrown blade of energy. Togusa felled the ogre with two swift strokes. The remaining guard quickly surrendered.

Lanara stepped up to the trembling guard, with Togusa glowering behind her. “What’s behind the door?”

“It’s our secret base!” the man screeched.

“Not so secret any more,” Razael commented.

“Where are the children?” Lanara continued.

“They would have been taken in there!” the rogue said, whimpering, “I don’t know where… probably the holding cells!”

“What else is down there?”

“Lots of people?”

“How many are dangerous to us?”
“Well, besides the slaves, a lot.”

“Give us numbers, you worthless slime!” Lanara shouted.

“I don’t know! I’m just a door guard! I don’t go down there much! Anywhere from twenty to a hundred, I’d guess!”

“What do they do down there?” Togusa asked.

“Lots of things. There’s alchemical equipment down there, beakers and tubes and stuff, and there’s the forges. I guess they make weapons for the guild down there from the iron we mine here.”

“Does Barrai come down here?”
“Sometimes.”

Razael came over to Lanara and Togusa. “We’re wasting time here.”
Lanara looked at Razael, nodded, and walked away. Togusa drew his katana.

“For the crimes of attempted murder and conspiracy, I find you guilty. The sentence is death.”

Togusa came over to the iron doors a moment later, and brought his adamantine weapon down between the narrow crack between them, slicing through the double bars holding it closed. They heard large sections of the locking mechanism fall away on the other side of the door with a loud crash. The party quickly pulled the doors open and stepped through.

They were hit with a wave of intense heat as soon as they stepped into the next room, and the smell of charcoal and sulphur burned their nostrils. The light had a reddish tone, and the air shimmered from heat. They were at the top of a cylindrical vertical shaft, which dropped forty feet to an area where several people were toiling. There was a pool of molten metal in the center of the room, with spigots leading off the cauldron. The workers were filling molds with the spigots, then taking them to be pressed and tempered. The molds produced several hollow metal tubes, about three feet long and the width of a table leg. A ramp went down from the door to the floor of the forge, spiraling down about three-quarters of the way around. They caught a glimpse of another door at the bottom, similar to the one they had just come through. Most of the workers seemed oblivious to their presence, but a couple of guards seemed to have heard the noise of the door being broken open, and were starting to collect together to investigate.

Razael used his cloak to transform himself into a raven, and began to fly down to scout out the bottom levels. As a squad of four guards began to march up the ramp, Xu also scrambled down the wall to get to the bottom. Togusa looked down, and took a step back.

“We should make sure that we discourage anyone from going for more help,” he said.

Kyle remembered the last time they’d seen Togusa, in the city of Miracle when he’d jumped through a second-story window trying to capture Neville’s assistant. He quickly cast a spell and touched Togusa on the shoulder as the samurai began his run. The magic enhanced his jump, and Togusa landed safely, if heavily, at the bottom of the room.

The guards began to move quickly up the ramp, seeing that there were definitely intruders. Down below, three more heavily armed men approached Togusa and Xu. Togusa and two of the warriors exchanged blows for a while before the samurai got the upper hand and cut one of them down, while Xu simply stunned her opponent with a quick nerve strike. Lanara tossed a thunderstone into the approaching squad, blasting them and causing them to stumble a bit before proceeding. Kyle did one better, summoning a defenestrating sphere that flung one of the warriors over the side of the ramp to land on the hard floor below.

Down below, Togusa was dealing with the second warrior, while Razael turned back into an elf and shot the man Xu was fighting, helping her dispatch him. The monk then began to run up the ramp, while Razael kept a watchful eye on the guard who’d fallen off the ramp and was beginning to rise. Lanara, who was singing, stepped back through the iron door as the squad of three warriors approached and took a swing at her, and Gil, who’d stabbed at the lead guard with his mindblade and was now visible, also withdrew, his cloak swirling around him. Kyle, now facing down three warriors alone, quickly blasted the closest one with magic missiles while moving his defenestrating sphere on top of him as well, pushing the guard back and blocking their progress, though this time the whirling ball of air did not push the guard off the side. By this time Togusa and Razael had dispatched the remaining opposition at the ground level.

“Perhaps you could oblige us and send more down?” Togusa called out.

“Working on it!” Kyle shouted back, as he moved the air sphere into another guard and slammed him against the outside wall, causing him to bounce over to the edge of the ramp. Lanara cast a spell and paralyzed one of the other warriors, while Xu, running up from behind, caught the last one and knocked him senseless. Gil helped Kyle dispatch the last guard, and the battle was over.

Collecting themselves at the bottom, they tried to question the workers, who were huddled in a far corner. But they seemed to know little of the complex beyond the next set of doors, and were not even certain if Kyle’s nephew and nieces had been brought through there. After being threatened by Togusa to remain where they were, the party pressed forward, allowing the samurai to again carve through the door’s locks with his adamantine blade.

They entered a series of rough tunnels, which seemed to be used mostly for storage. They encountered some token resistance here that was swiftly removed. Many of the tunnels had rooms off of them, with a variety of materials. One small side chamber contained more of the strange metal tubes, as well as a much larger tube constructed from a hollowed-out log reinforced with iron bands. The room also contained several small casks. Razael was almost tempted to open a cask, but was reminded by an increasingly agitated Kyle that they could spend all the time they wanted looking at the thieves’ stuff after his nieces and nephews were safe.

The tunnels led deeper underground, and they noticed that the air had become moist. They stopped at another set of the large doors, though these were made of wood rather than iron.

“What’s that sound?” Lanara asked. “It sounds like the ocean.”

“Air currents, maybe,” Kyle said, clearly getting impatient. “Are we going through?”

Expecting more resistance beyond the door, Kyle and Lanara renewed their defensive spells, and then Togusa opened the door with a single downward stroke. The samurai and Razael kicked it open, ready for whatever lay beyond.

Well, almost ready. What they saw beyond the doors gave them a moment’s pause, which may have been why they weren’t able to react quickly enough to the men waiting for them.

A line of four armored men stood on a platform at the end of a long wooden dock leading out over an underground lake. Two lightly-armored men and two mages stood right behind them. Each of the four armored men was pointing one of the strange metal tubes at the party, which looked as though they’d been mounted to a crossbow stock. As soon as they stepped into the room, there was a tremendous noise and flash, and white smoke blasted out of the hollow ends of the tubes. Togusa and Razael felt something hit them in the chest; small lumps of iron that seemed like sling stones but hit much, much harder. However, the metal lumps seemed to just bounce off Togusa’s adamantine armor, and Razael’s enchanted leather defelcted most of the impact. When the smoke cleared, there was little clear effect.

“What the…?” was all Razael said, before drawing his bow and planting arrows into one of the mages.

All Kyle said was to shout out a few arcane phrases, and a fireball detonated in the midst of the enemy group. Like the lightning bolt before, the spell seemed to carry an unusually strong concussive force, and several people were knocked to their feet. Both of the mages were burned to a crisp, and several others were severely burned.

“I’m unimpressed with your technology!” Kyle shouted.

The battle was joined. Xu slipped quietly into the water, hoping to come up behind and surprise the enemy. Togusa moved up to engage the armored men, who were dropping the tubes and drawing swords. One of the lightly-armored rogues pulled out a fist-sized metal ball and twisted it, then threw it at Togusa and Razael. The sparking ball hit the dock, bounced, and then exploded, shooting flames everywhere and scorching both of them. In response, Kyle killed one of the warriors with scorching rays, while Lanara cast a hold person on the rogue throwing the metal balls, freezing him in place.

All in all, it was a brief battle. The enemy was quickly overwhelmed, and the held rogue questioned briefly just to confirm that the children had been taken exactly where they thought they had.

The party turned to regard the structure that had first caught their attention. At the very end of the dock was anchored one of the largest ships they’d ever seen. The ship was unusually tall, and the sides were festooned with small openings. Sticking out from the openings were dozens of the hollow logs they’d seen in the storage room.

“What in blazes does Barrai expect to do with that thing?” Gil asked, speaking to no one in particular.

“Who cares?” Lanara said, “I’m not going anywhere near it.”

“Fine,” Kyle said, “I am. Gil, stay with Lanara. Razael, find the children. Togusa, break things, kill thieves. Xu and I will find Barrai.”

Kyle, Xu, and Togusa proceeded up the dock toward the gangplank, with Lanara and Gil remaining back close to the entrance to the cavern. Razael turned into a raven again, and flew in through one of the holes in the side of the ship. Two guards at the top of the gangplank proved barely a distraction.

They separated and began searching the strange ship. Most of the people on board fled rather than confront the party; those who did quickly perished. Togusa spent most of his time on the outer decks, slicing through the large hollow logs.

Razael proceeded into the inner portions of the ship. He presumed that, even with its odd design, that the brig of the ship would be located roughly where it was on a normal galleon. Sure enough, he came upon a guarded area, and after dispatching the sentries, he began searching the cells. Toward the end of the row, he heard the distinct sound of crying children.

Razael unlocked the door, and found three children huddling in the corner; Connor, Anjele, and Sariah. Throwing the door open wide, he went over and knelt down in front of them. The children, finally recognizing the elf, scrambled to get to their feet and clutch onto him, crying.

“Shh,” he said, surprisingly gently. “You’re safe now, younglings. Let’s get you back to your folks.”

Meanwhile, Xu and Kyle proceeded to climb up to what they presumed was the captain’s cabin. Xu kicked open the door, and they saw a dozen people in the room, all heavily armed. Standing behind them was a sour-looking dwarf that could only be Barrai.

“So,” Barrai growled, “you must be the ones behind the lies. Well, I don’t know how you made it this close to me, but you’ll get no closer. These are my personal bodyguards. This will prove a minor setback at most – soon I’ll have enough weapons to arm the populace and begin the uprising!”

“Are you referring to those metal tubes?” Xu asked. “We found them to be an ineffective deterrent at best.”

“You mock me!” Barrai shouted. “I’ll have you killed slowly!”

“I’m tired of this banter,” Kyle growled. “You threatened my family. No one. Threatens. My. Family.” Kyle glanced at Xu. “Kill them.”

The monk exploded into motion before anyone had a chance to blink. In mere moments, two of Barrai’s bodyguard were down, clutching their smashed throats, while a third gasped for air, holding his stomach. The bodyguards drew their weapons and charged, but their progress was halted when rubbery black tentacles erupted out of the floor and ensnared them. Seeing this, Barrai retreated through a back door along with four of his men.

“You got this?” Kyle asked Xu, nodding toward the remaining bodyguards.

“Go.” Xu was making good use of the tentacles, grabbing people and carrying them into the spell’s area. Her magical ring rendered her immune to the tentacle’s grasp.

Kyle proceeded past the melee and through the door, walking down a small corridor before coming to another door. He used a mage hand to pull the door open, and was unsurprised when crossbow bolts came flying out. The bolts scattered against his protective spells. Casting another spell, Kyle walked in.

A few moments later, as Xu dispatched the last of the bodyguard, she saw Kyle walk out of the door. “Is everything all right?” she asked.

“I’m fine,” Kyle said. “I’m going to go find the others. Just to warn you, the four guards are still alive back there. But I think that once they can move, they might not have much fight left in them.”

Xu turned toward the back door, curious, as Kyle exited. She walked down the corridor and pushed open the door.

Inside, she saw the four guards, weapons drawn as if about to charge the door. Two crossbows had been dropped to the floor nearby. The four men seemed frozen in place; not magically paralyzed, as Lanara had done to the other rogue outside, but somehow held rigid with cold fear, unwilling to move a single muscle. There was no sign of Barrai at first, but then Xu saw something sticking out from behind a desk in the back of the room. She walked back, and took a look. Lying on the floor was the desiccated corpse of a dwarf, still spasming slightly. Xu regarded the body for a moment, then walked out of the room.

* * *​

It was another two days before the party left Delgan. With Barrai dead, Gil was able to return to his position without fear. He was also able to use information gathered from Barrai’s secret lair to incriminate several other members of the guild, spreading some of the information to the city watch, and some to rival guilds. With his reputation secure with both the public and the underworld, Gil felt confident that within three years he’d be elected mayor of Delgan.

The information about Barrai that was not made public was far more unnerving. Barrai had wanted nothing less than to lead a revolution against the leaders of Targeth and their archmages. They’d discovered that the underground lake fed into a river that emerged onto the surface several miles away from Delgan, into a larger river that led straight to Trageon. They had been developing the strange explosive weapons to counteract the effectiveness of arcane magic on the field of battle, trying to even the playing field. Though the smaller, personal versions (which were called ‘muskets’) were still rather crude and inefficient, the larger ship-mounted ‘cannons’ seemed capable of causing a great deal of structural damage. The party found copies of the plans for the weapons, and formulas to create the explosive powder used. They’d brought along a cask of the powder, a bag of shot, and one of the muskets; a gift for Arrie.

It took almost a month for the party to reach the other side of Targeth in order to make the crossing into Tlaxan; while escorting Kyle’s family, they didn’t have the option of using magic to enhance their speed. Kyle spent as much time as he could with his family, trying to catch up on old times and get any clues he could about the whereabouts of his remaining family. Lanara noticed that in some ways, Pella and Bryant were able to pick up with their older brother as if no time at all had passed; in other ways, there was an unseen, insurmountable wall between them. Kyle had evolved nearly beyond their capacity to accept; they were used to wizards being in charge, not to inviting wizards over for a Festival banquet and to check out the new foals. Pella seemed a little more comfortable around him, but not completely. With the in-laws, it was worse; Bryant’s wife Felia looked on him with something close to awe (Kyle had given up trying to explain that he, personally, had not brought her husband back from the dead), while Vigo, Pella’s husband, regarded Kyle with narrow-eyed mistrust. Thus Lanara was not very surprised to see a look resembling relief cross Kyle’s face as their ferry passed under Targeth’s barrier and they crossed into Tlaxan.

“How long until Vargas?” Pella asked, as they were unloading their wagons in Aleppi.

“About ten days,” Razael said. He looked down at the children at Pella’s feet, and saw that their faces were streaked with soot. He was about to say something harsh when he suddenly realized what day it was. Today was the first day of the Time of Burning, Grabâkh’s festival; the children were observing the Blessing of Ash*. He’d been living in Tlaxan so long that he’d forgotten that people observed this particular holiday, but realized it made sense for Pella and her family. They lived in western Targeth, much closer to the border to the Haran and the Western Expanse, and so naturally orcish traditions would have seeped into human cultures there.

“What blessing did you ask for?” Razael asked Nathan, the oldest.

“That we find a safe home, and that no one will try and hurt Mommy or Uncle Bryant again,” he said.

Razael found he had no words for a reply. I hope you get your wish, youngling, I really do. I just don’t think you will.

His thoughts were interrupted by the sight of a silver speck in the sky, which was growing in size rapidly as it descended straight toward them. As he watched, the speck became a bird shaped object, and as it slowed and landed on Kyle’s shoulder, he saw it was a silver raven. A familiar one.

“What is that, Kyle?” Felia asked, pointing at the silver raven that now sat on Kyle’s left shoulder, opposite Violet. “Is it some sort of message from Erito?”

“No, Felia,” Kyle said, almost able to keep the sigh out of his voice. “It’s a message, but not from Erito. She’s not really in the habit of writing me.”

“Kyle, blasphemy!” Pella scolded, covering Nathan’s ears.

Kyle shook his head and smiled a little. “I’ll have to introduce you to Tolly one of these days.” He plucked the silver raven off his shoulder. “No, this is a magical device, one used to send messages long distances. Like a carrier pigeon, except you can send it anywhere you want. And you don’t have to feed it.”

Kyle held the raven in both hands, and pressed the latch on the back that opened its message compartment. He removed the neatly folded parchment inside and shook it open, reading it quickly.

“It’s from Arrie, of course,” he said to his companions. “It says, ‘Everyone, glad you made it back safe. Kyle, hope you found what you were looking for. Please get to Vargas as fast as you can. Autumn needs our help. City’s in bad shape.”

“You think she’s in danger?” Razael asked.

“I don’t think so,” Kyle said. “If she was, Arrie would have done more than have her raven parked in Aleppi waiting for us to get back.”

“Any chance we can get there faster that ten days?” Lanara asked.

“Not with these people along,” Razael said, jerking a thumb back at Kyle’s relatives.

“Kyle,” Bryant said, “if we’re slowing you down, then go with your friends. We’ll catch up.”

“No,” Kyle said flatly, “I’m not leaving you undefended.”

“But Kyle,” whispered Lanara, “We’re out of Targeth now. Isn’t that safe enough?”

“My cousin was killed in Tlaxan,” he hissed back. “Autumn and I were attacked in the damned Imperial Palace. At best, Tlaxan is safer only because the Scion-Watchers won’t expect the Goodsons to leave Targeth. But it’s not safe. And there are threats out there besides Scion-Watchers.”

“So, then, I guess we do our best and hope Arrie understands,” Lanara sighed.

“Not quite.” Kyle motioned for everyone to come in closer so they could talk. “Okay, I’m not going to just leave my family behind. End of story. But what I can do is get some of you there faster. I have my shadow walk spell ready; I can put my family up in an inn here in Aleppi for the night, and get the rest of you to Vargas in about half a day. Then I’ll shadow walk myself back and bring my family in overland.”

“Kyle,” Togusa said, “allow me to remain here to protect your family, and then escort you to Vargas.”

“Sure, Togusa,” Kyle said. “I’d appreciate it.”

“I would like to remain as well,” Xu said. “In Delgan, we erred in underestimating our enemy’s resolve and willingness to sacrifice so many lives to strike at us. That will not happen again.”

“Well, I’ll go to Vargas,” Lanara said. “I’ll probably be more use up there than I would here anyway.”

“I’ll go with the lass,” Razael said. “I do still have a duty to watch over the princess and the duchess, and if Arrie’s calling everyone in, chances are Madrone’ll be showing up at Vargas any day now.”

“All right, then,” Kyle said, “let’s get moving, then. I, for one, am ready to put Targeth and the Scion-Watchers behind me for a while. I never thought I’d say it, but in some ways I’m looking forward to just dealing with some simple politics for a while.”

---------------------------------

* Since Grabakh is an evil god, most people outside of the orcs are reluctant to honor him directly. However, the Time of Burning comes in the middle of winter, and since Grabakh is a god of fire, many people tend to emphasize his elemental nature over his moral stance. The fact that Grabakh's planetary domain lies within the system's sun also gives him a leg up with the public.

The Blessing of Ash is a ritual where a person writes down their hopes and wishes for the coming year on a piece of parchment (or has it written for them if they aren't literate). The parchment is burned, and the ash spread on your face - the orcs tend to paint elaborate designs with the ash, but other races don't go to that much trouble. You are supposed to wear the ash markings for the entire two-day festival, and by doing so your desires are supposed to be granted.
 

Delemental

First Post
Statutory Crimes

This adventure is actually one that I ran as a guest DM to give our regular DM a break. So, in advance, I should probably apologize. :)

----------------------------

Malick Bardossa ran for his life.

Panting, he rounded the corner to the alley, not even daring to pause to look behind him. He could hear the shouts of his pursuers, somewhere behind him, still too close. As if to accentuate the point, the bolt from a crossbow suddenly struck the wall near his shoulder, jamming itself into the wood.

Damn these Night Blades! he thought, panicked. Why me?

It wasn’t just him, though, and he knew it. The Black Hand was being slowly wiped out by these interloper guilds. Four of them… four! had come into the city since old Robar had vanished, and their first order of business had been to uproot the old guard. In the past five months, he’d fought off attacks from not only the nut jobs with the Night Blade, but the Poisoned Edge and their toxins, the Night Whispers with all their damned animals, and the runts from the Silent Foot. But still, he’d always figured that eventually things would settle down, and they’d all find their place. That was the way things worked.

But it had gotten worse ever since than blond bitch, the new Duchess, had arrived and announced she was going to be cleaning up the city. With an actual effective government in Vargas, there was only going to be room for so many criminal guilds, and they were all trying to make sure they stayed on the top of the heap.

Malick had been alive longer than most for one reason only; as a two-stick man*, he had a bit more of an arsenal than most. But that wasn’t helping him now. Now he was out of scrolls, out of potions, and not a wand on him. With the Black Hand scattered like it was, he just couldn’t get his hands on magical supplies like he used to. He still had his personal stash, though… if he could get to it.

His hopes started to rise as he heard the sound of the river lapping up against the docks. His bolt-hole was close. His pounding heart sang when he saw the nondescript fishing shack come into sight. With barely a moment to spare, he jumped through the door and quickly set the latch. It would only delay his pursuers a second or two, but seconds counted in this business.

Dashing to the corner, Malick threw open the trapdoor in the floor, then slid down the ladder, making sure to pull the trapdoor shut behind him. He dropped into a pitch-black room, and immediately turned and walked down a corridor. He navigated by pure memory, turning left and right at just the right places. It was only when he came into a much larger room that he stopped to take out a small enchanted light-stone.

The light revealed bare walls, and a few crude shelves. Malick went to the shelves and began scooping things into his bag, stuffing a couple of wands into his belt and grabbing a fistful of scrolls. After cleaning out everything he could, he turned his light off and began to make his way to another tunnel, which led to an underground cavern that had been undercut by the river. From there he could emerge further down in the docks and disappear.

He stopped when he heard shouts from his pursuers. It was hard to pinpoint, but they were definitely coming from in front of him, not behind. Damn! They found the caves!

Malick doubled back to his storage room, and heard shouts coming from the tunnel he’d come in from. Panic set in, and Malick turned and ran down another corridor off the room, one he never used because it went nowhere. He figured his only hope was to hide and hope they didn’t search too hard for him.

He came around a corner, and dashed to the end of the corridor. Unfortunately, Malick wasn’t as familiar with this tunnel as the ones he normally used, and he overestimated the length. Stars flashed in Malick’s vision as his head rammed into the stone wall. He almost fell backward, but caught himself. As he rubbed his forehead, and felt blood trickling from a cut on his scalp, Malick was surprised to hear the sound of loose stone falling, and a sudden waft of stale air hit his face. Surprised, Malick reached out to feel the wall. Some of the stone had fallen away, and there was now a small gap.

Malick felt the hole, had a sudden idea, paused to contemplate it. A sudden, louder shout from one of the Night Blade assassins made up his mind. Malick rammed his shoulder into the wall, widening the gap just enough to slip through. After forcing his way past the opening, Malick dropped to one knee and lit up his magic stone again. He pulled out the sheaf of scrolls and went through them quickly, tossing them on the ground as he searched for the one he wanted. Finally, he pulled a single sheet of parchment out, and began intoning the arcane words. Seconds later, the loose stone around the wall began to fill in, until a second later there was no sign of disturbance.

Malick waited, holding his breath. He heard his pursuers reach the end of the tunnel. He heard loud voices arguing, though he couldn’t make out the words. After a few minutes, the voices seemed to recede. He let his breath out slowly, and stood up. There was little to do now, except see where he was. The Night Blade would be watching his place for hours to see if he came out. But he might be able to find another exit, and if not he was sure he could break down the wall again.

Shining his light around, the first thing Malick noticed was the carvings on the wall. Ornate carvings, like the kind found in the fancy stone houses in the northern part of the city. Dust lay thick all over, and Malick rubbed at his nose to keep from sneezing, feeling the scar there from when he’d had the end bitten off by that wolf the Night Whispers had sent to attack him three months ago.

Following the passageway, Malick soon came to another large room. Dominating the center of the room was a large sarcophagus. Nervous, Malick approached the stone slab. He’d heard his share of vampire stories, of course, though there were no reports of recent vampire attacks. But the sarcophagus was large, and well-crafted, the kind of thing where people got buried with a lot of valuables.

Peering at the stone lid, Malick blew dust off the surface and read the epitaph:


HERE LIES PARIOS, DUKE OF VARGEX, LORD MAYOR OF VARGAS


Malick thought for a moment, but couldn’t remember a Duke Parios. Must not have been a popular Duke, if you didn’t end up in the catacombs beneath the Ducal Manor. Still, never look a gift horse…

Pulling a small crowbar from his bag, Malick began working on opening the sarcophagus. It was slow work with only one, but Malick had time to kill. Eventually, he was able to slide it away far enough to see inside. His light immediately picked up the glint of gold and gems. Malick began pulling valuables off the Duke’s corpse, rather irreverently tossing aside old bones that interfered with his work. He pocketed a gem-studded circlet, and an amulet, and then pulled a large ring off the finger. Looking at the ring, Malick saw that it bore the ducal seal.

“Oh, I think I can find a use for you,” he said quietly to himself. He’d forgotten that Dukes were always buried with a copy of the signet ring. Though no expert in forgery himself, he figured that someone would pay handsomely for this ring. On a whim, he stuck it on his finger, and started to return to his looting.

Suddenly, Malick’s mind was filled with images. He could see… no, feel his awareness expand outside the room, into the city. His mind focused on eight different spots in Vargas, on some of the many statues of Kythrian Varges. In his mind, he felt the presence of these statues, and realized they were more than just blocks of stone. He felt the ring searching for something within him, some key element that would trigger the magic. Almost instinctively, Malick began the exercises in mental subterfuge designed to confound magical auras, to allow him to unlock an item’s secrets just as a box man used tools to fool a lock into opening. It was tricky, as the ring didn’t seem to be looking for the traditional components; a certain faith, a particular moral outlook, a certain body of knowledge. But finally, Malick’s ever-shifting mind managed to confound the probing magic enough, and he felt the sudden surge of power as the ring connected to him. Imperfectly, to be sure, but connected nonetheless.

In his mind, he felt the eight statues of Kythrian suddenly become aware of him. And he heard eight identical voices in his mind.

Command us, master.

Malick smiled, and laughter filled the tomb.

Oh, he could definitely find a use for this ring.

* * *​

Out in the courtyard, Arrie waited impatiently, pacing back and forth along the cobblestones. Several of the most severely damaged ones had been repaired in the past two months, and the overgrown ivy had been trimmed back, making the footing steadier than it had been (several visitors to the manor had ended up nursing twisted ankles in the first two weeks).

She had no idea why she was edgy today. She felt as though she were expecting something to happen, though she honestly couldn’t say what that ‘something’ would be. Life in Vargas had become almost routine, as much as it could when you were helping your sister try and rule a crime-riddled city. Arrie had spent most of her time responding to the messages that had started coming in from the various baronies and counties that were part of the Duchy of Vargex, trying to defer their requests for a visit from Autumn as long as she could without directly admitting that Vargas was in too rough a shape for her to leave it.

She saw a patrol of the city watch go by the main gate of the manor, and sighed. Autumn had made a request to the local Imperial garrison for aid, but the request was apparently tied up in bureaucratic issues, and no soldiers had been sent. Arrie had no doubt they could thank Emperor Haxtha for the ‘bureaucratic issues’. Fortunately, they had been able to recruit a few more citizens for the watch, and purge some of the more corrupt ones from the roster, and so in general the city was safe enough in the day. Nights were still a problem, though.

Autumn spent most of her days meeting with those who still had some influence and power in the city; the heads of guilds, wealthy upper-class citizens, land owners. She’d held a reception at the manor about two weeks after the new year, which was very lightly attended. Since then, there’d been no time to plan a second event. She was aided a great deal by Shoshone, the advisor that Haxtha had sent with them; Arrie had no doubt that Shoshone was one of the Emperor’s intelligence agents, though Shoshone herself never admitted to as much. Her presence in the city had been the one favor Haxtha had done for Autumn (oh, there were the three Imperial Guardsmen, too; she couldn’t forget about them), and her aid to the new Duchess had been invaluable. Arrie couldn’t help but wonder if Haxtha had deliberately sent a tiefling agent just to annoy her aasimar sister; fortunately, the racial differences had never caused any problems.

As for Osborn, he hadn’t been seen for days. Some of their initial information about the five criminal guilds in the city indicated that one of the newest ones, the Silent Foot, was comprised entirely of gnomes, dwarves, and hin, and they seemed to have some sort of bias against the taller races. Osborn had offered to try and infiltrate the Silent Foot, going deep undercover to ferret out the guild’s secrets. No one had seen him since then; the only reason they knew he was okay was that every other day a blank piece of paper was found stuck to the front gate that smelled strongly of bacon.

Arrie realized suddenly that she had started to pace, and forced herself to stop, instead sitting down on the corner of the marble statue in the center of the courtyard. The statue was of Kythrian Vargex, the first Duke of Vargex and founder of the city. There were over a dozen statues of Kythrian all around Vargas, including the one that Arrie was now using as a chair. They’d made a few jokes in private about the vanity of the man when they’d learned how many of these identical statues were in the city, but it seemed that Kythrian was still very highly thought of by the populace, and seemed to be regarded as the city’s protector. To be sure, all of the statues of Kythrian had been positioned to look at the ducal manor, as if watching over the ruler for any sign of corruption. Every one of the statues held the same pose; a regal elf dressed in plate armor, decorated with runes, who stood in serene vigil, no weapon in hand.

“Where were you six months ago?” Arrie asked the statue. Clearly, the previous steward of Vargas, Count Robar, would not have lived up to Kythrian’s standards. Now, if only they could find out what had happened to him…

One problem at a time, Arrie warned herself. The problem was, it was hard to decide which problem to tackle first. Maybe that was what had her on edge; their inability to make a decisive move. Or perhaps she was just bored; of all of them, her days had much more free time. She’d offered to do more, but Shoshone had asked her to refrain, saying that they didn’t want it to appear like the Imperial Princess – and by extension, the Emperor – was ‘carrying’ the new Duchess. So, for the most part, she played the role of ‘distinguished visitor’, lending a hand only where it wouldn’t be obvious, such as writing letters that Autumn could then sign and seal, or helping to entertain guests.

Under normal circumstances, the arrival of the silver raven might have caught Arrie off guard as she sat gathering her thoughts. But her developing psionic abilities had enhanced her innate sense of her surroundings, keeping her at least somewhat cognizant of what was happening around her even when her mind was occupied. When she saw the metallic construct descending into the courtyard, she had to suppress the urge to jump with glee. Its return could only mean one thing; her message had been received. Arrie eagerly popped open the raven’s message compartment as soon as it landed, and extracted the note inside.



Arrie – We arrived in Aleppi today, got your message. We can’t all get there as fast as you’d like, but some of us will be coming to help via the Kyle Express. If you’re reading this, we’ve just landed in Vargas, and will be at Autumn’s house in twenty minutes. Please make sure the guards don’t shoot us. – Lanara



Grinning, Arrie stuffed the note into a pocket and walked down to the main gate. The guards posted there snapped to attention as soon as the Imperial Princess appeared.

“There will be visitors arriving within the next half an hour,” Arrie said. “They’re to be let in immediately and brought up to the house.”

“Of course, Your Highness,” said one of the guards, saluting. “How many visitors, and how will we know them?”

Arrie paused. The letter hadn’t said who was coming. “I’m not certain of the exact number,” she said, “but look for a cansin woman with pink hair.”

“Very good, Your Highness,” the guard said, and returned to his duties as Arrie went up to the house to tell everyone.

When Lanara, Kyle, and Razael walked up to the gate fifteen minutes later, the guards took one look at them – specifically, at Lanara – and opened the gates immediately. “You’re all expected by Her Grace, the Duchess of Vargex, and Her Highness, the Imperial Princess of Tlaxan,” the guards said.

Autumn and Arrie were waiting out in the courtyard when they walked up. Arrie ran up and gave Kyle a big bear hug, which he returned, and then she did the same for Lanara, nearly lifting the cansin off her feet. Razael stood nearby, silently, as they greeted each other.

Autumn walked up to Lanara, embracing her, and laughing at something the bard whispered in her ear. Then she let go, and turned to Kyle, who was waiting for her.

“Hey, guys,” Arrie said, seeing what was happening, “I’ve really been dying to show you all this section of wall way over here.”

“Oh, wow!” Lanara said, walking away with Arrie, “is that stone?” She paused only long enough to grab Razael’s arm and drag him along with them.

For a while, neither of them said a word to each other. Though they had only been separated two months, both of them wore the mantles of heavy burdens, a heavy look in the eyes that spoke of a decade’s worth of troubles, sorrows, and worries.

“I can’t stay,” Kyle said at last, though it seemed to take an enormous effort for the words to come out.

Autumn made no effort to disguise her disappointment. “Why?”

“I found some of my family. They’re in Aleppi now, with Xu and Togusa. I have to go back to make sure they get here safely.”

Autumn grasped Kyle’s hands. “Kyle, that’s wonderful! I can’t wait to meet them!”

“They’re excited to see you, too,” he said, cracking a slight smile. “If for no other reason that to meet a real duchess.”

Her face drooped a little. “Don’t remind me,” she said. “It’s been miserable, Kyle. I know I shouldn’t say that to you now, you have your own worries, but…”

“I understand. Believe me, I do. We’ll… we’ll need to talk when we have more time.”

Autumn nodded slowly. “I agree. There’s too much to start now.”

There was another long moment of silence, and then they kissed. A slow, lingering kiss that spoke of nothing more than a desire to be close to one another.

Their lips parted, reluctantly. “How long can you stay?” Autumn asked.

“An hour, I figure,” Kyle said. “That’ll get me back to Aleppi in time to get on the road first thing in the morning.”

“So soon…”

“I could stay longer, lose a little sleep…”

“No… no. Better if you just get back to me as fast as you can. I’ll arrange something for your family.” Autumn pulled back, reluctantly. “We should go catch up to the others. They’ve spent enough time pretending to be busy for our sake, don’t you think?”

Kyle sighed. “Sure, sure.”

The couple caught up to Arrie, Razael, and Lanara just as the three of them finished a quick look around the grounds. “So, what do you think of Arrie’s house?”

“Nice, except that it’s in the city,” Razael sniffed. “I’d prefer something out in the country myself.”

“But it is the highest point in the city,” Lanara pointed out. “I’ll bet you could shoot people really well from those windows up there.”

“You know, it disturbs me how you can always find a silver lining for him,” Arrie said.

“So, you called us.” Razael asked.

“We just need a little help everywhere, it seems,” Autumn sighed. “Crime and corruption are rampant in the city, and the Empire’s not providing much in the way of substantial help.”

“You mean Haxtha’s not providing much,” Razael spat. “You ask me, the best thing would be to put an arrow in Haxtha’s brain and put Herion on the throne.”

“Except that would turn Princess Ariadne into Empress Ariadne,” Kyle said, “and I’d be willing to bet that she wouldn’t get her remaining five years of freedom** if that happened. I’d rather keep her around longer.”

“As would I,” Autumn said. “And Razael, I’d appreciate you not voicing sedition out loud where others can hear you.”

“Who’s here to listen?” Razael said.

“You’d be surprised,” said a familiar voice above them.

Descending from the sky as if walking on the air itself, Madrone descended into their midst. She was immediately greeted with embraces and shouts of glee. As they looked at their friend, they noticed several changes in her. Her raven-feather cloak, a symbol of her faith and her standing in the church of Erito, was now much longer, and woven in with the many black feathers were a few pure white ones. In addition, Maddie now wore a single earring from which hung a very large, white feather, the length of her forearm. Razael stared closely at the feather for a long time.

“That’s a raven feather,” he said. “I’m sure of it. But it shouldn’t be that color, or that size. Where did you get it?”

“I’ll explain another time,” she said, smiling. “For now, suffice it to say I was on a pilgrimage.”

“Without me?” Razael said.

“Yes. Your presence would have… complicated things. The pilgrimage was given to me by the Serenity herself. But it’s over now, and I’m back with friends. Let’s open up a few bottles of Autumn’s wine and catch up.”

“I’ll have to join you later,” Autumn said. “I have to meet with my advisors about my outing.”

“Outing?” Lanara asked.

“My advisors have planned a luncheon and reception for me to attend in two days, right after the end of the Time of Burning,” the sentinel said. “At some place called the Medusa’s Lair.”

“Seems they want to show everyone that it’s safe to be out in public again,” Arrie said. “Apparently the Lord Mayor’s usually fairly accessible to the people. They’re trying to show that Autumn’s making an effort to get out in public again.”

“That doesn’t sound so bad,” Maddie said.

“It’s several hours of toasts, speeches, and talking with a bunch of stuffy people I’d just as soon punch in the face as spend five minutes in the same room with,” Autumn complained.

“Sounds like a lovely party,” Kyle said, “glad I’m missing it.”

“You’ll get your share of them soon enough, Kyle,” Autumn smirked.

Kyle moaned. “Why must you be so cruel?”

“It’s necessary,” said Shoshone, who came walking up at that point. After introductions were made, Shoshone turned to Kyle. “I didn’t mean that being cruel to you was necessary, of course. What the two of you do in private is not my concern. I meant that the reception is necessary. There have been certain rumors circulating about the Duchess that we need to quell.”

“What kind of rumors?” Lanara asked.

“The usual,” Shoshone said, waving a hand dismissively. “She’s not fit to rule, she’s not even an elf so how can she rule elves, that sort of thing. At any rate, our concern is to combat these more recent rumors of being ‘the wrong woman for the job’. By initiating this reception outside of the manor, we can show the people that you’re returning the city to more traditional ways, when the Lord Mayor walked openly in the city.”

“Well, that’s two days away still,” Autumn said. “Right now, I think we should go inside and open that wine Maddie talked about, and catch up with each other before Kyle has to leave.”

Maddie smiled. “Keep making decisions like that, Your Grace, and I don’t think you’ll have any trouble winning the people over.”

* * *​

Two days passed. Kyle was long gone, now escorting his family north to the city. Shoshone had briefed the others on the situation in Vargas; she also made sure that three more guests were added to the list at the Medusa’s Lair. There was a brief argument between Autumn and Shoshone; Autumn wanted to wear her armor, while Shoshone pointed out a dress would be more appropriate. In the end, Autumn agreed to the dress, though Shoshone did find a way to make sure the sentinel’s greataxe was nearby, draping a tabard over it and disguising it as a banner. Razael agreed to play the part of banner-bearer at the social; it not only avoided the concerns that the presence of an Imperial Huntsman might raise, but allowed Razael to be present without having to socialize.

Autumn and her entourage arrived at the Medusa’s Lair a little after three bells. It was a large, two-story structure, which appeared very elegant and clean. A doorman waited at the entrance, bowing as he opened the door. The establishment faced a modest courtyard, which featured one of the many statues of Kythrian Vargex. Maddie pointed out the painted steel plate that was bolted onto the statue’s chest, bearing Autumn’s personal heraldry.

“What’s that for?” she asked.

“Tradition, apparently,” Autumn said. “There’s one on every statue in the city now.”

Inside, the Medusa’s Lair appeared like many other taverns, though much nicer than many that the party had been in. Several stone statues were placed around the room, and seemed to comprise the theme of the décor. Ivy grew up some of the statues and around the ceiling beams, and white marble was used in several places. Autumn’s party was directed up a set of curving stairs to the second level, which was set up as more of a restaurant than a tavern. The entire floor had been reserved for the reception, and one long table dominated the room, with elegant setting and centerpieces. Several people were already sitting at the table, who rose to greet the duchess as she arrived. Autumn recognized most of the people there, as she’d met with most of them more formally in the past two months. There were the heads of guilds, landed gentry, and wealthy families. Autumn greeted them, and stood patiently during the obligatory introductions, toasts, and invocations. Thirty minutes later, they all say down.

Lanara tugged on Shoshone’s sleeve, and when the tiefling leaned over, she drew her attention to a man sitting in the corner, playing a harp. “Shoshone, send him away,” she said. “I want to play.”

“I can’t,” she replied quietly. “He’s not our bard, he’s been hired by the house. Besides, I don’t think we should go dismissing the local talent if we want the locals to start liking us more.”

The meal was very good, although Autumn and Arrie barely got to taste theirs, as they spent most of their time exchanging pleasantries with the other guests. Even Lanara and Madrone were forced to engage in more mealtime conversation than they would have liked.

“It’s times like these,” Arrie whispered to Autumn at one point, “that I wish we were dwarves.”*** The comment prompted a chuckle out of Autumn.

After the meal, there was a long speech by the head of the brewer’s guild, and then another by the head of the brewer’s guild. After the speeches, Shsoshone slipped over and whispered into Autumn’s ear.

“The owner of the establishment, Lashonne, would like an introduction,” she said. “Shall I send for her?”

“Of course.”

Shoshone motioned, and one of the servants with the Lair went downstairs. A minute later, the owner came up, and her entrance caught everyone’s attention.

She was a lovely, pale-skinned woman, with a slender build. She wore a light green, diaphanous wrap that left her shoulders bare, and allowed glimpses of flesh to peek though in other places. But that was not what drew attention. Lashonne’s hair was a mass of bright green snakes, and from the waist down she had the body of a serpent. Lashonne glided up the stairs, and slid over to where Autumn sat.

“A pleasure, Your Grace,” Lashonne said, bowing. “It’s an honor to meet you.”

“I’m pleased to make your acquaintance, Lashonne,” Autumn said, trying hard not to react to their host’s strange appearance.

“Thank you. We’ve entertained many important people here over the years, but it’s been some time since our old Duke or the former Lord Mayor came. I’m glad to see you’ve decided to get out of the manor.”

“Well, I want to make sure the people know that I have no intention of hiding from my subjects. Vargas has a long tradition of mutual respect between the people and their leaders, which should be honored.”

“Indeed,” Lashonne said, nodding. “And speaking of honors, would Your Grace be offended if I were to ask your associate to favor us with a few songs?” Lashonne nodded toward Lanara. “It would be a privilege to have a bard of her reputation play here.”

“I would not be at all offended,” Autumn said, smiling. “I’m sure Lanara would relish the opportunity.”

During the exchange, Razael watched Lashonne with narrow eyes. No one seemed alarmed that a medusa was within arm’s reach of the Duchess, but he could hardly remain complacent. But as he watched the woman carefully for signs of an attack, he realized that her snake hair was not nearly as lively as he would have suspected. Looking closer, he realized that the snakes were actually stuffed, with glass beads for eyes. Her serpentine body appeared genuine, but she was no true medusa. Once he realized the deception, Razael relaxed.

Lanara went and played for the assembled guests, taking the place of the Lair’s bard, who graciously stepped aside for her. She sang a ballad written about one of the party’s old exploits, one that featured Autumn in a particularly dramatic and heroic fashion. Cheers and applause greeted her when she finished.

Arrie was about to request another song, when there was a sudden loud noise from downstairs, a metallic crash. Everyone in the room jumped, save for the party members, who were seasoned adventurers, and Shoshone, who never seemed surprised by anything. Guards immediately surrounded both Autumn and Arrie, and Lashonne immediately went downstairs to find the source of the noise. Autumn turned to look at her friends.

“I’ll go,” Maddie said, turning and heading down the stairs. Razael followed right behind her, pulling the tabard off of Autumn’s greataxe and tossing it to the Duchess on his way out.

People downstairs in the tavern were similarly perplexed by the noise, looking around uncertainly as Maddie and Razael came down the stairs. A crowd seemed to be gathering just outside the front door, however, and so they went there, Razael pressing his way through the people as Maddie stayed just inside, using a magical ring she’d recently acquired to peer through the walls and see what was going on.

The focus of attention was obvious. Buried into the wall just above the door, a metal plate jutted out, still shivering slightly. The plate bore the colors and heraldry of Autumn Verahannen, the new Lady Mayor and Duchess of Vargex. Several people were also milling about near the statue of Kythrian, but no one seemed willing to get too close. The plate had obviously come off the statue.

“It threw it,” said one man close to Razael’s shoulder. “I swear by Bles’ bountiful bosom, I saw Kythrian tear the plate off and throw it at the door.”

“She’s in there, isn’t she?” said a woman nearby. “The new duchess?”

“Yeah, I think so. Looks like what they’re saying about her is true.”

Razael immediately moved to the statue, and began searching for tracks. Maddie stayed by the entrance and tried to calm people down. Shortly after that, both Arrie and Autumn came down, surrounded by guards, with Lanara just behind them. Shoshone remained in the room, spinning a few tales to calm the other guests.

Everyone came outside, and saw the damage. Hearing some of the whispers around them, especially with the new Duchess now present, Lanara began quietly working the crowd, not only trying to find out what people saw, but trying to sow uncertainty so that the rumors wouldn’t spread.

Razael came up to Autumn. “Whoever did this either used magic, or set it up a while ago,” he said. “I can’t find any recent tracks of people coming up to that statue, though a lot of folks have walked through this here courtyard.”

Suddenly, there was a screeching noise from across the courtyard. Everyone turned to see an elderly human woman, standing in the midst of the square, pointing a crooked finger directly at Autumn.

“See!” the woman shouted hoarsely. “The signs are true! Kythrian’s spirit is angry! Go home, usurper! Reject the new Duchess!”

Razael glanced at Autumn questioningly. Autumn shook her head slightly. The woman shouted for another moment, then was quickly bustled off by a middle-aged woman.

Shoshone appeared at Autumn’s side, apparently having heard everything. “We’re going inside, now,” she said. Turning to Razael, she whispered, “Follow the woman.”

The party, minus Razael, quickly returned upstairs. The incident was explained away as a simple act of vandalism, surely a sign that the new Duchess had the criminal element nervous. Guards started escorting the guests home, while Autumn and her friends returned to the manor. Shoshone ordered men to repair the damaged statue, and then went herself to check some of the others in the city. Autumn gave some gold to Lashonne to help pay for the damages before leaving.

They waited until Razael and Shsoshone got back before comparing notes. “There are three other altered statues,” Shoshone said. “All in the southern part of town. One had your crest pulled off, though thankfully not thrown anywhere, and the other two appear to have been turned around to look like they have their backs to the manor.”

“I looked for magical auras in the area once things calmed down,” Maddie said. “I didn’t get much, just a trace of illusion on the statue itself and a trace of transmutation on the steel plate.”

“Well, a few people in the courtyard were actually watching,” Lanara said, “and they swear that the statue reached in, pulled the plate off its own chest, and then chucked it at the Medusa’s Lair like a discus. I think was able to catch most of the ‘me too’ crowd.”

“Razael, what about the old woman?” Shoshone asked.

“Following her was no problem,” the tracker said. “She wasn’t trying to hide or run. The gal who got her out of there was her daughter, apparently. Along the way I heard them arguing – the old woman believes there’s some sort of prophecy that says old Kythrian isn’t taking a shine to Autumn and is coming back to restore his throne. She mentioned a name – Madame LeFou. That’s who she heard the rumor from.”

“Well, let’s see here,” Autumn said. “How many people don’t like me, and have the capability of doing this? All of them, I think?”

“Too early to tell who’s behind this,” Arrie said. “We’ll need to look into it.”

“I can look up this Madame LeFou tomorrow,” Lanara said.

“I have contacts I can check,” Shoshone said. “I’ll work those to see what I can dig up.”

“What can I do?” Autumn asked.

“For now, nothing. Go about your normal business. If this is a plot, then we shouldn’t make it easy for them by sending you out into the city.”

Autumn nodded, but the frustration was evident on her face. She wasn’t the type who liked to sit around and wait for something to happen.

Shoshone was out the rest of the night and well into the morning. Her initial inquiries pointed her toward the Poisoned Blade assassin’s guild, as apparently the guild dealt in ‘character assassination’ as well as the more physical kind. She arranged a meeting with one of their members. After the exchange of a fair number of drinks and even more coins, the man told her that his own guild wasn’t behind the recent disturbances.

“Now, I could probably dig around, and find a name,” the man said. “That’d be worth something to you?”

“It’s not what it’s worth to me,” Shoshone said, “it’s what it’s worth to my employer. We understand that information gathering is part of doing business, and certain resources have been allocated toward that. Some of those resources could find their way to you… if your information is accurate.”

“Then perhaps we should discuss how many of those ‘resources’ are going to end up in my pocket tonight.”

There was a brief negotiation.

“Word on the street is that this started with the Black Hand,” the grizzled old rogue said. “Who exactly we don’t know. The Hand’s not got a lot of people left under their banner these days, if you take my meaning. Whoever it is seems to have a halfway decent idea in his head, decent enough to risk stepping into our territory. With a little time, and a little more grease, I could get a name, like I said.”

“Why don’t you give us a chance to check out what you’ve shared so far,” Shoshone said. “If it’s accurate, and I wish to have you look further into the matter, then I’ll leave a ‘gift’ for you with the barkeep here.”

“Agreed.”

Shoshone departed the small tavern, and after making sure she wasn’t being followed, made her way back to the manor.

The next day, Lanara set out to find Madame LeFou, disguising herself as a common house servant. She was given directions after only a few minutes of asking around, and later that morning found herself in the southeastern part of Vargas, not far from the Straight Road. Madame LeFou’s business was a tiny storefront, no doubt with an apartment attached in the rear. A faded sign over the door depicted a crystal ball between two feminine eyes.

Opening the door, Lanara was assaulted by the scent of incense and cheap perfume. A bell hung by the door chimed merrily as the door swung open. Pushing through heavy curtains, she came upon a small table, draped with a heavy cloth, with a crystal sphere in the middle. The curtains hung all the way around the room, and braziers in each corner wafted scented smoke into the air.

A moment later, the curtains on the far side of the room parted, and a middle-aged elf-touched woman stepped through. She wore heavy makeup, and gaudy, loose clothing, accentuated by costume jewelry.

“Come in, come in!” fluttered Madame LeFou, gesturing toward an empty chair even as she settled into the other. “Read your fortune, consult the spirits, divine your future?”

“Well, it’s not so much my own future,” Lanara said, sitting down. “I’m more worried about our new Duchess. There were some terrible portents last night.”

“Yes, I have heard. The spirits have spoken to me.”

“What were they saying? Should we protect ourselves? Flee the city?”

Madame LeFou shook her head. “It seems that the spirit of Kythrian, our founder and eternal protector, has become angry at this outsider, this usurper who has come.”

“But… but… Princess Ariadne is here, too. I thought the Crown was favorable toward…”

“Do not question the spirits!” Madame LeFou interjected suddenly.

“I’m… not questioning them,” Lanara said, trying hard not to laugh out loud.

“I am not here to interpret their will, young lady,” LeFou said reproachfully. “I am merely a conduit to the beyond.”

“Okay, then, can I talk to him?”

“Talk to who, dear?”

“Kythrian.”

Madame LeFou blinked for a moment. “Such a communion would be difficult, young lady. Kythrian’s spirit is potent. I cannot predict the risks.”

“Oh, please,” Lanara said, putting on her best ‘naïve girl’ routine. “I’ve been saving up my salary for a reading.” She pulled out a small coin purse, heavy with coins. Pocket change for her, but probably three day’s earnings for Madame LeFou. Predictably, the fortuneteller’s eyes widened.

“Well, perhaps we can try, since it is so important to you,” she said. “Please, sit quietly. I must have absolute silence while I attempt to connect with Kythrian’s spirit.”

Lanara had traveled all over Affon, and had seen her share of fortuneteller acts in hin circuses, carnivals, and festivals. Madame LeFou’s performance was average at best, though she at least affected a passable male falsetto when ‘channeling’ Kythrian. Lanara figured the only thing that kept most of her customers from catching on was the fact that all the incense burning in the tiny room was making her a little light-headed. Predictably, when Lanara asked ‘Kythrian’ some challenging questions, such as why exactly he was angry at Autumn, the ‘contact’ was suddenly broken. Lanara decided to turn the tables on Madame LeFou.

“I’m… I’m sorry, dear,” LeFou was saying, her eyelids fluttering, “maintaining the connection with the spirit world is always difficult.”

“It seems like you still have a connection,” Lanara said, pointing.

Madame LeFou opened her eyes to see her crystal ball floating a foot off the table, slowly drifting toward her face. She seemed slightly alarmed by this.

“I… I think perhaps you’ve angered the spirits, young lady,” LeFou stammered. “Perhaps you should be on your way.”

“If they’re mad at me, why is the ball coming toward you?” Lanara asked innocently. As if to prove her point, the crystal ball suddenly came up to within a few inches of the fortuneteller’s face. LeFou’s eyes darted around the room, as the ball inched closer. Finally, as the ball came within a hair’s breadth of her nose, a ghostly, sinister face suddenly materialized inside it.

With a shriek, Madame LeFou bolted for the back door, knocking her chair over and nearly toppling one of the braziers. As the door slammed shut, Lanara sighed, and ended her mage hand spell, letting the ball drop onto the table. Then she pulled out her lute and began to play a calming, yet entrancing tune. Sure enough, within a few minutes an enthralled Madame LeFou came back into the room and calmly sat down after righting her chair.

“Now,” said Lanara, dropping the act of innocence, “why don’t you tell me all about the ‘spirits’ that gave you this rumor about the Duchess?”

-------------------

* in underworld parlance, a "two-stick man" is a rogue who has specialized in the Use Magic Device skill (originating from the idea of 'rubbing two sticks together to make fire').

** Recall that Arrie was given a ten-year span after marrying Herion to explore the world before she would be obligated to return to Tlaxan and join the Imperial Court full time. She has now used up a little over five years.

*** Dwarven custom dictates that no one speaks during meals, or for a period of time afterward, as it is thought to upset the digestion.
 

Remove ads

Top